Namibia Vision 2030 - Policy Framework for Long-Term National Development

Prosperity, Harmony, Peace and Political Stability Namibia Vision 2030 Policy Framework for Long-Term National Development (Main Document) Office of the President Windhoek (2004) © Government of the Republic of Namibia, 2004 All rights reserved. No reproduction, copy or transmission of this publication may be made without written permission. No paragraph of this publication may be reproduced, copied or transmitted save with written permission. Any person who does any unauthorised act in relation to this publication may be liable to criminal prosecution and civil claims for damages. Published in 2004 by Office of the President Windhoek Design and Layout by AIM Publications (Pty) Ltd P.O. Box 40303, 21 K6rnerstrasse, Windhoek, Namibia. Tel:+264 61 24 1440 Fax:+264 61 241447 ISBN 99916-56-03-0 Printed by NAMPRINT, Windhoek, Namibia SE sou Gus T4USERUERSSUSSNSMESOWSdAsESEESsuSAEENeRhaaeese Acronyms and Abbreviations Foreword Preface CHAPTER ONE: BACKGROUND TO VISION 2030 Introduction Why a Vision for Namibia The Vision Formulation Strategy Implementation of the Vision Organisation of this Document CHAPTER TWO: NAMIBIA — AN OVERVIEW Introduction Geography People Political History Economy Social Debt Environmental Debt Post-independence Progress Challenges for the Future Namibia’s Comparative Advantages Principles Cherished by the Nation Identification of Priority Issues New Ways of Thinking CHAPTER THREE: NAMIBIA VISION 2030 Introduction Issues for Vision 2030 Namibia Vision 2030 Objectives of Vision 2030 Broad Strategies for Vision 2030 Milestones CHAPTER FOUR: PEOPLES’ QUALITY OF LIFE Population and Health Population Size and Growth Migration, Urbanization and Population Distribution Population Age and Sex Distribution Healthy Living for Longevity Promoting Healthy Human Environment Wealth, Livelihood and the Economy Macroeconomic Environment Transport Infrastructure Employment and Unemployment Data and Research Developing a Knowledge-based Society Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Production Technology Education and Training Early Childhood Development Aspects of the Legislative/Regulatory Framework 13 19 19 19 20 21 22 25 25 25 28 28 29 29 30 31 32 32 33 34 36 38 38 38 38 40 Al 42 44 44 44 47 50 53 57 61 61 65 69 74 77 77 83 87 96 99 TABLE OF CONTENTS Equity: Individuals, Community and the State Poverty Reduction and Social Safety Nets Gender and Development Youth and Development Senior Citizens People Living with Disabilities Fostering and Orphanage Culture and Tradition Civic Affairs Public Safety Civil Society and its Organisation The Family CHAPTER FIVE: SUSTAINABLE RESOURCE BASE Freshwater and Associated Resources Production Systems and Natural Resources Land and Agricultural Production Forestry Wildlife and Tourism Fisheries and Marine Resources Non-renewable Resources Biodiversity The Urban Environment CHAPTER SIX:CREATING THE ENABLING ENVIRONMENT Sustainable Development International Relations Development Co-operation Peace and Security Regional Integration Globalisation Democratic Governance Decentralization Responsible Decision-making Institutional Capacity for Development APPENDICES National Aspirations Conference Organisation of the Conference Welcoming Remarks Keynote Address Vote of Thanks The Vision Formulation Process Members of the Steering Committee Members of the National Core Team Namibia Vision 2030: Members of the National Committee Vision 2030 Project Office List of Materials / Documents produced under The Vision 2030 Project 101 101 108 111 116 117 120 122 125 128 131 133 136 136 140 142 146 150 157 162 164 170 174 175 179 184 187 190 197 201 204 209 212 217 218 218 219 221 225 227 239 241 243 246 247 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AIDS Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome ARI Acute Respiratory Infection ACP African, Caribbean, Pacific Countries ADB African Development Bank AGOA African Growth Opportunity Act ASP Application Service Provider ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode AU African Union BADEA Banque Arab du Development en Afrique BLNS Botswana, Lesotho, Namibia and Swaziland BTP Build Together Programme CBI Cross Border Initiatives CBNRM Community-Based Natural Resource Management CBS Central Bureau of Statistics CBO Community-Based Organisation CBT Community-Based Tourism CD Compact Disc CET Common Excise Tariff CFA Communaute Financiere Africaine CMA Common Monetary Area COD Congress of Democrats COMESA Common Market for Eastern and Southern Africa COSDEC Community Skills Development Centre CSO Civil Society Organisation DIP Decentralisation Implementation Plan DOTS Directly Observed Treatment Shortcourse DRAMs Dynamic Random Access Memories DRFN Desert Research Foundation of Namibia DTA Democratic Turnhalle Alliance DVD Digital Versatile Disc DWA Department of Water Affairs EA Environmental Assessment ECD Early Childhood Development ECOMOG ECOWAS Military Observer Group ECOWAS Economic Community of West African States EDF European Development Fund EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EIF Environmental Investment Fund EISA Electoral Institute of Southern Africa EMP Environmental Management Plans EPI Expanded Programme on Immunisation EPZ Export Processing Zone EPLs Exclusive Prospecting Licences EU European Union FDI Foreign Direct Investment FPRM Foreign Policy Response Model FTA Free Trade Area GDP Gross Domestic Product ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 GEAR Growth, Employment and Redistribution GFCF Gross Fixed Capital Formation GIPF Government Institutions Pension Fund GNP Gross National Product GRN Government of the Republic of Namibia GSP Generalised System of Preferences GSM Global System for Mobile Communications HDI Human Development Index HPI Human Poverty Index HIS Health Information System HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus IATCP Inter Agency Technical Committee on Population ICT Information and Communication Technology ICJ International Court of Justice ICZMP Integrated Coastal Zone Management Plan IEC Information, Education and Communication IFAD International Fund for Agricultural Development IGAD Intergovernmental Authority on Development ILO International Labour Organization IMF International Monetary Fund IMR Infant Morality Rate ISO International Standards Organization IT Information Technology LAN Local Area Network LNS Lesotho, Namibia and Swaziland MAG Monitor Action Group MAP Millennium African Recovery Plan MARPOL International Convention on the Prevention of Pollution from Ships MET Ministry of Environment and Tourism MF Ministry of Finance MFAIB Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Information and Broadcasting MIGA Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency MONUA UN Observer Mission in Angola MLRR Ministry of Lands, Resettlement and Rehabilitation MMR Maternal Mortality Rate MOJ Ministry of Justice MOL Ministry of Labour MOP Ministry of Prisons MOD Ministry of Defence MOF Ministry of Fisheries MOHSS Ministry of Health and Social Services MOHA Ministry of Home Affairs MONOUA United Nations Observer Mission in Angola MRLGH Ministry of Regional, Local Government and Housing MTI Ministry of Trade and Industry MTC Mobile Telecommunications Corporation MWACW Ministry of Women Affairs and Child Welfare MWTC Ministry of Works, Transport and Communication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 NACHE National Advisory Council for Higher Education NAI New African Initiative NAMCOL Namibia College of Open Learning NANGOF Namibia Non-Governmental Organisations Forum NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organisation NBC Namibia Broadcasting Corporation NCC National Communications Commission NCCI Namibia Chamber of Commerce and Industry NDF National Defence Force NDP National Development Plan NEACB National Examination, Assessment and Certification Board NEPAD New Partnership for African Development NEPLs Non-exclusive Prospecting Licenses NEPRU Namibia Economic Policy Research Unit NGO Non-Governmental Organizations NIED National Institute for Educational Development NIMT Namibia Institute of Mining and Technology NLTPS National Long-term Perspective Studies NPCS National Planning Commission Secretariat NQA Namibia Qualifications Authority NTA National Training Authority NTCP National Tuberculosis Control Programme NUNW National Union of Namibian Workers OAU Organisation of African Unity OECD Organisation for Economic Co-operation & Development OPEC Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Countries OPM Office of the Prime Minister PC Personal Computer PLAN People’s Liberation Army of Namibia PON Polytechnic of Namibia PEAC Presidential Economic Advisory Council RSA Republic of South Africa SADC Southern Africa Development Community SADCC Southern Africa Development Co-ordination Conference SDR Special Drawing Rights SME Small and Medium Size Enterprises SSC Social Security Commission STDs Sexually Transmitted Diseases SWAPO South West Africa People’s Organisation SWATF South West Africa Territory Force TACs Total Allowable Catches TB Tuberculosis VAT Value Added Tax VET Vocational Education and Training VTB The Vocational Training Broad VTC Vocational Training Centre UN United Nations ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 UNAM University of Namibia UNAVEM United Nations Angolan Verification Mission UNCCD United Nations Convetion to Combat Desertification UNCED United Nations Conference on Environment and Development UDF United Democratic Front UNDP United Nations Development Programme UNFCCC United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change UNTAG United Nations Transitional Assistance Group USSR Union of Soviet Socialist Republics WAMU West African Monetary Union WAMZ West African Monetary Zone WASP Water and Sanitation Programme WB World Bank WTO World Trade Organisation WTO2 World Tourism Organisation (noting that the acronym WTO is used for the World Trade Organisation) ZERI Zero Emission Research Initiative WCED World Commission on Environment and Development WCU World Conservation Union ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9 Why Vision 2030? A national vision is a perception of the future, which reveals and points to something new, beyond what is already available and accessible. The goal of our Vision is to improve the quality of life of the people of Namibia to the level of their counterparts in the developed world, by 2030. In order to get there, we need a framework that defines clearly where we are today as a nation, where we want to be by 2030 and how to get there. Defining this framework in operational terms is visioning. Visioning for a nation means creating multiple alternative development strategies and integrated implementation approaches, for reaching the goal of future development. Namibia Vision 2030 presents a clear view of where we are, where we want to go from here, and over what time frame. It is a vision that will take Namibia from the present into the future; a vision that will guide us to make deliberate efforts to improve the quality of life of our people. It is designed as a broad, unifying vision which would serve to guide the country’s five-year development plans, from NDP 2 through to NDP 7 and, at the same time, provide direction to government ministries, the private sector, NGOs, civil society, regional and local Government authorities. Therefore, Namibia vision 2030 will create policy synergies, which will effectively link long-term perspectives to short-term planning. Expected changes Our future is about the people. Therefore, at the centre of the visioning exercise is concern for the population in relation to their social (particularly health), economic and overall well-being. For example, how many Namibians? How well are they living? Where do they live, and what do they do for a living? All the questions about the welfare and well-being of the people of this country at any point in time, even beyond 2030, are about our population and the conditions under which they live and commonly agreed living standard at a given point in time. The Vision will transform Namibia into a healthy and food-secure nation, in which all preventable, infectious and parasitic diseases (including HIV/AIDS) are under secure control; people enjoy high standards of living, a good quality life and have access to quality education, health and other vital services. All of these aspirations translate into a long life expectancy and sustainable population growth. The Vision is also designed to promote the creation of a diversified, open market economy, with a resource-based industrial sector and commercial agriculture, placing great emphasis on skills development. In addition, the Vision will promote competitiveness in the export sector, in terms of product quality and differentiation. In support of the objectives of Vision 2030, capacity building will be pursued with the utmost vigour by both the private and public sectors, to facilitate the implementation of the Vision. The capacity building process (including institution restructuring and building, and human resource development) will continue to be promoted by the existence of a suitable, enabling environment in terms of political stability and freedom, a sound legal system, economic FO RE W OR D Dr. Sam Nujoma PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF NAMIBIA ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 resources and opportunities, and social norms which are conducive to sustained development. All of this must be well understood by most of the population. In order to realise the objectives of capacity building in Vision 2030, human resource information management systems will be strengthened; the ultimate objective is to balance the supply and demand in the labour market and in this way achieve full employment in the economy. As required by this Vision, the country will operate a totally integrated, unified, flexible and high quality education and training system, that prepares Namibian learners to take advantage of a rapidly changing global environment, including developments in science and technology. This, inturn, would and that contribute to the economic and social development of the citizens. There will be equal access to excellent educational and vocational training institutions and quality sports services/facilities by all, with basic education placing emphasis on Science and Mathematics. Public education, covering every area of life and living, will be an integral part of the system of continuing education, which is free and open to everyone in Namibia. Moral education will be well integrated into the school curricula. In order to meet the exigencies of industrial transformation, Namibia will continue to monitor cross-sectoral internal and external development in the field of “knowledge, information and technology” and assesses its impact on the rights of the individual and the functioning of society and the national economy. Arising from the overall capacity building investments, Namibia will be transformed into a knowledge-based society, and changes in production and information technology will revolutionalise all aspects of the manufacturing process. Relationships with customers and suppliers and the manner in which products are marketed and sold, would receive quality attention. Over a decade after Independence, Namibia is yet to overcome the legacy of extreme inequalities based on race and left behind by the ‘apartheid’ regime. Vision 2030 is expected to reduce inequalities and move the nation significantly up the scale of human development, to be ranked high among the developed countries in the world. There will thus be a pervasive atmosphere of tolerance in matters relating to culture, religious practices, political preference, ethnic affiliation and differences in social background. The Vision will facilitate equity in access to social services and facilities, as well as access to productive resources such as land and capital. Namibia will be a just, moral, tolerant and safe society with legislative, economic and social structures in place to eliminate marginalisation and ensure peace and equity between women and men, the diverse ethnic groups, and people of different ages, interests and abilities. While Namibia enjoys internal peace and stability, numerous external threats which have the potential to disrupt and derail the country’s socio-economic progress, can be discerned. These threats do not emanate from States per se nor from the projection of State power, but from non-traditional forms of conflict and unconventional warfare. Therefore, Namibia will continue to be at the forefront of SADC efforts to create a collective security framework, based on the relevant SADC Protocols on politics, defence and security, signed by regional heads of state. While collective security offers the best and most effective instrument of ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11 national security, regional security will also serve to thwart de-stabilizing elements by denying them succour and sanctuary in member states. One of the major principles upon which our Vision is based is ‘partnership’. Partnership is recognised as a major prerequisite for the achievement of dynamic, efficient and sustainable development in the country. This involves partnership between government, communities and civil society; partnership between different branches of government, with the private sector (the business community), non governmental organisations, community-based organisations and the international community; partnership between urban and rural societies and, ultimately, between all members of Namibian society. While the principle of sustainable development is the cornerstone on which the strategies for realizing the objectives of Vision 2030 pivot, the driving force among the complex agents of our development comprises the following: • Education, Science and Technology • Health and Development • Sustainable Agriculture, and • Peace and Social Justice • Gender Equality The challenges The major challenge of this Vision is for all of us (Government, private sector, civil society, as well as individuals) to make a determined effort to concentrate on resolving, not just addressing, very important national problems. This document: Namibia Vision 2030 – Policy Framework for Long-Term National Development, presents a clear view of the major national problems and how these problems can be effectively resolved by deploying-to the fullest-our human and natural resources. Successful implementation of the Vision would require the existence of a conducive enabling environment, which guarantees peace and political stability. In this regard, we are challenged to continue to acknowledge the pre-eminence of the Namibian Constitution as the basic law, which contains, inter alia, all the ingredients of a democratic state including peace, security and political stability. By continuing to uphold the tenets of our Constitution, we strengthen human rights, individual freedoms, civil liberties and multi-party democracy. Our emphasis will also be on good governance, and we should continue to improve on issues relating to equity in terms of access to productive resources, including land, environmental degradation, growing poverty and economic stagnation. The business community will be challenged to make increasing contributions to the education and training sector, since it is the major recipient of the products of the system. In addition, the business sector will be challenged to make realistic inputs into development plan formulation at national and regional levels, as well as make contributions to the implementation of such plans. In particular, Vision 2030 will challenge the business community to enhance international trade, implement Affirmative Action, create employment opportunities for the country’s growing labour force and facilitate the expansion of small and medium scale enterprises. Namibia’s future will also depend largely on the people themselves; much will depend on our ability and willingness to respond with innovation and commitment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12 to new challenges. If we are to survive as a nation, perhaps the greatest challenge we face now is to eradicate HIV/AIDS, as well as all preventable infectious and parasitic diseases through healthy living. As we march forward in implementing the programmes of this Vision, we should be prepared to ask ourselves, from time to time, if we are truly on course and on time. But the immediate challenge we face as a nation, now that we have a Vision document that defines our country’s future development possibilities, is to ensure that the Vision is translated into reality. As a step in that direction, the next Phase (Phase2) of the Vision Project should be to develop implementation strategies and integrated programmes and projects, as well as mobilizing both human and financial resources. The programmes of Vision 2030 have specific targets and periodically, through the National Development Plans, we will evaluate the Vision programme’s performance. By the year 2030, with all of us working together, we should be an industrial nation enjoying prosperity, interpersonal harmony, peace and political stability. Sam Nujoma President of the Republic of Namibia ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13 Namibia’s 2030 Vision is one of the most important initiatives undertaken in the country since the drafting and acceptance of the National Constitution. The Vision 2030 planning process commenced in January 1998, when His Excellency the President, Dr Sam Nujoma, drew attention to the need for members of the Cabinet to be clear about “... where we are, where we wish to go, and over what time frame.” As a result, eight teams were tasked by the National Planning Commission to undertake research that would comprehensively chart the course. A long-term vision is a unifying concept for a nation. Everyone would like to have access to good education for their children, good and accessible health care, a clean and productive environment, an efficient and profitable economy that supports full and rewarding employment, low levels of crime, a just and tolerant society and meaningful transparent governance. Such vision also offers the nation an ideal to work towards. Furthermore, it sets key targets and identifies some approaches that could be applied. The eight thematic reports which feed into this long-term vision are: 1. Inequality and Social Welfare 2. Peace and Political Stability 3. Human Resources Development and Institutional Capacity Building 4. Macroeconomic Issues 5. Population, Health and Development 6. Namibia’s Natural Resources Sector 7. Knowledge, Information and Technology, and 8. Factors of the External Environment In preparing these reports for Vision 2030, three higher-order questions were asked, namely 1. What is the national ideal that Namibia is working towards? 2. What is the cornerstone of Namibia’s approach and philosophy? 3. How does the national development process fit into the vision? PR EF AC E Immanuel Ngatjizeko Director General National Planning Commission ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14 THE NATIONAL IDEAL In essence, it is the collective wish of the Namibian people, and the Vision for 2030 and beyond, that Namibia enjoys: • Prosperity, • Interpersonal Harmony, • Peace, and • Political Stability A Basic Principle The concept of sustainable development is the cornerstone on which this work was based. Namibia has subscribed to this approach in its National Constitution, and has committed itself internationally, by adopting the United Nations Agenda 21 principles. The philosophy and principles of sustainable development cut across all sectors. Indeed, sustainable development is achieved only where sustainability in all sectors of endeavour is attained – social, economic and ecological. For the purposes of this study, sustainable development is defined as follows: The Key Elements for the VISION for 2030 will Depict: The people of Namibia as well developed, prosperous, healthy and confident in an atmosphere of interpersonal harmony, peace and political stability; and as such, Namibia is a developed country to be reckoned with as a high achiever in the comity of nations. The People and Resource Base will Reflect that: People are the nation’s human wealth: a population of healthy, well educated, skilled, pro-active and financially stable people with a broad range of talents and positive attitude towards themselves, their fellow citizens, their country and global humanity. Foreign professional people and global businesses will perceive Namibia as a good environment in which to invest and from which to do local and international work, thus creating both wealth and employment. Natural resources- the nation’s ecological wealth: healthy, productive land with effective water and mineral cycling leading to infrequent, low level drought and flooding. Perennial rivers running permanently and clear, underground water levels stable and no silting of dams. No atmospheric pollution from croplands and rangelands and minimal pollution from urban and industrial areas will be permitted. Farms and natural ecosystems shall be productive, diverse, stable and sustainable – socially, economically and ecologically. Forests, savannas, deserts, wetlands, coastal and marine ecosystems will be open, diverse, stable and productive. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15 Namibia has embarked on a process of preparing and implementing five-year NDP. One shortcoming in these plans is that they tend to address immediate needs – a road, a clinic, a water point. What is missing in the process is a longer-term vision towards which each five-year plan should be working, including both the immediate needs of roads and water points, and the longer-term components that are needed to build a prosperous, productive and sustainable society. Vision 2030 provides this long-term perspective. The Vision 2030 initiative needs to be effectively linked and integrated into the NDP process, both institutionally and procedurally, to bring the two into highly productive synergy. The diagram below illustrates how this should be done. Sustainable Development ... development that meets the needs of the present without limiting the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. The National Development Process NDP1 Green Plan NDP 2 Vision 2030 NDP 3 NDP 4 NDP 5 NDP 6 NDP 7 Broad, unifying vision that provides sectors with strategic direction that they must each operationalise through through the development of strategies, and monitor through indicators. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U p d a te d s e c to r p o li c ie s , p la n s a n d p ro je c ts t h a t fo ll o w a n i n te g r a te d , s u s ta in a b le d e v e lo p m e n t a n d a p p r o a c h B y m o n it o r in g l o n g te r m i n d ic a to r s , N P C c o o r d in a te s a s e c to ra l a n d i n te r s e c to ra l a n a ly s is o f p ro g re s s t o w a rd s a c h ie v in g V is io n 2 0 3 0 8 Thematic Report ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16 The overriding prerequisite for the achievement of dynamic, efficient and sustainable development in Namibia is Partnership. Partnership between government and civil society, between different branches of government, with the private sector, non-governmental organisations, community-based organisations, and the international community. Between urban and rural societies and, ultimately, between all members of Namibian society. Vision 2030 is an initiative that can help to unify all Namibians to achieve their long-term development needs and initiatives, and promote and nurture partnerships. This report draws on the eight thematic reports. It also draws on a national “Aspirations” workshop, a Decision-makers survey, regional consultations, Ministry-priorities and objectives, and a host of other national and local consultative and planning initiatives, including Regional Development Plans, Namibia’s second five-year NDP and Namibia’s Assessment Report to the World Summit for Sustainable Development. Hon. Immanuel Ngatjizeko Director General, National Planning Commission ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19 1. BACKGROUND TO VISION 2030 1.1 INTRODUCTION The stimulus for formulating a vision for Namibia was provided by His Excellency, the President, Dr. Sam Nujoma, through his statement to the Cabinet in January 1998. In that address, he called on the Cabinet to deliberate on its vision for Namibia: “a vision that will take Namibia from the present into the future; a vision that will guide us to make deliberate efforts to improve the quality of life of our people to the level of their counterparts in the developed world by the year 2030”. Such a vision, according to the President, called for a determined effort by all concerned to “concentrate on resolving, not just addressing, very important national problems”. In practical terms, the call was for a comprehensive mission statement based on a critical review of past performance in all sectors of the economy and society, objective situation analysis and imaginative as well as realistic projection into the future, by the year 2030. As envisaged by His Excellency, the President, the vision would require built-in mechanisms for the monitoring and evaluation of predetermined targets in all the sectors, including annual and five-yearly evaluations, and a major review of performance every decade. In response to the challenge of Vision formulation, Cabinet directed the NPC to coordinate the activities that would lead to the production of a shared national vision for the country over the next 30 years. Vision formulation for a country is, therefore, an exercise in planning for the management of future development. Otherwise referred to as National Long term Perspective Studies (NLTPS), a national vision provides the people with a sense of direction, discovery and destiny. Popularised in Africa by the UNDP since 1992, the NLTPS concept is a complimentary approach to current efforts by African governments (including Namibia) to reform their economies and societies. Its focus is on providing a systematic process for developing and implementing consistent long-term development strategies, based on active participation of the people at each stage of the process (UNDP, 1998:5). Many African countries have already formulated their visions, and many more are at one stage or another in that process. 1.2 WHY A VISION FOR NAMIBIA? The Government has, since Independence established a planning system based on medium-term plans, for promoting sustainable socio-economic development in Namibia. There is, however, as yet no articulated long-term national plan (or vision) or scenarios within which the short and medium development goals are to be based. Based on policy oriented research on key national strategic issues, and on a process of discussion and dialogue (involving the private sector, civil society and the donor community) on the long term goals and future of the country, Vision 2030 provides long term alternative policy scenarios on the future course of development CH AP TE R ON E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 20 in Namibia at different points in time up until the target year 2030. The Vision provides guidance to planning questions such as the following: • Given the past and current conditions, what would development in the country portray by year 2015, 2020 and 2030? • What do the people want their country to depict by these future points in time? • What should Namibians do, between now and year 2030, to elevate the country to the level of a developed society? It is clear that the dynamic process in the long-term future is more important for planning than the end point of the process. Perspective thinking is particularly relevant for the short-and medium-term implementation of long-term planning targets. Long-term perspective plans are also useful for anticipating changes, and for understanding events that are likely to happen. For example, given the current level of development, what would education scenario look like by the year 2015, 2020 and 2030? What would happen if dropouts from school increased if the Government succeeded in eradicating illiteracy by year 2015? What would happen if the current and planned HIV/AIDS activities succeeded in eradicating the desease by year 2010, for example? These are pertinent questions, particularly because they directly influence development and investment decisions, expenditure and the allocation of funds. They are directly linked to public policies and decision-making. Therefore, Namibia Vision 2030 will create policy synergies, which will effectively link long-term perspectives to short-term planning. Long-term perspectives are needed to understand the future repercussions of the past and current policies and planning activities. 1.3 THE VISION FORMULATION STRATEGY A key element in the vision formulation process was that it must be a shared vision, developed through national dialogue. Unless it is a shared vision, it may not be socially and politically acceptable. Therefore, as a tool for social dialogue and part of good governance, the Vision process in Namibia involved, as much as possible, the major social groups, at national and regional levels, in various aspects of the formulation process. It was precisely for the above reason that the interests of all stakeholders were solicited to make contributions to this national dialogue about the future of Namibia. Representatives of the Government, operators in the private sector (commerce and industry) and representatives of civil society were consulted to make contributions to the national dialogue on the future of the country. This approach allows for the interest of the people through their contributions at the implementation stage. The immediate challenge faced by the vision management, was to establish a credible information base from which the vision would be derived. As a start, the NPC compiled a background document that put together much of the information available on the different sectors of our economy and society. As a way of determining people’s aspirations for the future, a survey of ‘Opinion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 21 Leaders’ in the country was conducted in April/May 2000 by the NPC, and findings of this study proved most valuable in the determination of the issues for the multi disciplinary research that provided the core of the vision information base. The National Core Team, a group responsible for the technical coordination of the visioning process, organised a ‘Sensitization Mission’ to the 13 regions of the country (July/August 2001), the aim of which was to share the objectives and strategy of the Vision 2030 project with the general public through a series of regional workshops. These workshops provided ample opportunity to discuss the various aspects of the project, well as an opportunity for the collection of information on the peoples aspirations for the future. The National Committee on Vision 2030 was established with an overall objective to provide technical advice to the NPC on issues pertaining to the formulation of Vision 2030, and appropriate strategies for its implementation. In accordance with its terms of reference, the National Committee provided advice to the National Core Team and the NPC on key strategies and issues considered relevant to the formulation of a broad-based vision for the country in year 2030. These included identification of critical development and management issues; by what means; how the vision would be realised; and a strategy for consolidating and improving on progress made. Members of the National Committee included distinguished Namibians from the private and public sectors, and the civil society. Each of the 13 Regional Governors in the country were members of the National Committee. The Vision 2030 management employed the services of Multi-disciplinary Research Groups to undertake a study of Namibia’s past and current experience in development and the prospects for the future, bearing in mind its natural, material and financial resources, and its cultural, regional and international context. The thematic reports (see Figure 1.1) of this study, as well as other documents in the information base, were publicly discussed at the National Aspirations Conference held in May 2002, as part of the vision formulation process by the National Core Team. Information from these research reports formed the basis of the Vision formulation. The Conference also served to ensure popular participation in the vision formulation process. (See Appendix 1, for additional information on the National Conference, and speeches by HE, The President). 1.4 IMPLEMENTATION OF THE VISION It was made clear throughout all the consultation processes – workshops held for the preparation of the eight thematic reports, the survey of opinion leaders, the regional sensitization and aspirations workshops conducted by the Core Team and the National Aspirations Conference – that people want and expect Vision 2030 to be competently and comprehensively implemented. Following the dissemination of Vision 2030 to the general public, Vision 2030 management will be re-defined and transformed from a policy formulation to a coordinating agency for implementation, using a comprehensive Master Plan for Vision 2030. To ensure effective implementation of Vision 2030, an appropriate institutional framework will be developed. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22 Most of the strategies proposed in the Strategic Framework for Long Term Development are broad statements of objectives. In order to fulfil these objectives, certain actions must be taken. These activities, if successfully undertaken, will ultimately lead to the realization of the Vision. Therefore, for each of the stated objectives, the strategic questions that must be addressed through the coordinating role of the Vision implementing organ, are the following: • What is the range of activities involved in achieving an objective? • Who will do what? • What is the time-frame for accomplishing the objective? • With what amount of human, material and financial resources will this be done? • How will achievements be measured? • By what means will the indicators of progress be verified? • What are the risks being assumed? The Vision itself will provide the necessary internal dynamics which will facilitate the realisation of the goals. In essence, the Vision provides the framework to design broad strategies for long-term national development, to be implemented through NDP2 and subsequent Medium Term Plans and their respective budgets. Therefore, NDP2 constitutes the first of the six consecutive programme elements of Vision 2030.This is where the five-yearly planning cycles, currently in use, will continue to provide a sound basis for the monitoring and evaluation of the vision objectives. 1.5 ORGANISATION OF THIS DOCUMENT This document is divided into three parts. Part One contains three chapters namely, Introduction (Chapter 1); overview of Namibia as a nation – the land, people, economy and society, and the challenges we face as a nation (Chapter 2). The theme-based results of the sensitization mission as well as the eight research groups; the views of ‘Opinion Leaders’ and the Vision of the public sector were elaborated on and presented to the National Aspirations Conference and these were summarised in Chapter 3. Part Two of this Vision document represents a synthesis of information gathered, discussed and agreed upon during the visioning process for Vision 2030. Based NAMIBIA VISION 2030 Inequalities & Social Welfare External Environment Peace & Political Stability Human Resources, Institutional & Capacity Building Macro-Economic Issues Population, Health & Development Natural Resources & Environment Knowledge Information & Technology Figure 1.1: Namibia - Issues for Vision 2030 Formulation ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 23 on the steps described above, three overarching concepts emerged. The People’s Quality of Life’ is of the utmost importance for the Vision. This encompasses integrated material from several of the initially identified working themes such as ‘inequality and social welfare’, ‘human resource development and institutional capacity-building’, and ‘population, health and development’. A second major concept to emerge from the synthesis is ‘Sustaining the Resource Base.’ Although organised around sub-topics such as ‘production systems and natural resources’, it, perforce, encompasses and integrates materials from the original themes such as ‘inequality and social welfare’. The third major concept to appear from the synthesis is ‘Creating the Enabling Environment.’ Focusing predominantly on the original themes described as ‘peace and political stability’ and ‘factors of the external environment’, this third major concept embraces and integrates aspects of, inter alia, the original theme of ‘human resource development and institutional capacity-building’. Part Two is designed to help the reader of these documents focus on the three overarching concepts that emerged during the visioning process, while not losing site of details identified during that overall process. Part Three contains the Appendices to this volume. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25 2. NAMIBIA – AN OVERVIEW 2.1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides a brief description of Namibia, its geography and people – past and present. It sets out some of Namibia’s comparative advantages, the principles that we cherish as a nation and how we should approach our long-term development. 2.2 GEOGRAPHY Namibia is situated in south western Africa between latitudes 17o 30” S and 29o S, and longitudes 12o E and 25o E. Namibia has a land area of some 842 000 km2 and is bounded by the Atlantic Ocean to the west, South Africa to the south and Botswana to the east. The largest northern border is with Angola, but in the far north-east of the country it shares a common border with Zambia and a point of contact with Zimbabwe. The country is divided into 13 regions (Figure 2.1). Namibia is an arid country with generally low (Figure 2.2) and highly variable (Figure 2.3) rainfall. Annual rainfall varies from less than 20mm along the coast to more than 600mm in the northeast. A large part of Namibia is classified as desert, and three different desert systems are found within its boundaries. These are the Namib to the west, an ancient desert of sand seas and gravel plains; the Kalahari to the east, characterised by deep sand with no surface water, except for temporary pans, but which has a specific and fairly extensive vegetation; and the Karoo to the south, which is characterised by low rainfall and unproductive soils. However, it supports an extensive vegetation of low-growing, often succulent, shrubs. Only 8% of the country receives over 500mm raining which is regarded as the minimum necessary for dryland cropping, and, this is concentrated in the north east, mainly in the Caprivi region. The central regions of the country have relatively productive soils and reliable rainfall. These soils, while not sufficient to support crop production, are nevertheless well vegetated and help to support livestock. The Kalahari and Karoo regions are also used for extensive livestock production, with mainly large stock in the Kalahari and small stock in the Karoo. With regard to the northernmost parts of the central region, seasonal water is received in the form of local rainfall as well as flooding down an inland delta of drainage channels, which are linked to the Cuvelai river system in Angola. Considerable rain-fed subsistence-crop production also takes place in this region. Land uses across the country are shown in Figure 2.4. CH AP TE R TW O ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 26 Figure 2.4: Land usesFigure 2.3: Variation in annual rainfall Figure 2.1: The 13 regions in Namibia Figure 2.2: Average annual rainfall ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 27 Figure 2.5: Perennial and ephemeral rivers Perennial water sources are very scarce. Such rivers are found only on Namibia’s boundaries – the Orange river in the south, the Kunene and Okavango rivers in the north and the Zambezi and Kwando-Linyanti-Chobe river systems associated with the Caprivi (Figure2.5). Natural springs occur in various scattered locations across the country and there are a few eastward- southern- and extensive westward flowing ephemeral rivers, which carry only surface water for a few days a year. However, they provide important underground aquifers from which water can be abstracted by people and animals throughout most years. Other underground aquifer systems vary in distribution and water quality. An extensive deposit of fine fossil water occurs in the central/northern region, known as the Karstveld. Figure 2.6: Human population distribution ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 28 2.4 POLITICAL HISTORY In 1878 the United Kingdom annexed the harbour of Walvis Bay. In 1883 a German trader, Adolf Luderitz, claimed the rest of the coastal region for Germany, and in 1884 the whole of the country was declared a German protectorate. The colonial period in Namibia was a violent one. German colonists gained control of land, mineral and other resources by a mixture of purchase, theft and application of superior military power. The period between 1890 and 1908 was one of many conflicts between the Germans and Namibian ethnic groups, and resulted in the decimation of the indigenous Namibian populations. Estimates suggest that more that 70% of the Herero people, 50% of the Nama people and 30% of the Damara people were exterminated during the ‘Great War of Resistance’ of 1904-1908. After 1908 Namibians living in the ‘Police Zone’ were not allowed to own cattle, and were forced to take work on white-owned farms, or as indentured labour. Ethnically divided ‘native reserves’ were established. German rule in Namibia came to an end with the outbreak of World War 1 and the Allied occupation of Namibia. In 1920, the League of Nations granted South Africa a mandate which gave it full power of administration and legislation over the territory. The mandate required that South Africa promote the material and 2.3 PEOPLE Namibia’s population size was estimated to be 1.8 million in the 2001 census. With its low population density, compared to most countries in Africa, Namibia makes up 3% of Africa’s land area, but only 0.2% of its population. This is mainly due to the fact that a large part of the country is too dry for human settlement. While there are on average only about 2 people per km2, people are not spread evenly across the country. Most of the rural people live in the north and north east of the country (Figure 2.6) and some 40% of the population lives in urban areas (compared to about 10% in 1936). Palaeontological evidence indicates that the history of human settlement in Namibia goes back to prehistoric times. Nomadic people-ancestors of today’s San-lived a hunter-gatherer lifestyle both inland and along the coast of Namibia, for thousands of years. Later arrivals included the Nama and the Damara people. Livestock-owning pastoralist/agriculturalists including ancestors of today’s Owambo and Herero people moved into Namibia from east-central Africa in various waves of migration, some purportedly date back to the 10th century. Before the arrival of Europeans in Namibia, the country was populated by various groups of nomadic pastoralists, as well as several other groups of more settled pastoralists/ agriculturalists. Clashes between communities occurred periodically, especially over grazing rights. Complex kingdoms and chieftancies, with well defined social and cultural traditions and structured economies, were in existence. The arrival of explorers and settlers from Europe began on a small scale in the 16th and 17th centuries, but the harshness of the Namibian coast, exacerbated along its entire length by the Namib desert, prevented any serious attempts at settlement. By the middle of the 19th century, however, considerable numbers of Europeans, particularly Germans, were beginning to migrate to the area, as explorers, travellers, traders, hunters and missionaries. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 29 moral well-being and social progress of the Namibian people, but this was not upheld. Farmland which had previously been taken over by Germans was now given out or subsidised, to Afrikaaner settlers. The League of Nations was dissolved in 1946, and the newly formed United Nations took over its supervisory authority over South West African territory (now Namibia). The UN declared Namibia a trust territory with rights of self determination, but South Africa refused to acknowledge this. In 1966 the UN revoked South Africa’s mandate and set up a council with authority for the territory, but South Africa continued to ignore this authority. In the meantime in 1948, the Afrikaner led National Party had gained power in South Africa and brought in the ‘apartheid’ system of segregation, which they enforced in Namibia as well as South Africa. This led to the relocation of many indigenous Nambians from their homes both in urban and rural settings. In 1970 the South African government adopted the recommendations of the Odendaal Commission, which recommended the parcelling of Namibia’s land into different ‘homelands’ for different racial groups, with the central block of most productive farmland reserved as ‘commercial farmland,’ which could be owned by whites only – a policy which has left a considerable legacy of resource degradation. Resistance to South Africa’s domination began in the 1950s. Many Namibians went into exile. In 1966 the armed struggle began, with guerrilla attacks on South African-controlled South West Africa. The struggle intensified over the next 20 years. International pressure for Namibia’s independence built up and diplomatic nego tiations intensified. Pressure was put on South Africa to accept the UN resolution 435, which called for the holding of free and fair elections in Namibia, under UN supervision and control, as well as the cessation of war by all parties. Eventually, after an 11 month UN monitored transition period, Namibia gained independ ence on the 21st March 1990, after 106 years of colonial rule. On March 1, 1994 the coastal enclave of Walvis Bay and 12 offshore islands were also transferred to Namibia by South Africa, and the colonial period was effectively ended. The years of colonial rule, however, had left an indellible mark on the face of the country – socially, economically and environmentally. 2.5 ECONOMY While some of the legacies of colonial rule were positive, including a well developed infrastructure, with harbours, schools, clinics, storage dams, boreholes and water pipelines and one of the best roads systems in the world, the detrimental legacies were more far-reaching. It included a significant financial debt, taken out in Namibia’s name by South Africa, a huge social debt, and an equally huge environmental debt - all of which have had a significant effect on the economy of the developing, independent Namibia. Nevertheless, the financial debt was eventually written off after negotiations between Namibia and South Africa. 2.6 SOCIAL DEBT The colonial period had resulted in a total disruption of traditional life of Namibian people. Resettlement programmes had removed people from their ancestral homes and hampered their traditional forms of agriculture and pastoralism, wars had ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 30 decimated their population groups, indentured labour practices had disrupted family life, and colonial legislation had disempowered traditional structures of authority. Colonial rule, and particularly apartheid policies, had also led to severe handicaps making it difficult for indigenous Namibian people to take control of the changed country. Apartheid had led to highly skewed development objectives, which in turn had led to rural and urban poverty, skewed distribution of wealth and unequal access to land and natural resources. Such legislation had also reserved most well-paid jobs with entrenched responsibility for white people and allowed only inferior education for people of other races, while access to medical resources for the majority of the population had also been limited. Foreign missionaries, who had been active in South West Africa throughout the colonial period, had tried in a small way to control these trends, and some Namibians had opportunities while in exile in other countries; but in general only a few Namibians had access to adequate primary health care, education and a challenging work experience. As a result, at Independence Namibia found itself with a huge skills deficit, which will take decades to address meaningfully. 2.7 ENVIRONMENTAL DEBT Namibia’s economy relies heavily on its natural resources. Both renewable and non-renewable natural resources had been severely exploited during colonial times. Long-term and cross-sectoral planning had been ignored, and sustainability had never been an issue, especially as it became obvious that the political situation would have to change. Large scale hunting, often for sport, had decimated game populations throughout the colonial period. Drastic over-exploitation of the rich pelagic fish resources, off Namibia’s coast in the 1960’s and 1970’s, had led to the collapse of populations of commercially important species. Mining had dominated the economy in the 1980’s as large quantities of diamonds, uranium, semi-precious stones, base metals, industrial minerals and dimension stones were removed, often with little care about the ensuing environmental damage. The greatest damage of all however, had been done to Namibia’s farmlands, largely as a result of the implementation of the recommendations of the Odendaal Commission in 1970. This resulted in the country being divided into blocks of land on the ‘homelands’ principle, with different blocks being designated for the use of different ethnic groups – thus leading to the creation of ‘Owamboland’, ‘Hereroland’, ‘Damaraland,’ etc. These homelands were created on marginal farmland while the best farmland of the country was reserved as ‘commercial farmland’ and were available to whites only. This led to a situation where large numbers of the population were concentrated in small areas of marginal land and this led to an inevitable overexploitation of whatever resources those homelands could supply. Owamboland, for example, was designated as the area north of the Etosha pan - an area which receives some seasonal water from local rainfall as well as the extensive Cuvelai drainage system from Angola which allows cultivation of pearl millet in most years. This area became home to 40% of the Namibian population, and deforestation and desertification quickly became major problems. The commercial farmlands, too, ran into problems of environmental degradation. South African government policy allowed for ‘drought relief’ schemes for white ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 31 farmers. This meant that in dry years farmers did not have to de-stock their farms in order to survive financially. The result was overgrazing of grasses and subsequent problems with thorn bushes out-competing grasses until previous rangeland became thicket, which drastically reduced productivity. Another major problem the new government had inherited was that of ownership of land. The white farmers who owned the commercial farmland at the time of Independence had mostly bought their land from others, or inherited it through several generations of ownership in the same family. They believed it belonged to them. Indigenous Namibians, whose ancestors had been forced off the same land by earlier generations of Europeans, also believed that the land should be theirs. Land reform issues are always a source of major contention in developing countries, and Namibia is no exception. 2.8 POST-INDEPENDENCE PROGRESS Since the time of Independence, the Namibian government has taken major steps towards addressing previous imbalances. The Government has upheld the country’s constitutional provisions, as well as put in place other relevant policy and legislative frameworks; implemented extensive country-wide immunisation campaigns which have drastically reduced infant mortalities; undertook the massive task of providing basic education for all Namibians, and higher education for many; has introduced stringent legislation controlling over-exploitation of fisheries resources and instigated a research institute and on-going research projects to monitor stocks; brought in extensive changes involving not only conservation but also sustainable utilisation of natural resources and cross-sectoral co-operation towards these objectives; and continues to seek solutions to the land reform question. Many rural villages have been linked up to the national power grid, and safe water has been brought within reach of many rural communities, by pipeline or canals. The general atmosphere in Namibia in 2003 is that of commitment to further development and positive change. There is still a huge discrepancy in wealth. Poverty remains a serious problem, and at the same time land reform is still considered a thorny issue. It is well known that education for all is a difficult and expensive goal to achieve. Many of the natural resources which have been lost due to exploitation in the past cannot be recovered. Ecological balances have been disrupted and alien species introduced. Bush encroachment is complex, and expensive to reverse. Woodlands have been cut down, top-soil lost due to erosion, salination of soil has occurred and groundwater has been polluted. Water resources are also under increasing pressure. Since Independence, the government has made considerable efforts to provide safe water to most rural households, but much of this is being taken from underground aquifers in an unsustainable way. Long term politically and economically viable solutions for ensuring a safe and reliable water supply for Namibia’s populations, have yet to be found. One of the most daunting development challenges facing Namibia today is the HIV/AIDS epidemic. Namibia is among the countries in the world which have prevalence ratios among pregnant women which exceed 20%. Such a high prevalence ratio is bound to have significant impact on various aspects of the socio-economic life of individuals, families and communities. Children will be particularly hard hit by the epidemic, since they will be affected in two ways: Firstly, those children, who are infected through their HIV positive mothers during ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 32 pregnancy or during or after birth, are expected to die before the age of five years. On the other hand children will also be affected by the death of one or both parents, leaving them orphaned. The loss of those members of the household who would usually be the bread winners, will impact negatively on household income. In addition, households will be expected to care for AIDS patients at least for some of the time before their death. This will be an additional financial as well as psychological burden on households. Pension moneys received by the elderly household members may be the only source of income in many households, and may result in younger members taking up employment earlier than usual. It must therefore be expected that the education of these children will be compromised. In general, it can be assumed that the impact of AIDS will decrease household income and substantially increase expenditure for at least a certain period of time. This might lead to reduced household savings and a marked increase in poverty. 2.9 CHALLENGES FOR THE FUTURE Namibia is changing and developing rapidly. This speed of development presents the country with new challenges: • to ensure it achieves real benefits for people, and that these benefits are spread equitably across society; • to ensure that development does not undermine the country’s future potential and life-support systems. Instead, it should build national and local capital at three levels: economic and financial capital, human and social capital, ecological and environmental capital; • to make optimal and efficient use of resources, opportunities and Namibia’s comparative advantages – over both the short and the long-term. 2.10 COMPARATIVE ADVANTAGES Namibia has a large number of comparative and competitive advantages over other countries in the world. The list below sets out some of the more obvious advantages, none of which has been fully exploited. Indeed, we have not even scratched the surface of some of the potential that exists: • Namibia is a country that is not prone to catastrophes (volcanoes, earthquakes, floods, etc.) other than droughts, for which Namibia can prepare itself by implementing reliable drought mitigation and drought response strategies through means of drought preparedness; • Because of its relatively small population, Namibia can achieve a unity of purpose and a national momentum for change and appropriate development; • As a result of its good infrastructure, communications network, technological focus and location, Namibia can develop as a centre for transport, communications and other service industries which require such infrastructure, such as banking and insurance; • Due to its political stability, relative security and congenial living environment, Namibia, and in particular its capital city, is an attractive place from which to do business; • Namibia has the potential to assume a leading role in the world in terms of the supply of clean and uncontaminated meat and fish, tourism, and in the fields of biodiversity and wilderness; • It’s rich cultural diversity, adds depth to Namibia’s capacity, resilience and its quality of life. This diversity of peoples also shows how cultural harmony can be achieved through tolerance and honouring differences; ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 33 • Namibia is a country where people are proud of their culture, and take it with them in the development pathway, thereby evolving a unique blend of traditional and modern, in ways that integrate social harmony with economic growth and progress; • It has been shown that Namibia can position itself to be responsive, reactive, proactive and manage change effectively and efficiently. Namibia should embrace globalization, and not be afraid of or resist it – but rather to manage and harness aggressively the opportunities that it offers for optimising Namibia’s comparative and competitive advantages; • Namibia could work towards being a service-based economy, through being a skills and knowledge-based society. Linked to this is the opportunity to retain a disbursed economy in small to medium-sized towns and villages with excellent infrastructure and communications networks. This will allow Namibia to avoid the problems of a society living in mega-cities; • For all the above reasons, Namibia does not have to work through the development pathways followed by the current industrialised countries. Instead, by concentrating on skills development, services and its comparative advantages, Namibia can leap ahead to where currently developed countries are likely to be in 30 years. 2.11 PRINCIPLES CHERISHED BY THE NATION Good Governance We continue to acknowledge the pre-eminence of the Namibian Constitution as the basic law, which contains, inter alia, all the ingredients of a democratic state, including peace, security and political stability. By continuing to uphold the tenets of our Constitution, we strengthen human rights, individual freedoms, civil liberties and multi-party democracy. Our emphasis is also on good governance, and we continue to improve on issues relating to equity in access to productive resources, and in reducing environmental degradation, poverty and economic stagnation. Partnership We believe in creating a conducive environment for gender equality and working together as the key to economic progress and social harmony. This is the essence of partnership. It entails partnership between government, communities and civil society, between different branches of government, with the private sector, non governmental organisations, community-based organisations and the international community; between urban and rural societies and, ultimately, between all members of Namibian society. Capacity enhancement The development of our country is in our hands, and our people are the most important resource of the country; therefore, we consider investing in people and our institutions to be a crucial precondition for the desired social and economic transformation. This calls for increasing investments in institution-building, in education and training (including, promotion of science and technology), and implementing health/ population and related programmes and policies. Comparative advantage We shall capitalise on Namibia’s comparative advantages and provide suitable incentives to use our natural resources in the most appropriate and efficient way possible. This would ensure that the decision-makers of today will continue to ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 34 create a safer, healthier and more prosperous future for all Namibians. People-centred economic development Undoubtedly, we need economic growth and diversification to achieve sustainable development. Emphasis is on the welfare of the people, aiming at human development, equitable and balanced growth, resulting in a growing industrial sector, a modernised agricultural sector, and an enabling macro-economic and political environment. National sovereignty and human integrity We cherish our national sovereignty and it must be preserved at all costs; great value is also attached to Namibian tradition and culture. However traditional ideas and practices which tend to inhibit progress towards development targets, may be sacrificed in the interest of the nation. At the centre of all we do are the people of Namibia – healthy, brave, empowered, innovative, fully employed, confident and determined to succeed; everyone has a role to play, on a level playing field, unhindered by race, colour, gender, age, ability, ethnicity, religious affiliation or political inclination. Environment Our environment is clean, and we will continue to keep it so. Sustainable development We fully embrace the idea of sustainable development; the type of development that meets the needs of the present, without limiting the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. To this end, we encourage people to take responsibility for their own development and promote development activities that address the actual needs of the people and require increasing community contributions to development services and infrastructure. Indeed, the principle of sustainable development is a cornerstone of Namibia’s vision, since it embraces all the other principles. Without capacity, partnership and good governance, there will be no sustainable development. Peace and Security Namibia is a relatively peaceful country, and we shall continue to uphold the principle of domestic and regional peace and security being an indispensable condition for the country’s socio-economic development. 2.12 IDENTIFICATION OF PRIORITY ISSUES Planning for long-term sustainable development requires that the Vision adopts a strategic approach. A strategy is simply a plan of action to address a complex situation. Within the complexity of a given or evolving situation, a strategic approach helps to identify key or priority issues. Such issues could be prioritised in the following manner: • Identify a range of solutions and, where necessary, develop scenarios • Address the most important issues which, at the same time, offer good opportunities for success while also providing good benefits to society • Link short-term needs (action) to medium-term targets and long-term visions • Address complex implementation arrangements, when issues cut across sectors and mandates, where authority and responsibility are not clear, and when needing to link local initiatives to district, regional, national and to global initiatives ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 35 • Create integrated approaches, and genuine partnerships between government, business, communities, NGO, academic institutions, donors, etc., because environmental and sustainable development issues and challenges are too complex to be resolved by any one group acting alone, and • Build on existing plans, processes and strategies. The last point is important, since no country ever starts from scratch. There is always a history of existing institutions, existing collaboration and partnership, existing plans, visions and ideas. Strategic approaches should look for ways of linking, for examples, to Namibia’s National Development Planning processes, and to build on these. The concept of sustainable development is the cornerstone on which development thinking throughout world hinges. Namibia has subscribed to this approach since the United Nations Convention on Environment and Development (the so-called Rio Convention or Earth Summit) in 1992 in Brazil, and was an active participant at the World Summit for Sustainable Development (the so-called Rio +10 Summit) in Johannesburg in 2002. The conditions for sustainable development can only be met if at least the three fundamental objectives of economic development, social development and environmental development are adequately addressed at the same time, within politically and culturally acceptable ways. These three objectives underpin the concept of sustainable development and must each be considered in detail (Figure 2.7). Figure 2.7: The systems of sustainable development Local National Global ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 36 Working to achieve sustainable development is a complex and challenging undertaking, but one which is essential for the future of every nation and her people. It is challenging because it requires new thinking, new integrated approaches, new partnerships, and new evaluation systems. Wealth needs to be thought of in financial terms (investments, capital infrastructure), in social terms (human capital in the form of health, education, skills, innovation), and in environmental terms (status and health of natural resources such as fish stocks, forests, rangelands, water, wildlife and soils). Only when all three forms of wealth are stable and positive by linked to production, will sustainable development be achieved. 2.13 NEW WAYS OF THINKING A national long-term vision provides the direction in which all partners should be moving, including government, the private sector, NGOs, universities, communities and civil society as a whole, as well as the support from international development partners. A vision provides a strong framework for collaboration and cooperation. Achieving Vision 2030 requires a paradigm shift from sector development to integrated approaches through strategic partnerships. This means that some structural changes may be required, as well as innovative thinking. The following “new ways” of thinking and working are important: • Move from developing and implementing a fixed plan, which gets increasingly out of date … towards operating an adaptive, dynamic system or process that can continuously improve. Vision 2030 is thus a process, not a plan; • Move from a view that it is the state or government alone that is responsible for sustainable development... towards one that sees responsibility to society as a whole – a full partnership where the state helps create the enabling environment for sustainable development; • Move from centralised and controlled decision-making …towards sharing results and opportunities, transparent negotiations, cooperation and concerted actions; • Move from a focus on outputs (e.g. projects and laws) … towards a focus on outcomes (e.g. impact) that actually contribute to achieving goals and visions – which require good quality participation and process management; • Move from sectoral planning… towards integrated planning – within and between sectors and institutions. The structure of this document has been designed to facilitate this process-based, integrated planning approach to development through partnership, sharing and with a clear focus on outcomes (Figure 2.8). Chapter 3 of the report gives an overview of the issues covered in Vision 2030. Chapter 4 addresses the socio economic issues around peoples’ quality of life, while Chapter 5 covers the ecological and environmental issues of sustaining the resource base and our means of production. Chapter 6 addresses cross-cutting processes that help create the necessary enabling environment for Namibia to proceed along its chosen development path. Implementation of these approaches requires strong political leadership and support from all sectors of society, ranging from the local to national levels. To get a whole country to work constructively and effectively together, requires a ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 37 Good Governance Participation and communication Investment and capacity-building Partnership and collaboration Science, monitoring and adaptation External factors and global security clear National Strategy to give guidance and direction – a National Strategy that has been developed by a broad partnership of stakeholders who want to see their country develop - for both present and future generations. In short, it requires a long-term Vision, or Vision 2030. Figure 2.8: Structure of the Main Body of the Vision 2030 Report. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 38 3. NAMIBIA VISION 2030 3.1 INTRODUCTION Since Independence, the Namibian government has adopted planning as a management tool to help ensure effective decision-making. Five-year development plans, beginning with NDP1 for the period 1995 – 2000, are at the heart of this strategy. This chapter provides a summary of the national Vision for 2030, the main objectives and broad strategies for its implementation. 3.2 ISSUES FOR VISION 2030 In formulating this Vision, the process called for identification and careful analysis of our problems as a nation. These issues were addressed by the Vision 2030 formulation process through a national opinion survey, futures research, regional consultations and national dialogue. The major elements of our national issues identified are the following: Inequalities and social welfare; Peace and political stability; Human resources, institutional- and capacity-building; Macro-economic issues; Population, health and development; Natural resources and environment; Knowledge, information and technology; and factors of the external environment. The vision formulation process was based on careful analyses and reviews of Namibia’s past and current experience in development, given its natural, material and financial resources, and its cultural, regional and international context. 3.3 NAMIBIA VISION 2030 The development issues listed above were carefully analysed and, based on research findings and an analysis of the aspirations expressed by the people, an overall national Vision (Box 1) has been formulated. The appropriate scenario selected was derived from the broad objectives of this Vision, and has served to guide identification of strategic ideas, which would form the basis for development planning. CH AP TE R TH RE E Box 1: Namibia Vision 2030 A prosperous and industralised Namibia, developed by her human resources, enjoying peace, harmony and political stability. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 39 The following terms, as used in the Vision, are elaborated upon; abundant prosperity; interpersonal harmony; peace and political stability. Prosperity It pertains to existence of a condition of sustained high economic growth that places Namibia in the ‘high income’ category of nations, eliminates duality in the economy and ensures equity in the pattern of economic growth. All Namibian workers earn a decent wage, that allows them to live a life well above the poverty level; and for the disadvantaged, the social security support guarantees a decent quality of life. All Namibians, who are able and willing, have the opportunity of being gainfully employed, or have access to productive resources. There is equity in income distribution across all groups, and the disparity between rural and urban living, in terms of social and economic conditions, is at its lowest. Namibians are healthy, empowered, innovative, confident and determined to succeed; everyone has a role to play, and the playing field is level, unhindered by race, colour, gender, age, ethnicity, religious affiliation or political inclination. Industrialised Nation As an industrialised country, Namibia’s income per capita base had grown to be equivalent to that of the upper income countries, resulting in a change in status from a lower middle income country to a high income country. Manufacturing and the service sector constitute about 80 percent of the country’s gross domestic product. The country largely exports processed goods, which account for not less than 70 percent of total exports. This has given rise to a significant reduction in the export of raw material. Namibia has an established network of modern infrastructure such as rail, road, telecommunication and port facilities. The country has a critical mass of knowledge workers and the contribution of the small and medium-size enterprises to GDP is not less than 30 percent. Unemployment has been significantly reduced to less than 5 percent of the work force. Harmony A multi-racial community of people living and working together in harmony, and sharing common values and aspirations as a nation, while enjoying the fruits of unity in diversity. Men and women marry (as provided for in the Constitution) and enjoy marital love and stability of union, and families extend compassion and love to those who are widowed or in one or the other form of marital disharmony. The family is upheld as sacred and the most fundamental institution in the society. Parents (mothers, fathers, guardians) are well aware of and fulfill their responsibilities to their children, while children remain disciplined and have an inalienable right to survival, development, protection and participation in society. Families are available and willing to accommodate orphans, and are assisted, where necessary, by the government/community through a well managed public orphanage programme. Such a programme allows these disadvantaged children to be supported to live a meaningful life which prepares them adequately for the future. People living with disabilities and other vulnerable persons are well integrated into the mainstream of society. They have equal rights under the law and are facilitated to participate actively in the economy and society. Society respects and upholds the right of every person to enjoy, practice, profess, maintain and promote his/her culture, language, tradition or religion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 40 in accordance with the Constitution. Although Namibia remains a secular society, Christianity is the most popular religion, which holds promise for the moral upbringing of our children, and shapes the moral basis of our interpersonal dynamics, harmony and peaceful co-existence. Above all, the fear of God guides decision-making in Namibia and provides the driving force for the maintenance of a just and morally upright society. Peace and political stability There exists in the country true freedom of expression, speech and association, compatible with the letter and spirit of the Constitution of Namibia; the political environment is conducive to voluntary formation or dissolution of political parties; and every individual is recognised as an important element in the system, which provides level playing field for all players. The people of Namibia make their own decisions and do so at their own level in terms of political, cultural, economic and social development matters; they set their own priorities, plan, implement and monitor their development programmes. Namibia creates an enabling environment in terms of sustainable social and economic advancement which could be defined as a “condition free from all possible impediments to actualising development”. It embodies peace, security, democratic politics, availability of resources, appropriate legal instruments, co operative private sector, and a supportive public service. In essence, we consolidate and maintain peace and political stability. All people in Namibia enjoy a safe environment (to a great extent free from violence and crime), share and care for those in need and are prepared to face and respond to any man-made and or natural calamities. Namibia is a fair, gender responsive, caring and committed nation in which all citizens are able to realise their full potential in a safe and decent living environment. The multi-party democratic principle of popular participation is well entrenched in the Namibian society; the political parties are active; the civil society is vibrant, and a mature, investigative and free media is in operation. There are independent ‘watch-dog’ institutions that ensure the implementation of anti-corruption programmes, and monitor activities of government, the private sector and civil society organisations and agencies. The government is there to promote social welfare, social profitability and public interest; and the action of officials are being constantly checked to see if they are in line with these cherished social values. Public officials maintain ethical standards with regard to trust, neutrality, probity, professional honour, confidentiality and fairness. There is constant checking to determine continued adherence to these values. Namibia thrives on an environment of regional and international peace and security. Development cooperation with all friendly nations is strong, and is based largely on trade and mutual exchange of opportunities; dependency on foreign development aid is minimal, if at all. Namibia is part and parcel of organised regional structures, in which it can contribute to the political, economic and social wellbeing of the people. 3.4 OBJECTIVES OF VISION 2030 The major objectives of this Vision are to: (i) Ensure that Namibia is a fair, gender responsive, caring and committed nation, in which all citizens are able to realise their full potential, in a safe and decent living environment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 41 (ii) Create and consolidate a legitimate, effective and democratic political system (under the Constitution), and an equitable, tolerant and free society, that is characterised by sustainable and equitable development and effective institutions, which guarantee peace and political stability. (iii) Develop a diversified, competent and highly productive human resources and institutions, fully utilising human potential, and achieving efficient and effective delivery of customer-focused services which are competitive not only nationally, but also regionally and internationally. (iv) Transform Namibia into an industrialised country of equal opportunities, which is globally competitive, realising its maximum growth potential on a sustainable basis, with improved quality of life for all Namibians. (v) Ensure a healthy, food-secured and breastfeeding nation, in which all preventable, infectious and parasitic diseases are under secure control, and in which people enjoy a high standard of living, with access to quality education, health and other vital services, in an atmosphere of sustainable population growth and development. (vi) Ensure the development of Namibia’s ‘natural capital’ and its sustainable utilization, for the benefit of the country’s social, economic and ecological well-being. (vii) Accomplish the transformation of Namibia into a knowledge-based, highly competitive, industrialised and eco-friendly nation, with sustainable economic growth and a high quality of life. (viii) Achieve stability, full regional integration and democratised international relations; the transformation from an aid-recipient country to that of a provider of development assistance. 3.5 BROAD STRATEGIES FOR VISION 2030 In order to realise the objectives of Vision 2030, the following strategic elements should be considered in the long-term perspective plan for Namibia: (i) Maintaining an economy that is sustainable, efficient, flexible and competitive; (ii) Operating a dynamic and accessible financial sector; (iii) Achieving full and gainful employment; (iv) Providing excellent, affordable health care for all; (v) Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS into development policies, plans and programmes; (vi) Creating access to abundant, hygienic and healthy food, based on a policy of food security; (vii) Providing full and appropriate education at all levels; (viii) Leveraging knowledge and technology for the benefit of the people; (ix) Promoting interpersonal harmony among all people; (x) Operating a morally upright and tolerant society that is proud of its diversity; (xi) Ensuring an atmosphere of peace, security and hope for a better life for all; (xii) Maintaining stable, productive and diverse ecosystems managed for long-term sustainability; (xiii) Establishing and sustaining business standards of competence, productivity, ethical behaviour and high trust; ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 42 (xiv) Upholding human rights and ensuring justice, equity and equality in the fullest sense for all, regardless of gender, age, religion, ethnicity, ability or political affiliation; (xv) Maintaining a low-level, responsive bureaucracy; (xvi) Implementing a land- and natural resource policy that ensures fair access by all to the means of production; (xvii) Establishing and operating a fiscal policy that distributes wealth fairly, and encourages production, employment and development of wealth in a stable and sustainable economic climate; (xviii) Operating a responsive and democratic government that is truly representative of the people, and able to adhere to transparent, accountable systems of governance, proactively; (xix) Achieving collaboration between public, private and Civil Society organisations, in policy formulation, programming and implementation; (xx) Maintaining sound international policies that ensure effective cooperation, favourable trade relations, peace and security. 3.6 MILESTONES The major challenge of this Vision is for all of us (government, private sector, Civil Society as well as individuals) to make a determined effort to concentrate on resolving, not just addressing, very important national problems. As we march forward in implementing the strategies of this Vision, we should be prepared to ask ourselves, from time to time if, indeed, we are on course. The programmes of Vision 2030 have specific targets and, periodically, through the National Development Plans and related programme instruments, we will evaluate the Vision programme performance. Milestones are interval targets or indicators and are very useful for monitoring progress towards the achievement of a desired objective. Following the approval of Vision 2030, it is planned that a national strategy implementation workshop will be convened to reach an agreement on the way forward in translating the objectives of the Vision into reality. This will set the stage for the formulation of an Action Plan for Vision implementation, including the determination of programme targets. To this end, milestones are provided in this Vision document, which are indicated as ‘targets’, to give an overall impression of where we are going and how the assumed future state would develop step by step. It is, however, difficult to construct quantitative indicators for some of the objectives of the Vision, such as: peace and political stability; good governance; popular participation; knowledge-based society; etc. In such cases, as illustrated with aspects of Information Technology and Natural Resources/ Environment, simple descriptions are provided to indicate the anticipated direction of progress. The scenario box for each Sub-Vision provides information on ‘Where we want to be in 2030’ and these items should also be read as targets. At a later stage, when programming for Vision implementation, each objective will have corresponding programme targets, including interval targets, apart from the empirical indicators shown in this Vision document. By the year 2030, as we commit ourselves to the strategies of this Vision, we should be an industrial nation, enjoying abundant prosperity, interpersonal harmony, peace and political stability. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 44 4. PEOPLE’S QUALITY OF LIFE 4.1 POPULATION AND HEALTH The Vision for Namibia in 2030 is about the people. Therefore, at the centre of the visioning exercise was concern for the population in relation to their social (particularly health), economic and overall well-being. How many Namibians? How well are they living? Where do they live, and what do they do for a living? All the questions about the welfare and well-being of the people of this country, at any point in time, even beyond 2030, is about our population’s living conditions. In essence, the dynamics of our population and the associated social, economic, demographic, environmental and political factors are critical elements in visioning, scenario-building and determining of strategic elements that would translate the vision for 2030 into reality. 4.1.1 Population Size and Growth The available evidence suggests that though relatively small in size (1,826,854 in 2001), the population of Namibia experienced a high growth rate of over 3.0 per cent in the decade before Independence (1981 – 1991). Against the official projections that anticipated a continuation of the growth trend well beyond 2000, the negative impact of HIV/AIDS on health and longevity of the people has reduced the growth rate from the projected estimate of 3.0 percent per annum to 2.6 percent (1991-2001). Given the continuing negative effect of HIV/AIDS on the population in the immediate future, the growth rate of the population will be further curtailed to about 1.5 percent or below annually until about 2015, when the worst impact of the epidemic will probably be seen. The overall population size will, however, not be reduced as a result of the pandemic; and even in the worst-case scenario, as shown in Table 4.1, Namibia will have a population of about 3.0 million by 2030. Initial estimates based on the 1991 census indicated that the population of Namibia would continue to increase, from 1.4 million in 1991, to 1.63 million in 1996 to 1.9 in 2001 and 3.5 million in 2021, based on an anticipated annual population growth rate of slightly over 3%. These projections were based on the high fertility rates prevailing at the time. However, because of HIV/AIDS, these initial assumptions needed to be reconsidered. Projections by 5-yearly intervals for the three scenarios are contained in Table 4.1, and illustrated in Fig. 4.1 CH AP TE R FO UR ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 45 Year Low Variant Medium Variant High Variant 2001 1.83 1.83 1.83 2006 2.02 2.14 2.25 2011 2.19 2.39 2.61 2016 2.39 2.66 3.01 2021 2.57 2.93 3.41 2026 2.78 3.23 3.86 2030 2.98 3.49 4.27 Figure. 4.1. Projected Population, 1991 - 2030 Based on the ‘High’, ‘Medium’ and ‘Low’ Variants of the Projection Model The results of the 2001 population census show a total population of 1,830,330 for the country. The variations in the projections shown in Table 4.1 are due to differences in the assumptions made about the future course of mortality and Table 4.1: Namibia - Population Projections (in millions) Based on the ‘High’, ‘Medium’ and ‘Low’ Variants of the Projection Model. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 46 fertility during the Vision period. Due to uncertainty about the future course of the HIV/AIDS epidemic, the projections of the population should be reviewed periodically during this period. It is, however, suggested that the ‘Medium Variant’ of the projection should guide Vision implementation from the beginning. Sub-Vision A healthy and food-secured nation in which all preventable, infectious and parasitic diseases are under secure control; people enjoy a high standard of living, good quality life and have access to quality education, health and other vital services. All of these translate into long life expectancy and sustainable population growth. Things to do • Design and implement a comprehensive Action Plan for the National Population Policy for • Sustainable Human Development. • Provide treatment and care for those infected with HIV. • Implement aggressively the National HIV/AIDS Reduction Plan. • Promote gender empowerment in family matters • Promote reproductive health, especially among the youth. Where we want to be (2030) • Population growth rate is about 2% per annum. • Life expectancy is 68 years for males and 70 years for females. • Population of Namibia is 3.5 million. • Infant mortality rate is 10/1000 live births. • Total Fertility Rate is 2.0. • All infectious diseases are under control. Current situation • Namibia’s population is estimated at 1.83 million in 2001 • Growth rate stands at 2.6%. • Total Fertility Rate has declined from 6.0 in 1991 to 4.0 in 2001. • Infant mortality rate has declined from 67 per 1000 live births in 1991 to 53 in 2001. • Life expectancy at birth has declined significantly from the 1991 estimates of 63 and 59 years respectively for females and males to 50 and 48 years respectively for females and males in 2001. • Population Policy for Sustainable Human Development published in 1997 is being implemented. • Institutional structure for population programme management is defined but has yet to be activated. Worst-case scenario • Life expectancy reduced to 35 years as a result of increasing AIDS-related deaths of the population. • Population growth rate delines to 1.5% or below. • Both Population Policy and AIDS Action fail. • Plan not effectively implemented. • AIDS epidemic negatively affects demographic structures and threaten socio-economic well-being. Things to avoid • The National Population Policy for Susutainable Human Development is a paper document without an Action Plan • Activities of the various AIDS Committees are not effectively carried out. • HIV/AIDS concerns not integrated into policies, and action plans. • People infected with HIV/AIDS are not cared for and treated. Population size and growth ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 47 Targets for Population and Health • Reduction in the population growth rate from the annual average growth rate of 2.6 % (1991 – 2001) to 2.4% by 2015, 2.2% by 2025, and 2.0% by the year 2030. • Reduction in the infant mortality rate from 53 per 1000 live births in 2001 to 30 per 1000 live births by 2015; 15 per 1000 in 2025; and 10 per 1000 in 2030. • Reduction in the maternal mortality rate from 271/100,000 live births in the year 2002 to 80 per 100,000 in 2015; 50 per 100,000 in 2025; and 20 per 100,000 in 2030. • Reduction in the total fertility rate from the 2002 level of 4.2 to 3.5 by the year 2015; 3.0 by 2025, and 2.0 by 2030. • Full immunization coverage from 65% in 2002, to 70% in 2015, to75% in 2025, and 80% in 2030. • Increase contraceptive prevalence rate from 37.8% in the year 2002 to 50% by the year 2015; 65% by 2025; and 80% by 2030. Objectives • To reduce mortality from all causes, including HIV/AIDS. • To revive the population policy and implement IT effectively. • To make health services adolescent/youth friendly and accessible to all. • To make anti-retroviral drugs available to and affordable the public. • To intensify population information, education and communication (IEC) through appropriate means taking, into account people with disability. Strategies • Providing treatment and care for those infected and limiting the further spread of the disease. • Developing a comprehensive Action Plan and reviving the institutional structures in place for programme implementation. Institutional responsibilities for resolving population and related health problems are clearly stated in the Population Policy for Sustainable Human Development (1997). While all the sectors are involved and their respective duties defined, overall technical coordination of policy implementation is vested in the NPC, supported by the National Advisory Committee on Population. 4.1.2 Migration, Urbanisation and Population Distribution Migration has historically been male dominated and mostly from the northern communal areas to the commercial farming, mining and manufacturing areas in the centre and south. The distribution of Namibia’s population is highly uneven, being closely linked to agro-ecological conditions and thus economic and social opportunities. While the national population density in 2001 was 2.1 persons/ km2, one of the the lowest in Africa, in Ohangwena, Omusati, Oshana and Oshikoto Regions it was 13.2 persons/km2. These four regions contain 6.8% of Namibia’s land area, but had 44.9% of the total population in that year (see population total by Region, Fig. 4.2). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 48 Only 27% of Namibia’s Population was urbanised in 1991; by 2001 the proportion of the population living in urban areas increased to 33%. One important demographic characteristic of the urban population in Namibia is the very high rate of growth. While the overall national population increased at 3.1 percent per annum from 1981 to 1991, the urban population registered a growth rate of 5.6 per cent, and the rural population 1.97 per cent. At the current rate of urban population growth it is estimated that the population of Namibia would be 43 percent urbanised, with about 1 million people residing in urban places by the year 2006, and 50 percent by 2010; 60 per cent by 2020, and 75 per cent urbanised by 2030. The major factor promoting the rapid rate of urbanisation in the country is rural-to-urban migration, mainly of young men and women in search of better social and economic opportunities. This trend is likely to continue during the Vision period. The trend in urbanisation is shown in Fig. 4.3. Figure. 4.2: Population by Region(2001) Figure. 4.3: Urbanisation Trend in Nambia Otjozondjupa Oshikoto Oshana Omusati Omaheke Ohangwena Kunene Khomas Kavango Karas Hardap Erongo Caprivi R eg io n Population (2001) Population 0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000 300000 P e rc e n ta g e ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 49 Sub-Vision There is free movement of the population within the country and population distribution is maturely adjusted to the location of resources for livelihood. Namibia is a highly urbanised country with about 75 per cent of the population living in proclaimed urban centres, while the predominance of Windhoek has considerably reduced as a result of growth of other urban centres throughout the country. Things to to do • Promote the development of the rural population through diversification of economic activities. • Develop rural transport infrastructure and communication. • Provide adequate social services (quality schools, health facilities, and social support). • Improve security of urban life. • Create employment opportunities in rural and urban areas. Current situation • About 33% of the population lived in urban centers in 2001. • Industrial, commercial and government administrative activities are mainly concentrated in the cities. • Most people in rural areas live in sub standard housing, and lack access to potable water, electricity and good transport infrastructure. • The urban population is growing at a much higher rate (over 5% per annum) than the rural population. • Internal migration is dominated by the movement of people from rural to urban areas, and is increasing. Where we want to be (2030) • Namibia a highly urbanised country with 75% of the population residing in designated urban areas. • Basic social services and infrastructural facilities available in both urban and rural areas of the country. • Urban places widely distributed in the country, and over-concentration of population in some centres, absent. • Municipal administration is strengthened by adequate economic base. • Rural population has diversified economy and healthy living environment prevails. Things to avoid • Concentrate most development efforts in the cities. • Continue to increase support to social services and facilities in urban areas. • Neglect the development of rural infrastructure. • Provide routine administrative support for rural economic activities. • Continue to support the expansion of unplanned settlements in urban centres. Worst-case scenario • There is over-concentration of the population in a few cities. • Poorly developed rural economy and inadequate social services and infrastructure result in more and more people migrating to the few large cities. • Urban centres are congested and the urban environment is stagnant. • Municipal administration is hampered by poor economic capacity and inadequate planning. Conducive Urban and Rural Living ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 50 Objective The overall objective is to achieve integrated rural and urban development in which living conditions and social and economic opportunities are adequate for all. Strategies • Promoting rural and urban development, • Ensuring that overall social and economic development is commensurate with the degree of urbanization of the population, • Enhancing the capacity of local authorities to function effectively, • Harmonizing the local markets for agricultural trade, including removal of the “red line”. • Upholding the constitutional provisions for international migration as well as the appropriate immigration policies. 4.1.3 Population Age and Sex Distribution As in most developing countries, the Namibian population is very youthful. Children below the age of 15 years constituted 42% of the population in 1991, resulting from persistently high levels of fertility and declining levels of infant mortality. Older persons aged 60 years and over made up 7.0% of the 1991 as well as the 2001 population, most of them enumerated in rural areas. The results of the 2001 population census indicate that close to 40% of the total population is under 15 years of age. This shows little change from 43% in 1991 and the estimate of 41% by the CBS in 1996. The 2001 census report also shows that rural areas, where 67% of the population live, have relatively more young people (44%) as well as more senior citizens or those 60 years and over (8%) compared to the urban population, where there are 30% and 4% young and old persons respectively. The majority of urban residents (64%) is made up of the economically active age group (15-59 years) compared to 46.3% of the rural population. Overall, senior citizens constitute a small percentage of the total population (7%) in the 2001 census report and this, as shown in Figure 4.4, is not expected to increase appreciably during the Vision period, as a result of the effect of HIV/AIDS on the population. Figure. 4.4: Population Projection by Age Groups ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 51 The 2001 total population of 1,830,330 for the country shows that there were 942,572 females (or 51% of the total) and 887,721 males (see regional distribution of population by sex in Figure 4.5). This implies a sex ratio (defined as the number of males per 100 females) of 94.0 in 2001, virtually unchanged from 1991 when it was 94.8. Regionally, however, there are considerable variations due to migrants’ selectivity. (Internal migration distorts sex ratios and these, therefore, vary widely between age cohorts and urban/rural populations). Sex ratios in the 2001 census report vary widely among the 13 regions in the country between a low of 83 for Ohangwena to a high of 115 for Erongo; and also between 91.9 for the rural population of the country to 991. for the urban population. Sub-Vision Namibia is a just, moral, tolerant and safe society with legislative, economic and social structures in place to eliminate marginalisation and ensure peace and equity between women and men, the diverse ethnic groups and people of different ages, interests and abilities. Figure. 4.5: Population Distribution by Region and Sex (2001) R e g io n ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 52 What to do • Intensify the provision of population education at all levels of the education system. • Provide population education to the general public. • Educate men and women on gender and development issues. • Ensure the reproductive rights of women. • Empower youth and women through adequate education and access to gainful employment. Where we want to be by 2030 • Equity between women and men in social, economic and political matters. • Fairness in dealing with people of different ages, interests and abilities. • Men and women have equal access to opportunities for livelihood. • Girls remain in schools as long as boys, and women also participate in science. Current situation • Namibia has a youthful population, with 42% of the population under 15 years of age in 1991, and estimated to be 40% in 2001. • Children and young people under 30 years of age make up over 70% of the population. • Older persons aged 60 years and above make up about 7% of the total population as a result of overall short life expectancy at birth in the population. • There are higher proportions of both the young and the old populations in the rural areas compared to the urban areas. • Women outnumbered men in the ratio of 100:94 in 2001 in the total population, but there are regional distortions due to migration. What not to do • Planning without consideration for gender. • Planning for the people without considering differences in population structure, by age. • Discrimination in access to social services and economic opportunities based on gender, age, and ethnicity. • Senior citizens, disabled people are treated just as Worst-case scenario • Rampant discrimination due to age, sex, and disability. • Relevant social and economic policies that provide support to disadvantaged groups, are not implemented. • Young people have poor education, girls are worse off and older persons and the disabled have no chance to compete. Equity in Age and Gender MattersEquity in Age and Gender Matters ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 53 Objectives The objectives are to: Ensure that the young people of Namibia are educated, skilled, motivated, confident, assiduous, responsible and healthy, and are thus empowered to play an active role in shaping a better society, which will be their inheritance and their duty to sustain and manage in the future. • Ensure that the elderly citizens are acknowledged and respected for their past contributions to the development of our country, and in their old age they will be well cared for and remain happy senior citizens in a safe and loving environment. • Improve the situation of the disabled based on enhanced recognition of their rights and abilities, much as in other countries, through improved and expanded training and support programmes. Strategies • Providing quality education for all. • Creating adequate employment opportunities for all those who are active and willing to work. • Implementing the Affirmative Action initiatives so that those disadvantaged and people living with disabilities are well represented in the work place at all levels. • Disaggregating all data by gender, for effective planning, and increasing the flow of information on important gender issues and law reform. • Implementing all relevant policies and legislations, and providing the appropriate setting for women to give input on law reform proposals. 4.1.4 Healthy Living for Longevity Namibia operates a health care system aimed at ensuring equity of access to quality health care services to all; promoting community involvement and greater citizen participation in the provision of health services; providing affordable health services; facilitating co-operation and inter-sectoral action with all major players in the provision of health care; instituting measures to counter major health risks including the prevailing communicable diseases, such as malaria, tuberculosis, HIV/AIDS, etc; and ensuring the development of human resources in sufficient numbers for staffing various health delivery systems. In addition, the health system aims at ensuring the development of a national health care system that is capable of providing a fully comprehensive range of preventive, curative and rehabilitative health care that is cost-effective, sustainable and acceptable to the most disadvantaged communities, promoting equity and facilitating the effective implementation of defined strategies and interventions. • AIDS makes a significant contribution to poor health and to low life expectancy. Hospitalisation and deaths due to HIV/AIDS-related complications have been steadily increasing, thus putting an additional burden on the health systems. Since 1996, AIDS has been the leading cause of deaths in Namibia. Figure 4.6 illustrates HIV/AIDS’ contribution to hospitalisation and death as a proportion of the total admissions and deaths. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 54 Figure. 4.6: AIDS Related Admissions and Deaths as % of Total Recent estimates derived from the 2001 population census indicate that the life expectancy at birth in Namibia was 50 and 48 years respectively for females and males. This shows a significant decline from the 1991 estimates of 63 and 59 years respectively for females and males, largely due to the effect of HIV/AIDS. The Government of Namibia has in place a detailed, multi-sectoral strategy for combating HIV/AIDS, and which recognises the epidemic as the most serious challenge to development in the country. The national response to HIV/AIDS aims to reduce transmission to below epidemic levels and to mitigate its impacts across individuals, families, communities and sectors. Sectoral strategies and targets are detailed in the 1999/2004 National Strategic Plan, which is among the most comprehensive in the region. It is of interest that, despite the high rate of HIV infection and widespread knowledge of the mode of transmission, only 28.2% of all women (married or unmarried) have ever used a condom, and an extremely low 8.9% are currently using condoms. Currently, family planning services are available in 93% of Government health facilities. However, in 2000, only 61% of all women had used a modern contraceptive method at least once in their lives. It is noteworthy that, given the atmosphere of HIV/AIDS, only 9% of all women use condoms. Use of antenatal facilities is also generally popular, since 91% of women who had given birth during the 1995-2000 period, had been assisted during birth by trained medical personnel. The results of the 2001 population census indicate that over 82% of all households in the country have access to safe water; the proportion is higher in urban (98.4%) than in the rural areas (79.9%). The census report also indicates that about 54% of the households in the country have no toilet facility, using the bush instead; over 70% of the households in the urban areas use flush toilets compared to 10% in the rural households. While Namibia is considered to be food secure at the national level, many households are still vulnerable to chronic or acute food insecurity due to low agricultural production, recurrent drought, low incomes and limited off-farm employment opportunities. Despite the Government’s strong commitment to the reduction of food insecurity and malnutrition during the First Food and Nutrition Decade (which will end in 2002), progress has been limited. P e rc e n t ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 55 The above Government strategies and programmes aimed at improving the health of the population will succeed to the extent that the people themselves are willing and able to take advantage of the opportunities and facilities being provided. These health programmes, in addition to the provision of services, also provide information and education on various aspects of life and healthy living for the individual, family and the community. These include information/education on family formation and family planning services, prevention of infectious and parasitic diseases (such as HIV/AIDS, TB, STDs, malaria and vaccine preventable diseases), as well as other causes of ill health and death. Information and services are also being made available to the public through these programmes on nutrition, feeding and drinking habits, physical activities for healthy development and environmental hygiene. The challenge is for each individual, family and community to take advantage of the services and facilities provided by the Government and related agencies in support of healthy living. Sub-Vision Namibia is free of the diseases of poverty and inequality; and the majority of Namibians are living healthy lifestyles, provided with safe drinking water and a comprehensive preventive and curative health service, to which all have equal access. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 56 Things to do • Implement effectively the Primary Health Care Programmes, including HIV/AIDS, Safe Motherhood, TB, Malaria, etc. • Provide public education on healthy living. • Improve the health infrastructure, particularly in rural areas. • Ensure food security at household level. Where we want to be by 2030 • Namibia is a healthy, food secured nation. • Average life expectancy is about 69 years for both sexes, since death rates across the ages are low. • All communicable diseases are under control, including HIV. • People have access to safe drinking water, adequate housing and sanitation. • All couples have access to and use effective means of family planning. Current situation • The leading causes of death in Namibia are AIDS, TB, malaria, gastroenteritis, cancer, pneumonia, prematurity, malnutrition, congestive heart failure, and cerebro-vascular accident accounting for 76% of all deaths in the hospitals. • According to the 2002 sentinel sero survey among pregnant women, the HIV prevalence ratio stands at 22.0%. • The cumulative number of HIV positive cases from 1986-2002 is 116 475. • According to the 2000 Namibia Demographic and Health Survey, 5% of children are severely underweight, 2% are severely wasted and 8% are severely stunted. • 91% of women have access to antenatal care services provided by a doctor or a nurse. • 75% of the population have access to safe water. • 41% of the population have access to sanitary means of excreta disposal. Things to avoid • Simply maintain current efforts and level of resources in implementing health programmes. • Centralise the provision of health services. • Restrict the flow of information on health matters. Worst-case scenario • Number of HIV-positive people in creases from 219,00 in 2002 to 500,000 in 2030. • Little behaviour change in spite of knowledge of Reproductive Health and the spread of HIV/AIDS. • HIV-infected persons are not given treatment due to cost factor. • HIV/AIDS not factored into policies and planning. Healthy Living for Longevity ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57 Objective The overall objective is to ensure that Namibians enjoy a healthy, productive and long life. Strategies • Intensifying programmes of health education, targeting the different sections of the population in order to achieve behaviour change for disease prevention and cure. • Assisting the health personnel to deal with the stress and burdens of HIV/ AIDS on the health system. • Investing adequate resources in the fight against HIV/AIDS epidemic and associated diseases, including treatment of those infected and providing support to orphans. • Focusing on total quality management of the health programme. • Developing and managing a comprehensive Food Security Network. • Maintaining emphasis on primary health care within the context of decentralisation, both deconcentration and devolution. • Increasing the focus on training medical and paramedical personnel, and helping to ensure service provision in remote rural areas. • Improving the distribution of infrastructure to ensure service provision in remote areas. • Continuing to improve access to health care and health facilities in previously under-served regions, must remain a priority. • Improving the HIS data collection, management and dissemination; and strengthening feedback to those involved in the HIS chain of data collection so that local use is encouraged. • Ensuring that all development plans and sectors include and implement HIV/ AIDS responses in their efforts. • Strengthening Reproductive Health and Family Planning programmes with the aim of ensuring that women gain more control over their reproductive health. This would include strengthening the identification and treatment of STD’s. • Based on a consideration of the various aspects of stigma, policies will be developed and plans will be implemented to achieve destigmatisation. • Developing an understanding of the impact of the HIV/AIDS epidemic across all sectors. • Achievement of these objectives will be dependent on sound political leadership and the involvement of all sectors (Public, private, Civil Society) of Namibian society. 4.1.5 Promoting Healthy Human Environment The health management system in the country is designed to promote a healthy living environment for all Namibians through the elimination of vaccine preventable diseases; and the attainment of the highest level of environmental sanitation, community and personal hygiene in order to eliminate air, water and vector-borne diseases. In addition, the health-care programme is designed to attain the highest level of responsible behavioural practices in order to eliminate STD’s, HIV infection and alcohol and substance abuse. The system also supports treatment of physical and mental illnesses. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 58 The Government of Namibia inherited, at Independence, a health care delivery system which was curative-oriented, and fragmented along racial and ethnic lines. Following Independence, a national health system was put in place and the Primary Health Care (PHC) strategy was adopted with emphasis on preventive, promotive and rehabilitative health care. The Government is in the process of decentralizing health services. This has involved the deconcentration of responsibilities to the regional level with the establishment of 13 health regions, in line with the 13 administrative regions. A total of 34 health districts have been created. Currently, the provision of health care in Namibia is split between Government (70-75%), missions (15-20%) and the private sector (5%). The missions are not for-profit providers, and subsidised by the state through the MOHSS. The private sector is mainly urban and provides health care through 11 medium sized hospitals. The results of these efforts to re-orient the health service delivery system are demonstrated in the improvements in basic health indicators, such as fertility rates, infant mortality rates, etc. These Government programmes are based on a series of policies, e.g., those related to primary health-care, tuberculosis control, malaria control, etc. However, such decentralisation is taking place within the context of continuing personnel shortages, particularly at the professional level. Sub-Vision All the people of Namibia have equitable access to high quality and affordable health care services; the health infrastructure is strong, equitably distributed, and is being supported by adequate human, material and financial resources. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59 Current Situation • About 80% of the population live within 10km of a public health facility; leaving about 380,000 people, largely in rural areas, without ready access to health facilities. • The ratio of population per public service doctor is 7,500; the severity of health staff shortages increases the further away one is from the capital cities. • Focus of the health delivery strategy is Primary Health Care, with emphasis on community health, preventative measures and on treatments that can be provided relatively cheaply (mainly through outreach points, clinics, health centres and district hospitals). • Most rural dwellers live in sub standard houses without water and sanitation facilities. Things to avoid • De-emphasise community participation in health matters. • Rely on expartriate medical personnel. • Reduce health budget for economic reasons. • Concentrate health services and facilities in the cities so as to gain the economy of scale. Worst-case scenario • Poor transport and communication infrastructure hamper the provision of health services to the rural population. • Inadequate information on health matters make it difficult for communities to participate in public health programmes. • Continued health staff shortages worsen the health situation. Things to do • Maintain the health care principles of equity, accessibility, affordability and community participation. • Streamline training of medical staff and support the training of Namibian doctors. • Intensity support for the expansion of health infrastructure throughout the country. Where we want to be (2030) • Healthy environment for all Namibians. • Healthy facilities within easy reach of people in rural and urban places. • Adquate housing, with water and sanitation facilities for all. • Medical facilities have adquate staff (doctors, nurses, etc) mostly Namibians. Promoting Healthy Human Environment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 60 Objectives The overall objectives are to: • Improve the physical and mental health status of all Namibians, and • Improve and maintain the social well-being, self-reliance and coping capacities of individuals, families and communities. • Strengthen and consolidate the Primary Health Care programmes; • Improve the quality of Institutional and Curative Health Care services; • Strengthen the Health System Management and Development; • Improve the efficiency and effectiveness of Resource Allocation and Functional Management. Strategies • Ensuring that the health facilities are accessible to all and well equipped with both human and material resources, and the services are affordable and of acceptable and high quality. • Strengthening the health system so that the system is effectively responsive to the increasing demands, and Primary Health Care/Community-based Health Care is playing a dominant role in health-care delivery, which is effective and efficient. • Promoting institution and human capacity-building in the health sector in order to ensure there is appreciable increase in the number of health facilities and the staff establishment sufficient to meet increasing demands. • Effectively decentralising health services and facilities to the political regions and the communities. • Developing the HIS to provide timely, accurate data, available for planning and decision-making. • Establishing a research institution responsible for research and production of drugs, especially the antiretroviral drugs. • Strengthening and expanding Information, Education and Communication (IEC) programme, and ensure its effective and efficient implementation. • Formulating an occupational health policy, including quality control measures for good processing industries. Implement the policy effectively. • Ensuring the availability of affordable antiretroviral drugs to all HIV-infected Namibians. • Changing the policy of confidentiality on HIV/AIDS for it to be treated as all other diseases. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 61 4.2 WEALTH, LIVELIHOOD AND THE ECONOMY When Namibia became independent in 1990, the economy was stagnant, growing at 1.1% in the 1980’s. Its wealth remained highly skewed, with 5% of the population enjoying close to 80% of wealth in the country. There was widespread poverty and high unemployment. The access to basic services remained extremely limited to the majority of the population. The direction economic policy-after Namibia’s Independence - was to break the vicious cycle of poverty, skewed income inequality and high unemployment, and to build a foundation for self-sustaining economic growth and development. The main policy focus has, therefore, been to ensure macro-economic stability for ensured economic growth, poverty reduction and increased employment. It also ensures an enabling regulatory framework which aims to promote micro-economic reforms and efficiency, through trade and industry policy, rural and agricultural policy, and rural infrastructure development. Since Independence, Namibia has achieved some notable success with regard to policy objectives through improving access to basic social service and infrastructural provision. Its broader macro-economic policy has been supportive of ensuring a stable and improved investment climate and moderately improved economic growth. Despite such improvements, Namibia’s economic vision still remains central to the need of its desire to enhance the standard of living and to improve the quality of life of all the Namibian people. This can be achieved only if there is accelerated economic growth and sustainable economic development in the country. 4.2.1 Macroeconomic Environment Although economic growth in Namibia started to improve considerably after Independence, the level of growth has not been sufficient to address the many social evils facing the country. During 1990-95, economic growth reached an average growth rate of 5 percent, surpassing the average of 1.1 percent during the previous decade. However, growth slowed thereafter, reaching a level of 3.5 per cent during 1996-2000. (See Table 4.2 for projections of selected macro-economic indicators for the country up to 2030). The high growth rates achieved in the first half of the 1990’s were mainly primary sector driven, whereas the low growth in the latter part was due to adverse external influences, such as climatic and marine conditions with their attendant effects on agriculture and fisheries, and fluctuations in international commodity demand and prices, which impacted on mineral production and exports. to be about 7%. Taking into account a rapidly increasing population, real GDP per capita growth actually fell from 1.9% in the first part of the 1990’s to 0.4% in the last part of the 1990s. Although gross domestic investment improved remarkably after Independence, the level has remained insufficient to spur higher rates of economic growth needed to reduce poverty and the high unemployment rate. On average, gross domestic investment has hovered around 20 per cent of GDP during the first period after Independence, falling short of the high level saving of about 25 per cent of GDP which the country has been able to generate during the same period. As a result, a substantial amount of money is being invested outside the country. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 62 The inflation rate in Namibia is largely determined by price determination in South Africa, since 80% of Namibia’s imports come from South Africa. The inflation rate grew on average by 12.7% during 1990-1995. It started to decline moderately during the second half of the 1990s, averaging 8.5%. Namibia has one of the most unequal income distributions in the world, posing a Gini coefficient of 0.70. This is extremely high when compared to 0.58 for the average Gini coefficient for SADC, excluding the Democratic Republic of Congo and Mozambique. A Gini coefficient that is above 0.55 is an indication of a very unequal income distribution. Hence, GDP per capita can hardly be used to accurately reflect the welfare of the population in a country where income distribution is highly skewed. Despite the government’s efforts to create jobs, unemployment in Namibia has been recorded to be as high as 33.8% of the labour force. The level of under employment in terms of very low levels of productivity and income, or insufficient work, is also widespread among workers in the traditional economy. Job-creation in Namibia has been rather luster lacking, and the structure of the labour force has not changed in line with expected trends. Instead, it has exhibited a decline in employment. Total employment fell over the period 1991-1997 by some 9.5%. The declining levels of employment are particularly evident in the primary industries, notably agriculture and mining, while employment grew within the Macroeconomic Indicators 1990 1996 2001 2006 2011 2016 2021 2026 2001 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 2025 2030 2030 Population growth# 3.1 2.9 2.6 2.1 1.8 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.0 Real GDP 5.0 3.5 3.5 3.7 4.5 6.3 7.3 9.4 5.8 Real GDP per capita 1.9 1.5 1.8 2.2 3.2 4.4 5.2 7.3 4.0 Real Fixed formation growth 7 3.7 5 6.2 7.7 9.9 12.7 15 9.4 Real Consumption growth 4.1 4.8 1.3 2.6 3.1 6.3 8 7.5 4.8 Inflation 10.7 8.5 9.0 7.7 7.8 6.1 4.5 4.5 6.6 Gini Coefficient 0.70 0.70 0.69 0.63 0.55 0.47 0.39 0.30 0.50 Employment ^ 1.0 1.2 2.7 3.2 3.4 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.4 Trade Balance (%GDP) -6.0 4.3 -0.9 -0.3 -4 -5.9 -5.9 -5.0 -3.6 Budget Deficit (%GDP) -2.7 -3.8 -3.2 -3.7 2.4 -1.0 -0.3 0.0 -0.7 Table 4.2: Selected Macro-economic Indicators 1990-2030 Note: With the exception of population, these are actual figures, whereas the rest are projections, #Population HIV/AIDS adjusted, ^ Employment growth obtained from Group on Human Resources. Figures are expressed in percentages, or averages, unless otherwise stated. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 63 fishing sector. Employment in the primary industries declined by about 29% between 1991 and 1997, or by about 5.6% per annum on average. Since Independence, Namibia’s balance of payments has mostly recorded overall surpluses. These surpluses have been generated by the current account because the capital account has largely recorded net outflows throughout this period, resulting from the investments of pension funds and life insurer outside the country. The surpluses recorded on the current account were largely on account of investment income and transfers from customs union. On the other hand, the trade account has continued to register deficits since imports have remained larger than exports during the post- Independence period. Consequently, the trade deficit averaged about six per cent of GDP between 1990 and 2000. Since 1990, the Government has been engaged in re-orienting Namibia’s fiscal policy towards fiscal prudence and discipline with the objective of attaining overall macro-economic stability and laying the foundation for sustainable development, which is the basis for poverty alleviation and employment creation. The budget deficit, as a percentage of GDP, was recorded as 2.7% in the first half of the 1990s, but it declined to 3.4% during the 1996-2000 period. Sub-Vision Namibia operates an open, dynamic, competitive and diversified economy that provides sustained economic growth, the basis for availing resources for the fulfilment of major national objectives like poverty reduction, human resource development, employment creation, and the provision of adequate social services and infrastructural facilities. Targets by 2030 • GDP and GDP per capita growth of 6.2% and 4.4% respectively • Low unemployment level of 2.3% and an inflation rate averaging 4.5% per annum • 10% primary, 42% secondary and 48% government sector of GDP • Investment growth at 10.2% • Gini coefficient at 0.3 • Trade deficit at 3.3% GDP • Budget deficit at 1.5% GDP • Substantial investment in rural infrastructure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 64 Things to do • Promote export development and competitiveness • Promote efficient production and savings investment culture • Promote an efficient services sector • Consciously ensure external debt sustainability • Establish an integrated industrial strategy • Promote the existing EPZs • Adopt spatial measures that are appropriate to different areas. • Promote access to financial services. • Ensure supply and efficiency of entrepreneurship • Ensure supply and allocation of capital • Promote skills development • Support information and communications technology • Promote regional integration • Import relevant skills to augment shortage • Modernise agriculture and develop competitive rural economies • Facilitate economic empowerment and promotion of women and disadvantaged groups • Establish a framework for national development and rural transformation • Create a healthy labour force and society • Create a literate and well-informed society • Promote full employment Current situation • The average GDP growth is at 4.0% • Low and declining per capita income • High income inequality with Gini coefficient of 0.70 • Unemployment at 33.8% and rising. Employment growth is at 1.0 percent • Poverty still widespread • 20% Primary and 15% Secondary sector share of GDP. • 55% Goverment contribution to GDP • Inflation averaging at 10% • Investment growth at 10% • Trade Deficit as a % of GDP is at –6.0% • Budget Deficit above 3% Where we want to be (2030) • High standard of living as reflected in high per capita income. • Low unemployment and inflation rate. • High economic growth of at least above 5% annually. • Open, resource-based and diversified economy, with GDP growth being secondary sector (export oriented manufacturing and knowledge intensive) industry-driven. • Well developed and modernised agricultural sector. • Substantial investment in rural infrastructure, with flourishing SME and EPZ sectors. • Highly skilled and productive labour force with high levels of employment. Worst-case scenario • Slow GDP growth rate of 2.7% or less with negative growth in GDP per capita • Still primary sector driven economy subjected to depressed commodity prices, adverse weather and environmental conditions • Unemployment reaches 55% with 20% inflation rate • Investment growth is near zero and income inequality worsens to 0.85 • Policy on diversification fails, thus trade balance deteriorates. • Low productivity with a large unskilled labour force. • Government deficit reaches 10% of GDP Things to avoid • Heavy reliance on primary sector as the driving force for economic Growth. • Promoting a relatively closed and protectionist economy with small or non-existent industrial capacity. • Widespread poverty and skewed income distribution. • Docile labour force with high unemployement. Macro-economic Environment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 65 Objective To ensure that Namibia is an industrialised country of equal opportunities, which is globally competitive, realising its maximum growth potential on a sustainable basis with an improved quality of life for all Namibians. Strategies • Creating an open, dynamic, competitive and diversified economy. • Promoting and sustaining sound macro-economic management. • Creating employment opportunities. • Ensuring consistency between macro-economic stabilisation and long-term development. • Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS into macro-economic policies and programmes. • Promoting integrated urban and rural development. • Promoting regional economic integration and an industrial base. • Reduction of poverty and income inequality. • Fostering attitude-transformation and developing individual initiatives. • Creation of a vibrant labour market information system to reduce unemployment. 4.2.2 Transport Infrastructure The transport sector is critical to the development of all sectors of the economy and in the promotion of national as well as regional integration. Namibia is relatively well supplied with road, aviation, maritime and rail transport infrastructure. However, there are imbalances in the regional coverage, particularly regarding roads and railways. Until 1995, the road transport sector was still regulated in terms of the Road Transportation Act, 1977 (Act No. 74 of 1977), under which the market was dominated by a few large operators, making it difficult for previously disadvantaged Namibians to gain access to the market. Government, in a bid to redress this shortcoming, published the White Paper on Transport Policy in 1995 and the resultant recommendations are being implemented. The transport sector has been implementing certain bold strategies in support of its objective to provide effective and efficient transport infrastructure, efficient and safe operation of transport services, and achievement and maintenance of quality standards in transport. These include: a) Institutional reform - review of the role of Government in transport, institutional reform, promotion of competition and user pricing; b) Adoption of labour-based road construction and maintenance, as a means of employment-creation and the alleviation of poverty, while maintaining effectiveness and efficiency; c) Review of parastatals in the transport sector, leading to the establishment of Air Namibia as a separate company and the consolidation of the remaining business of TransNamib Limited as TransNamib Holdings Ltd, operating as transNamib Limited for road-and NamRail for rail transport; d) Development of appropriate plans and policies, including: the National Transport Development Plan; the National Transportation Master Plan; the Roads Master Plan; the new Road Traffic and Transportation Act; and Maritime Development. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 66 The main challenges faced by the transport sector are the following: • Expansion and maintenance of road infrastructure network to uncovered places in rural areas and others. • Adequate maintenance of existing road network; • Provision of road linkages to neighbouring countries; • Maritime development (policy and legal framework, sea transport, port management, shipping and trade, navigational aids and services, capacity building, etc); • Maintenance of existing infrastructure. • Promotion of public/private partnership in infrastructures-development and operation. • Railway network to cover the country. • Development of air navigation and airspaces infrastructure to meet demand; • Capacity-building in support of the sector, particularly in Civil Aviation, Meteorological Services and Maritime Affairs. Sub-Vision Safe and cost-effective transport infrastructure is available throughout the country, and so also specialised services in their different modes, to balance the demand and the supply thereof in an economically efficient way; and there is freedom of participation in the provision of transport services, subject mainly to quality regulation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 67 Things to do • Expand road infrastructure network to uncovered places in rural areas and others. • Design user friendly urban traffic system. • Adequately maintain existing transport network. • Provide road linkages to neighbouring countries. • Promote public/private partnership in infrastructure development and operation. • Railway network to cover the country. • Develop and implement appropriate Acts/ Policies. • Develop air navigation and airspaces infrastructure to meet demand. • Develop capacity in support of the sector, particularly in Civil Aviation, Meteorological Services and Maritime Infrastructure Affairs. Where we want to be (2030) • Safe and cost-effective transport infrastructure is available throughout the country, serving rural and urban communities. • Urban transportation makes adequate provision for the different categories of residents – pedestrians, cyclists, motorists, and people with disabilities. • Specialised transport services in their different modes are available to balance the demand. • Transport services (road, air and maritime) are provided in an economically efficient way. • There is freedom of participation in the provision of transport services, subject mainly to quality regulation. • The transport sector contributes to economic growth, employment creation, and poverty reduction in a competitive, safe, efficient, effective, reliable and affordable manner. • Adequate capacity exists in support of the sector, including Civil Aviation, Meteorogical Services and Maritime Affairs. • Namibia is a transport hub within the region. Current situation • Namibia is relatively well supplied with road, aviation, maritime and rail transport infrastructure. • There are imbalances in the regional coverage, particularly regarding roads and railways. • Government, in a bid to redress this shortcoming published the White Paper on Transport Policy in 1995 and the resultant recommendations are being implemented. • Government has carried out institutional reform - review of the role of Government in transport, promotion of competition and user pricing. • The sector is adopting labour-based road construction and maintenance, as a means of employment-creation and the alleviation of poverty, while maintaining effectiveness and efficiency. • Review of parastatals in the transport sector led to the establishment of Air Namibia as a separate company and the consolidation of the remaining business of TransNamib Limited as TransNamib Holdings Ltd, operating as transNamib Limited for road and NamRail for rail transport. • Government has developed some appropriate plans and policies, including: National Transport Development Plan; National Transportation master Plan; Roads Master Plan; new Road Traffic and the transportation Act. Things to avoid • Neglect maintenance of existing and new transport infrastructure. • Inadequate transport coverage of rural areas. Worst-case scenario • imbalances in transport coverage. • Vast rural areas remaining inaccessible by any means of transport. • Transport facilities too costly for the poor. • Namibia poorly linked by transport to other countries in the region. Transport Infrastructure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 68 Objectives The main objectives of the transport sector are to: Contribute to national development through the provision of transport services that are equitably distributed throughout the country and which contribute to economic growth, employment creation, and poverty reduction in a competitive, safe, efficient, effective, reliable and affordable manner; and to render the provision, management and maintenance of transport services on an economical and long-term sustainable basis. The objectives of the transport sector are to: • implement a comprehensive culture change plan; • develop private sector expertise in the construction and maintenance of roads on a tender/contract basis; • draw up and implement a master plan of development for each of the airports/ aerodromes of the airports company; • draw up and implement an aviation communication and navigation aids master plan; • commercialise air navigation services and create an autonomous Civil Aviation Authority; • set up an appropriate maritime administration; • revise and promulgate new maritime legislation; • develop maritime training to provide qualified seafarers; • promote the employment of Namibian seafarers to the international shipping industry; • install appropriate measures to protect the integrity of the Namibian waters; • ensure the implementation of the approved recommendations of the Independent Task Force on TransNamib Ltd; • draw up and implement a master plan for the development of a meteorological services infrastructure in Namibia. • commercialise most of its functions that can more efficiently be performed in a commercial environment; • maximise the involvement of the private sector in the provision of services currently provided by the department; • promote and participate in the establishment of additional maintenance and repair centres in the regions in order to enhance efficient maintenance and avoid unnecessary expenses; • train, through special training courses, workshops and seminars all personnel of the ministry to increase the efficiency and effectiveness of staff and to foster professionalism; • computerise the administrative functions of the ministry to ensure efficient performance and sound financial control; • transform the stores financial system to that of a trade account; • introduce the provisioning of non-standardised stock items, according to customer needs; and • improve the efficiency and productivity of the government garage, including the commercialisation of certain functions which can be performed more efficiently in a commercial environment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 69 Strategies The broad strategies of the transport sector include the following: • implementing the policies contained in the White Paper on Transport Policy; • restructuring the Ministry as provided for in the MWTC 2000 Project; • ensuring that new institutional structures are effective and responsive to technological and international developments; • staffing the new institutional structures and the department with fully trained Namibians; • implementing the road-user charging system; • establishing the road fund administration, roads contractor company and roads authority, and to have these fully operational; • reviewing appropriate aviation user charges; • implementing the recommendations of the aerodromes Master Plan; • promoting accession to relevant maritime conventions; • approving the training and examination of seafarers in Namibia; • issuing and registering seafarers and promoting the registration of ships and vessels; • ensuring seaworthiness of ships and vessels; • ensuring the prevention and combating of marine pollution; • revising all relevant legislation, including the National Transportation Corporation Act, 1987; • drawing up legislation for quality control of rail services; and • putting in place a Namibian Meteorological Services Act. • standardising basic building designs; • creating a commercial account for fixed asset management; • introduce appropriate adjustment of lease rental tariffs and categorizing all accommodation; • implementing commercialisation principles and ideas to strengthen and • increase the capacity of the organisation prior to becoming a fully fledged commercial entity; • decentralizing cleaning services and the transfer of security services; • reviewing the air transport service to meet the needs of user ministries; • accelerating the vehicle replacement programme of the government garage. 4.2.3 Employment and Unemployment High and persistent unemployment is one of the key weaknesses in the Namibian economy. Dealing with unemployment is complex. Granted, in almost all economies at almost any time, many individuals are unemployed. That is, there are many people who are not working but who say they want to work in jobs like those held by individuals similar to them, at the wages those individuals are earning. However, in Namibia unemployment is of a structural nature in that there is a mismatch between skills and available jobs. There are also institutional bottlenecks that may inhibit job creation, such as the dominance of trade unions in both the private and public sectors, although the extent of its impact on employment and wages in Namibia is not well researched. Unemployment is estimated to be as high as over 30 per cent. A recent study (2000) found that unemployment has been growing since the 1970’s in spite of the fact that the economy has only a small labour force of about half a ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 70 million people. According to this study, there were about 20,000 people unemployed in 1970 compared to about 170,000 people in 1998. If these figures are true, then unemployment increased from 7.7 per cent in 1970 to 32.1 percent in 1998. Contrast this with growth in nominal GDP that was about N$151.6 million in 1970 and in 1998 stood at N$16,826 million (N$8,165 million in 1990 prices). This strongly suggests that the economy has performed dismally at creating additional jobs, without controlling for other dynamics such as post-Independence population growth. The economically active population in the country was estimated at 612,618 in 1997, made up of 307,454 men and 305,165 women. Based on the broad definition, the unemployment rate was 34.5% for the whole country; the rate was higher for women than for men (40.4% against 28.6%, respectively); and lower in urban areas (32.4%) than in rural areas (36.1%). As pointed out earlier, unemployment in Namibia is very much of a structural nature, characterised by the following structural features: • Limited size of the domestic market • Economic dualism and labour market segmentation • Declining productivity in agriculture • Weak performance of the manufacturing sector It has also been found that unemployment in Namibia has been accompanied by rising capital intensity, which implies that some substitution of labour for capital took place. Agriculture and fishing; trade, repairs and hotels; real estate and business services; and transport and communication are the only sectors that had employment intensity indexes greater than 1 for at least 14 years in total over the period 1970 to 1998. Not surprisingly, mining, manufacturing and the general government were found to be highly capital intensive. Only fishing and agriculture were found to be consistently labour-intensive over the investigation period. Therefore, technological choice in the modern sector is critical and policies/incentives schemes that subsidises capital without corresponding subsidies for the use of labour, should be guarded against. The Government has put in place a number of policy measures and programmes, to encourage local and foreign investment in the economy of Namibia, with the view to diversifying productive activities and creating employment opportunities for the country’s fast-increasing labour force. These include: i. Affirmative Action (Employment) Act No. 29 of 1998, for the enhanced participation and integration of previously disadvantaged groups in society in the labour market, and the promotion of equal opportunity in employment; ii. White Paper on Labour Based Works (September 1998), for positive contribution to poverty reduction and employment creation; iii. National Employment Policies for Job Creation and Protection of Workers (May 1997), to provide a legal framework for employment promotion and creation; iv. Public Service Act No. 13 of 1995, for establishment, management and efficiency of the Public Service and regulation of employment; v. Employee Compensation Act No. 30 of 1941 (amended by Act 5 of 1995), for the establishment of Employees Compensation Accident Fund and Accident Pension Fund. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 71 In 1995, the Ministry of Agriculture, Water and Rural Development produced a National Agricultural Policy, which outlined the objectives of the agricultural sector, and strategies for achieving the objectives. The objectives included, among others, achieving growth and stability in farm incomes; ensuring food security and improved nutritional status; creating and sustaining viable employment and general livelihood opportunities in rural areas. During 1997, the Ministry of Trade and Industry came up with a policy paper on small business development, whose general stance was pro-development of small business, as a way of involving the majority of the people in productive activities. The specific objectives of the policy were to: increase the real income accruing to the small business sector; diversify activities away from low value-added and crowded activities; and increase the involvement of small business in manufacturing activities. The government regarded the development of small business (small-scale and informal sector enterprises) as holding the key to employment and the economic empowerment of a large section of the population. In spite of these policy incentives, which were put in place to promote investment in the economy and stimulate employment, especially in the manufacturing sector, employment still remains a major problem as the economy of Namibia remains heavily dependent upon tertiary and primary industries. The results of the 1997 Namibia Labour Force Survey show that agriculture remains the largest employer of labour in the country, employing 36.6% of those economically active. This was followed by the wholesale and retail trade sector (8.4%0, private households (7.1%), and community/personal services (6.1%). The private sector employed 44% of the workforce, followed by Government. A fairly large proportion of the workforce (11.7%) is classified as ‘unpaid family worker’, while 9% are self-employed. The 2001 census results, illustrated in Figure 4.7, indicate that the workforce is dominated by Private and Public Services, employing 57.1% of all workers, followed by agriculture, hunting, fishing (25%) and manufacturing (12.3%). Figure. 4.7: Employment Workforce by Industry and Gender (2001) In d u s tr y Not stated Private/Public Serv. Wholesale & Retail Manufacturing Agriculture, Fishing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 72 As indicated by the educational characteristics of the workforce, only a very small proportion of the employed is skilled: 12.5% of the workforce has no formal education; 44% has only full or partial primary education; and less than 1.0% has post-secondary education. The 2001 census figures show that the overall unemployment rate is 31%, higher for females (35.9%) than for males (26.8%). Unemployment is remarkably high among the youth; 40.4% for those aged 15-19; and 46.9% for those 20-24 years of age. As illustrated in Fig.4.8, there are significant differences over the employment rate by age for both sexes; the rate is higher for females in all ages up to age 64. Although the Labour Act of 1992 stipulates that no child under the age of 14 years may be employed for any purpose, the 1999 Namibia Child Activity Survey found that 16.3% of children between 6 and 18 years of age were employed. Sub-Vision The economic environment is suitable for all citizens who are able and willing to work, and there is full employment in the economy, with a well-established and functioning Labour Market Information System for the effective management of the dynamics of the labour force. Figure. 4.8: Unemployment Rate by Age and Sex (2001) P e rc e n t ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 73 Things to do • Promote vigorously employment creation policies and programmes. • Implement the existing labour laws and policies in the country and international conventions to which Namibia has committed herself. • Promote the effective development and operation of small and medium scale enterprises. • Provide training in business development and management to both in-school and out-of-school men and women. • Encourage the development of self employment among potential job seekers. • Ensure that education and training programmes address the demands in the labour market. • Place emphasis on technical education and training at all levels and facilitate such training by providing adequate financial support. • Institute measures that will increase labour productivity. • Encourage people to work with their hands. Where we want to be (2030) • There is decent work for all who are willing and able. • Healthy labour conditions exists • There is social justice, equity and fair labour practices • There is compliance by all with the legislation on affirmative action and equal opportunities in employment. • Namibian workers earn at least a decent wage. • Child labour is non-existent. • Employment protection is pursued • Industrial peace/harmony is maintained. • The Labour Market Information System is in operation in all the regions, and is effective. • A continuing process of institutional and human capacity building is enhancing productivity of labour. • The workforce has access to and effectively utilises modern technology in production, marketing and communication. Current situation • High and persistent unemployment is one of the keyweaknesses in the Namibian economy. • The 2001 census figures show that the overall unemployment rate is 31%, higher for females (35.9%) than for males (26.8%). Unemployment is remarkably high among the youth, namely 40.4% for those aged 15-19; and 46.9% for those 20-24 years of age. • The Government has put in place a number of policy measures and programmes, to diversify productive activities and create employment opportunities, for e.g. Affirmative Action (Employment) Act No. of 1998, White Paper on Labour Based Works (September 1998); National Employment Policies for Job Creation and Protection of Workers (May 1997); Public Service Act No. 13 of 1995; Employee Compensation Act No. 30 of 1941 (amended by Act 5 of 1995). • Employment still remains a major problem as the economy of Namibia remains heavily dependent upon tertiary and primary industries. Worst-case scenario • Widespread unemployment and under employment. • Abundant supply of unskilled workers. • Declining labour productivity and rising wages. • Labour unrest. • Predominance of foreign workers Things to avoid • Placing barriers on capacity development. • Discouraging the operation of small and medium scale enterprises. • Not implementing employment creation policies and programmes. • Passive support to programmes of education and training, particularly in science and technology Employment and Unemployment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74 Objective To ensure that all factors of production in an economy (land, labour, capital and entreprenuership) are fully utillised. Strategies • Placing competent people in the right places with clear job descriptions to prevent duplication of efforts. • Promoting self-employment by creating the enabling environment for the SME sector, including access to loan for micro and macro enterprises. • Maintaining an effective Labour Market Information System. • Creating job opportunities for all categories of workers. • Promoting local business people. • Training people in specific skills needed. • Applying non-discriminatory employment policy in all sections of our society. • Creating a conducive environment for investors and providing practical training for self-employment. • Formulating and implementing appropriate employment creation policies and programmes. • Encouraging disadvantaged persons to exercise their skills. • Equipping people with skills to compete in the market environment. • Supporting capacity-building initiatives at all levels. 4.2.4 Data and Research National data on macro-economic issues are collected through the Population and Housing Census, undertaken every ten years, with preliminary results from the 2001 census just released. Other national surveys include the Household Income and Expenditure Survey; the 1999 Living Conditions Survey; the Namibia Labour Force Survey, 1997, 2001; the 1999 Child Activity Survey. National social and economic data have also been collected through the 1994/95 Namibia Agricultural Census and the series of Annual Agricultural Production Surveys since 1996/97. Health data have been collected through the Demographic and Health Surveys (1992 and 2000). The Ministry of Home Affairs is responsible for vital registration (the continuous and timely registration of vital events, i.e. births, deaths and marriages). However, coverage is far from universal; it has been estimated that only 20.3 percent of the expected total live births in the country were registered in 1991, and 27.2 percent in 1992, with better coverage reported in urban than rural areas. The National Population Policy for Sustainable Development provides for the collection and dissemination of national social, demographic, economic and related data for planning purposes and encourages the strengthening of existing institutions established for this purpose (e.g., the Central Bureau of Statistics; the line Ministries; etc). In line with the Policy’s multi-sectoral approach, the need to adopt collaborative approaches to data collection, analysis and dissemination is being fostered among the relevant agencies. Virtually all the Government sectors collect official data, but most of these are not analysed to provide information to the public. Research is being undertaken in the country by numerous institutions both public and private (Unam; the PoN; National Forestry Research Centre; National ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 75 Botanical Research Institute; DRFN; NEPRU; Namibia Nature Foundation; Central Veterinary Laboratory; National Forensic Laboratory; Namibia Meteorological Service; and some other ministries, agencies and parastatals). The review for NDP2 formulation shows that private sector research activities in Science and Technology are limited. However, there is no mechanism for monitoring research activities in the country. Therefore, the scope of research activities and their impact on planning and development in general are difficult to determine. It is planned that during the NDP2 cycle, Government will initiate, among others, four key co-ordinating Science and Technology institutions; namely, i) Commission for Research, Science and Technology; ii) the Centre for Innovations, Research and Entrepreneurship of Namibia; iii) National Council on Higher Education; and: iv) Science and Technology Information Centre. In order to support Science and Technology research in public institutions and encourage private participation, Government plans to create a common resource pool, the Science and Technology Innovation Fund. The Fund will finance national research under the guidance of the National Commission for Research, science and Technology. Research on macroeconomic issues will continue to be supported by Government and private agencies through their conventional channels. Sub-Vision Namibia has a wealth of accurate, reliable and current information on aspects of its population in relation to social and economic development planning and programme management; through research, the range of information available on population and development in Namibia is consolidated, the national research programme continues to identify and fill gaps in knowledge. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 76 Things to do • Strengthen the existing institutions that are responsible for generating data and information for development planning (Central Bureau of Statistics and other Ministries collecting social and economic, and environmental data); • Create adequate capacity for research in social and economic development in Namibia through the higher institutions of learning. • Develop a national research agenda on social and economic issues and implement it. Where we want to be (2030) • There are adequate scientific data and information (social, demographic, economic, environmental,) for development planning and programme management. • There is complete registration of births, deaths and marriages. • The existing institutions that are responsible for generating data, and conducting research for development planning continue to operate efficiently. • There are adequate resources for data collection, analysis and dissemination of data and information. • Adequate capacity exists for training and research in Science, technology, as well as social and economic development and environmental issues in Namibia. • Adequate research is done in support of an active, dynamic and competitive Science and Technology sector in Namibia. • There is a general understanding of development issues in the country. • Research covers a wide range of development issues in the country, and information on research is accessible. • There is adequate funding of data collection, research and information dissemination for development. planning and programme management. Things to avoid: • Discourage research in Science and Technology; as well as social and economic research and data collection. • Reduce resources to institutions responsible for research, data collection and d analysis. • Collect data without analyzing. • Non-dissemination of data and information. Current situation • National data are collected through the Population and Housing Census, undertaken every ten years since 1991. • Other national surveys include the Household Income and Expenditure Survey; the 1999 Living Conditions Survey; Labour Force Surveys, 1997 and 2001; Annual Agricultural surveys, 1996 to 2002. • Health data are collected through the Demographic and Health Surveys (1992 and 2000) conducted by the Ministry of Health and Social Services, with support from other research agencies. • Vital registration is carried out by the Ministry of Home Affairs but coverage is incomplete. • Research works are being undertaken in the country by numerous institutions both public and private, but there is no mechanism to monitor the range of activities. • It is planned that during the NDP2 cycle, Government will initiate, among others things, four key co-ordinating Science and Technology institutions. • In order to support Science and Technology research work in public institutions and encourage private participation, Government plans to create a common resource pool, the Science and Technology Innovation Fund. • Research on macro-economic issues will continue to be supported by Government and private agencies through their conventional channels. Worst-case scenario • Existing data for planning are outdated • Planning is done without adequate data and information • Programme monitoring and evaluation inhibited due to lack of data • Research is neglected Data and Research ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 77 Objectives • To organise and co-ordinate data collection, processing, and dissemination at all levels of the economy and society. • To ensure the continuous production of necessary data for development planning, plan monitoring and evaluation and progress reporting. • To ensure that, through research, the range of information available on development issues in Namibia is consolidated, adequate and accessible for planning and programme management. Strategies • Implement a National Statistical System, through consultations with producers and users of statistics in the country, consisting of decennial censuses, universal and complete vital registration (births, deaths, marriages), official records laboratory studies and special surveys. • Strengthening the existing and new institutions involved in the collection, analysis and dissemination of scientific and macro-economic and related data for planning. • Strengthening capacity-building for research and programme implementation by the existing institutions and through networking. • Promoting timely and continuous collection, analysis and dissemination of data from all sources; • Promoting research on science and technology and emerging development issues such as HIV/AIDS, orphans, ageing and socio-cultural factors affecting demographic behaviour, particularly sexuality, family formation, migration, gender discrimination, etc. • Integrating Namibia Vision 2030 issues into the school curricula at all levels; building capacity in the training of teachers; and designing and publishing instructional materials on Vision 2030. 4.3 DEVELOPING A KNOWLEDGE-BASED SOCIETY The modern world is moving from heavy industry to a knowledge-based economy based on specialist services, specialised industries, communications, and information technologies. Namibia needs to fast track its development process, and springboard over the heavy industry development path taken by the industrialised countries. We must focus on high value-added services, specialised industries that are modest in their water requirements and information technology. To achieve this, we will have to transform ourselves into an innovative, knowledge based society, supported by a dynamic, responsive and highly effective education and training system. 4.3.1 Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Advanced micro-electronics-based Information and Communication Technologies (ICT’s) are at the heart of recent social and economic transformations in the industrialised and much of the developing world. These technologies are now being applied to all sectors of the economy and society. The growth in the use of ICT’s is aided by persistent price reductions and the continuing improvements in their quality and capabilities. Greater use of ICT’s opens up new opportunities for Namibia and other developing countries to harness these technologies and services meet their development goals. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 78 Worldwide, ICT is developing at an impressive rate and the trends for future developments include wireless access and digital technology developments; ever increasing access to information for education, entertainment, health and lifestyle through the Internet; growth in e-business; expansion of ‘virtual world’ (education, social, information-sharing, entertainment); and the development of mechatronics (merging of electronic and mechanical devices). Namibia’s ICT sector suffers from a lack of trained and skilled ICT human resources. Most organisations, therefore, import these skills from other countries. This importation is made difficult by bureaucracy. Limited investment and focus in this area reduces the potential for Namibia to benefit optimally from the many opportunities offered by ICTs. Unless this changes, Namibia will lose its current Human Development Index rating and fall behind other developing countries, which are implementing ICT development plans. The primary reason for Namibia’s poor ICT development status, is the inadequate levels of achievement of school leavers in mathematics, and science. The proportion of Namibian students enrolled in science subjects in 1995-97 was only 4% of all tertiary-level students. Although, Namibia is one of several countries in southern Africa with good ICT access, there are some limitations. Key limitations include: • The lack of competition in the telecommunications field, which is dominated by Telecom Namibia Ltd. • No hardware manufacturers and a limited number of software developers in Namibia. All hardware and standard software are mainly imported from South Africa. • International bandwidth of 7.2Mb, is very low compared to international standards outside Africa. • Connectivity costs in Namibia are relatively high. • All households and businesses must use the services of Telecom Namibia for Internet access. • Only 7.2% of households have access to a computer and 38.6% to a telephone (see Figure 4.9, based on 2001 census data). • Some e-business activities take place in Namibia, but all web pages hosted in Namibia have a very slow access rate due to low bandwidth. • Namibia’s libraries are poorly equipped to play their vital role in the ‘Age of Information’. Very few offer Internet access. None had any media other than reading material available (no videos, CDs, DVDs etc) and only a very limited number of periodicals. There is also a lack of qualified librarians. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 79 Sub-Vision Advanced microelectronics-based Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) are used to achieve social and economic transformations in Namibia; the costs of ICTs continue to fall as their capabilities increase, and ICTs are being applied throughout all sectors of the economy and society to serve development goals. Figure 4.9: Access by Households to TV, Telephone and Computer (2001) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80 Things to do • Develop and implement a comprehensive ICT policy. • Integrate ICT education and training in school curricula. • Invest in research for development to promote local ICT industries. • Improve access to ICT facilities for all members of the Namibian society. • Enhance bandwidth both internally and externally to at least 1 GB. Where we want to be (2030) • Comprehensive national ICT policy fully implemented. • IT training from pre-primary through to tertiary education. • A university of Applied Science and Technology with adequate support established. • Collaboration among science and technology research groups involved in ICT, in developed world and Namibia, entrenched. • Internet access available to and used by most Namibians. • Internet access costs reduced and speed improved to high level. • Internet-based training facilities reach all Namibians. • Wireless networks installed across the country. • Significant local production of ICT equipment achieved. • Incentives and subsidies for computer hardware purchase available. • Support for entrepreneurs in ICT available. • ICT infrastructure and services advanced. Current situation • Growth and importance of ICTs in social and economic sectors worldwide • Persistent price reductions and improvements in quality and capabilities of ICTs worldwide • Lack of trained and skilled ICT human resources in Namibia • Dependence on imported skills and technical knowledge • Poor level of education in mathematics, sciences and technological skills • Inadequacy of investment in ICTs • Lack of focus on ICT development by government. Things to avoid • Government does not implement ICT policy • Inadequate investment into improving basic education in this area (including mathematics, IT and natural sciences) • Insufficient support for students in engineering, ICT and natural and applied sciences • No subsidies to reduce computer hardware prices • No support for companies providing additional Internet access services to create competition • No financial support for local ICT production industries • No investment or policy to increase Internet access across Namibia • No investment into improving Internet access speed in Namibia. Worst-case scenario • No ICT policy , thus leading to stagnation of ICT development. • Basic education in mathematics, IT and science stays on current poor levels • Namibians remain essentially illiterate in ICT. • Limited access to ICT facilities. • Internet access costs remain at current high level, or increase • Internet access speed remains at current low level or decreases • ICT/Internet access only available in limited urban areas • No investment in modern wireless communication technology • Dependence on imported foreign equipment, services, knowledge and expertise in ICT. Information & Communication Technology ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81 Targets for ICT Development The future deployment and use of ICTs in Namibia with the objective to provide economic benefit for all members of the Namibian society requires at least the implementation of the following strategies: • Developing, implementing and monitoring a national ICT policy; • IT training from pre-primary education, and high financial support of students in applied sciences; • Investments in electrical/electronic engineering, and computer science education; establishment of a University of Applied Science and Technology with high financial support, virtual Internet based-training facilities used to reach all Namibians; • Support of co-operation of the Namibian institutions with international research institutions; • Provisions of benefits for PC purchase, free broadband Internet access for the public; • Support for ICT/Internet access centres in rural areas is given, and installation of wireless LAN implementations in identified centres of the country; • Support of companies specialised in hardware design in conjunction with mechatronics; • Namibian and foreign entrepreneurs in the areas of ICT are financially supported; • Investments in governmental ICT infrastructure and IT services. Priority must be given to the development, implementation, and monitoring of a comprehensive ICT policy for Namibia. After the successful implementation of the policy, which must have the support of all sections of the population, the industries and the government, we can expect the following development: 2005: • PC prices in Namibia are among of the lowest in the world due to financial support and reduced taxes; • Small companies assemble PCs and equipment in Namibia; • Telecentres are active in several rural centres in Namibia; • The connection bandwidth of Namibia to the Internet backbone is increased by the factor 100 compared to the value in 2001; • Wireless high-speed networks are implemented in all larger cities in Namibia; • Due to massive advertisement campaigns, financial benefits and world class curricula and lecturers, 50% of all Namibian students study at the University for Applied Science in the areas of electrical-electronic engineering and computer science; • Virtual learning programmes and facilities – in combination with the telecentres – allow all Namibians access to further training and education; • Selected governmental institutions provide e-business services to the Namibian public and to foreign investors. 2010: • The ICT graduates establish a large number of small companies supported by foreign capital; ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 82 • Namibia has the largest wireless high-speed network in the world and foreign companies invest in research institutions in Namibia; • Due to the low prices for IT equipment and the local production of solar energy supported power supplies, in addition to wireless LAN technology, people in nearly all rural areas in Namibia have access to the Internet; • The virtual learning programmes developed in Namibia are used worldwide; • Media technology is another area which benefits from ICT know-how available in Namibia; • The increased use of ICT in production and service industry makes the Namibian industry competitive on the world market; • All governmental institutions provide e-business services to the Namibian public and to foreign investors. 2020: • ICT companies in Namibia generate a significant amount of tax income and employment opportunities; • Media technology services are another growing industry segment targeting worldwide export markets; • Namibian ICT experts are working in neighbouring African countries and gain worldwide experience; • Namibia exports more and more knowledge and knowledge-based products to the world markets. 2030: • The ICT sector is, economically the most important sector in Namibia; • Namibian-based ICT service companies are competitive players on international markets; • Namibia is exporting, to a large extent, tailor-made hard- and software to the worldwide market using e-business. Objective To have fully developed and implemented a national ICT strategy with sufficient funds allocated to support local ICT production and ICT training and education, resulting in a significant increase in the use of ICTs in Namibia, providing economic benefit for all members of Namibian society. Strategies • Developing, implementing and monitoring a comprehensive national ICT policy. • Producing and using ICTs to social and economic advantage – reduce risks by forging a dynamic relationship between human and technological resources. • Integrating ICT education and training into education and training system • Developing human resources for effective national ICT strategies – through education and training in relevant technological and scientific skills. • Factoring HIV/AIDS into ICT development strategies. • Improving access to ICT facilities for all members of the Namibian society. • Strengthen and co-ordinate existing ICT expertise within Namibia. • Encourage collaboration of Namibian institutions with international research institutions. • Investing in research and development and promoting local ICT industries. • Reducing costs to access through encouraging competition among telecommunications companies. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 83 4.3.2 Production Technology Natural Resources Namibia is rich in resources but, like other developing countries, is hampered by challenges such as poverty, unemployment and crime. However, Namibia does have a number of positive factors in its favour. The country is politically stable and has good infrastructure including roads and communications. The govern ment is committed to rural and urban developments, and emphasis is placed on health, education and other socio-economic matters. Namibia’s current industries are centred around the food sector – with the exception of mining. These industries include fishery; processing of farming and game products (meat, tannery, and dairy); and processing of agricultural products (mills, breweries). In terms of technology, on the whole, the companies working in these areas are up to standard. One of the major problems they face is the limited number of adequately trained people to maintain the equipment. This is a major contributing factor to non-competitive productivity. The manufacturing and vendor sector needs to be nourished and developed. There are currently several constraints – the lack of funds for entrepreneurs because of the conservative approach of the banking sector; the lack of many major industries resulting in low vendor industry growth; insufficient technical support from development agencies (both NGO and governmental); and again the lack of local technical skill and knowledge. Technical Capacity Highly educated technicians and engineers are scarce, making it difficult for companies to conduct their own research and development. The technical and scientific skills and knowledge of a whole generation need uplifting. For this Namibia will have to turn to foreign experts for a while. This can enhance Namibia’s efforts to become self-sufficient in the handling and development of machinery and technology. The shortage of human capacity with technical skills, innovation and high productivity are factors contributing to the low rate of Namibia’s industrialisation. Other factors are, the lack of adequate financial support from the finance sector, and suitable loans from banks. At present, most of the services performed within the country are competitive but heavily reliant on foreign expertise. Posts at an advanced level cannot be filled adequately by Namibians. Newly educated Namibian technicians and engineers could engage themselves in the maintenance area as a starting point where they can gain experience and additional knowledge to drive the industrialisation of the country and, in the future, enable Namibian development and technology. Energy Resources and Services Energy provides essential inputs for other economic sectors and social services. The lack of access to energy services constitutes a major obstacle to sustainable development. An industrialised nation needs to be at least partially independent of foreign energy. Namibia experiences a very diverse situation: some small (urban) areas are quite well supplied with energy while other – mostly quite large – areas ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 84 have very little or no electrical energy supply at all. Moreover, the energy sources available in the rural areas are mostly uneconomic, inefficient and usually environmentally unfriendly. The most cheapest and most effective form of power generation is gas turbines using natural gas. Low cost power and its (almost) unlimited availability is the main requirement for any industrial growth. When located close to a very massive mining sector project and a fresh water source, makes it more ideal. Kudu gas is located roughly 30 kilometres from Oranjemund. With gas available, many down the - line industries can be set up. Namibia depends on imports for its liquid petroleum fuel. Liquid fuels is available countrywide at prices that reflect actual costs of delivery to the consumer through a network of service stations and general dealers. The Government, through the Ministry of Mines and Energy (MME), regulates the prices, but the intention is to gradually ease price controls. Research has revealed that there is an ongoing increase in prices of petroleum products. Non-petroleum producing countries have to devise means of how to best manage the deregulation, liberalisation and expansion and expansion of the petroleum market. Rural electrification is one of the priority programmes which was started immediately after Independence. N$203 million have been invested in the programme, and more than 15,000 rural centres were connected to the national power grid. The rural electricity consumption has increased by 37.3% from 1994 to 1999. The Electricity Control Board (ECB) was established in 2000 as the regulator of the Namibian electricity sector under Electricity Act 2000. As from July 2001 companies/institutions have to acquire a license from the ECB for generation, distribution and supply of electricity. Four important power transmission expansion projects of national significance were completed during NDP1. The 400kV of 900km inter-connector project is one of the biggest capital projects in Namibia to date to increase the power supply capacity. It will strengthen security of supply through integration into the future Southern African Power Pool western corridor, from the Inga hydroelectric plant, through Angola, to South Africa. A feasibility study on Epupa hydropower was completed in 1998 and handed over to the Governments of Namibia and Angola. The feasibility study indicates that there is a capacity of about 400MW. Potential sites have been identified for a hydro power plant downstream of Ruacana. Renewable energy The Government has worked on a biogas pilot project, using Indian technology, to alleviate energy constraints. Biogas is an alternative energy for lighting and cooking and also has a rural development component. The raw material used to produce biogas is cow dung, which is also used as fertiliser. Ten domestic biogas plants were constructed countrywide and it is planned to expand the project. Biosmass fuels are the main sources of energy used for heating and cooking by most rural areas and some urban informal settlements. The availability of wood ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 85 resources in some areas is decreasing due to the lack of alternative fuels. In 1998, the Government established a National Biomass Programme to address the needs and problems that communities face on biomass resources. Policies The Government has put in place a policy framework that encourages the exploration and exploitation of the country’s energy resources in a sustainable manner. The Namibian White Paper on Energy Policy was promulgated by Parliament in May 1998. The White Paper on Energy touches on issues of urban and rural energy needs, economy, electricity, oil and gas, renewable energy, economic empowerment, environment, health and safety, energy efficiency and conservation, regional energy trade and co-operation. Sub-Vision Namibia is an industrialised nation, with a viable natural resources export sector, increased size of skills based industrial and service sector, and market oriented production; there is high level of self sufficiency, reliable and competitively priced energy, meeting the demand of households and industry. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 86 Things to do • Encourage shift of value of profession towards technically oriented knowledge and skills, and the promotion of an enterprise culture. • Support co-operation between Namibian educational/research institutions and international institutions. • Promote research and development: water, renewable energy, deregulation and taxation. • Promote and increase attractiveness of Namibia as a site for industry, services and business. • Support joint ventures with outside investors. • Promote new SME industries and improve financing schemes for new businesses by reworking current banking system. • Establish aid agencies and technical institutes to support new enterprises and improve mentorship with international experts. Where we want to be (2030) • Natural resources are sustainably used. • Local vendors are involved in projects at all possible levels. • Skills-based industry sector growing. • Namibia largely self-sufficient with reliable and competitively priced energy, meeting industry demands, plus some export of energy. • Production of energy from renewable sources – solar, wind and water in place. • Solar hydrogen production in place. • High level of awareness of value of energy and water. • High level of responsibility towards the environment and pollution evident. • Water access technologies in place (reclamation, desalination etc). • Small enterprises have grown to service major national projects. • Financing schemes for new businesses in place. • Support from technical institutes and agencies, and mentorship from local and international experts available for new enterprises. • Namibia viewed as an attractive site for industry and business. • Proper education and technical training has allowed the nation to add value to its resources. Current situation • Namibia is rich in resources but hampered by limited capacity to use these resources. • Besides mining, Namibia’s current industries centre around the food and beverage sector. • Current industries up to standard technologically. • Main problem is lack of adequately trained people to maintain equipment. • Namibia dependent on foreign experts to rectify this shortage in local technical knowledge. • Service sector competitive but reliant on foreign experts. Posts at advanced level cannot be filled adequately by Namibians. • Manufacturing and vendor sector lacking funds, sufficient technical support from development agencies and local technical expertise. Things to avoid • Planning major projects without focus on the country’s natural resources. • No major projects implemented. • Lack of focus on vendor-oriented projects. • No encouragement of local participation in major projects. • No investment into improving education and training in science and technology. • Continued reliance on imported technical skills and expertise. • No investment in any sectors of industry. • No research in this area or co-operation with international research bodies. • Insufficient financial and mentor support for SMEs. • No investment and research into renewable energy sources. • No education about value of energy, water and other natural resources. Worst-case scenario • Namibia’s technological development remains at its current level, thus the country depends on imported products. • The level of science and technology education does not improve, thus continued dependence on expatriates. • Insufficient financial support for SMEs and entrepreneurs in the industry, so they remain at their current level or even decrease in number. • Natural resources are depleted. • No progress in the use of renewable energy sources • Poverty increases. Production Technology ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 87 Objectives • To achieve enhanced local technological development, with a focus on appropriate technology; • To integrate entrepreneurship and technological innovation training into the education and training system from early childhood; • To achieve high value-added products and services. • To achieve security of energy supply through an appropriate diversity of economically competitive and reliable sources. • To ensure that households and communities have access to affordable and appropriate energy supplies. • To ensure that the energy sector is efficient, making contributions to Namibia’s economic competitiveness. Strategies • Basing industry and major projects on Namibia’s natural resources (e.g. power generation from ‘Kudu Gas’ at Oranjemund; a national water transfer and management system to optimise sustainable water use, including social and ecological needs; and use of lime and gypsum resources). • Investing in mining, food-processing and service sector. • Prioritising education in science and technology. • Encouraging local participation in major projects, and ensuring that projects are vendor-oriented. • Acquiring highly educated trainers for the education of Namibians (especially in the fields of science and technology). • Promoting renewable energy sources and implementing projects for production from these sources to meet industry demand. • Promoting the reduction of HIV/AIDS. • Establishing duty-free corridor network along roads joining capitals of SADC countries and ports on east and west coasts. • Ensuring that organisation and management of major projects are maintained and administered by technical experts. • Adhering to sound environmental standards in the distribution and consumption of energy. • Promoting self-sufficiency and access to energy services. • Ensuring cost-effective energy services. • Subscribing to taxation measures on oil/liquid fuels for reinvestment into other areas of high priority. • Emphasising social development, human technical capacity building and regional development in the production and distribution of energy. • Meeting the country’s energy demands reliably and competitively. • Reducing dependency on traditional fuel. 4.3.3 Education and Training Government has made big investments in education and training since Independence. Many changes have been made in the education system with new curricula introduced at all levels, efforts to improve the qualifications of teachers and other instructors and to obtain a suitably qualified teaching force. There have been big improvements in the infrastructure, and several reforms have been introduced to improve access, equity and efficiency in the system. There are, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 88 however, several areas where further improvements need to be made. The system is fragmented, with few opportunities for learners to pass from one provider of education and training to another. The fragmentation is, however, being resolved through legislative and policy interventions. In spite of the investment that has been made in new buildings for schools, tertiary institutions and learning centres, there are still schools with insufficient classrooms and other facilities, and some areas are not adequately provided with libraries or learning centres. The four colleges of education are producing teachers for basic education, but only 49.6% of the teachers in service are well-qualified. On its part, the University of Namibia is producing an increasing number of graduate teachers. To be recognised as a fully qualified teacher, the minimum qualification required is a degree or diploma in education. Presently only 46.9% have reached this level. The other teachers have the chance to upgrade their qualifications with the Basic Education Teachers Diploma through in-service training, or through a number of other programmes offered by other training providers. The supply of qualified personnel at all levels of education is inadequate. Curricula at all levels have been reformed after Independence, but at certain levels and areas there is still some foreign influence. The Grade 12 examinations are mostly set and marked according to the requirements of the Cambridge International Examinations and various tertiary qualifications are certified by South African boards. However the curricula and examinations are undergoing constant revision to make them more relevant to Namibia. The NQA is working on a qualifications framework, as well as establishing unit standards for all occupational classes. The results of the 2001 census show that out of the estimated total population aged 15 and above, who left school, 33.5% did not complete primary school. This figure was made up of 32.4% females and 34.7% males (details illustrated in Figure 4.10). Only 2% of adults who had left school have a university education, with slightly more males (2.6%) than females (1.8%). About 90% of school-age children are in school, with nearly 100% of the lower primary age group. The schools have introduced a system to improve their internal efficiency, whereby the number of repeaters has been reduced to less than 15%, and there is no repetition at the end of Grade 10 or Grade 12. There are only places in senior secondary schools for about 50% of the learners completing basic education. Learners who fail the Grade 10 or Grade 12 examinations are provided with opportunities to improve on their results through NAMCOL, TUCSIN and Figure 4.10: Population 15+ Years, Left School, by Educational Attainment and Sex (2001) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 89 other organisations. The proportion of female learners in the school system is about 50% but in certain subject areas, such as agriculture, science and commercial subjects, females are under-represented at both secondary and tertiary levels. Although the number of centres catering for pre-school children has increased considerably, early childhood centres still only cater for the needs of about 31 percent of children aged between 3 and 6. Training of workers is provided by a number of NGOs and there is no provision by government. There are many opportunities for life-long learning provided by government, parastatal companies, private companies and non-governmental organisations. Some result in qualifications while others improve the skills and competencies of the participants without giving them a certificate. The government has a national literacy programme which has made big advances in providing literacy education for adults, with the rate currently estimated at about 80%. Further efforts are needed to bring it up to the desired level of at least 90%. There is often a problem of articulation between one programme and another and there is no recognised path for adults to improve their qualifications from literacy up to the highest levels. Government builds a large number of new schools each year and improves the facilities at others, but there are still schools where learners do not have proper classrooms and communities where the distance from a school makes it difficult for the children, especially the young ones, to attend school. The lack of classrooms and physical facilities is not uniform across regions with certain regions being under-resourced. Many schools in the rural areas do not have water, electricity or a telephone, which limits their access to modern forms of communication. A number of government institutions have established centres to extend their services throughout the country. The four open and distance learning providers in Namibia namely, the PON, UNAM, NAMCOL and NIED in conjunction with the Ministries of Basic and Higher Education, have established a trust which enables learners from any of these organisations to use the facilities of their Centres. There are currently 37 of these Centres, ranging from fully equipped level one learning centres to minimally equipped level two centres. At present there are five Vocational Training Centres funded by Government, and a number of private vocational training facilities which exist for the provision of vocational education and training. In addition, there are a number of specialised colleges addressing specific areas such as Agriculture, Fisheries, Mining and Art. The GRN should provide an enabling environment in which research and inquiry are encouraged at all levels. Research priorities should be determined and incentives should be provided for the kind of research that the country needs. In all research activities supported in the country, links to the country’s institutions and research capacity building by Namibians, should be promoted. Sub-Vision A fully integrated, unified and flexible education and training system, that prepares Namibian learners to take advantage of a rapidly changing environment and contributes to the economic, moral, cultural and social development of the citizens throughout their lives. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 90 Things to do • Conduct a comprehensive review of all curricula. • Develop and implement Human Resource Development Plans. • Establish more Vocational Training Centres and Community Skills Development Centres (COSDEC). • Strengthen the teaching of mathematics, science and technology at all levels. • Import mathematics, science and technology teachers to augment the limited supply available from Namibian institutions. • Integrate entrepreneurship-training into the education system. • Achieve all ‘Education for All’ objectives • Create awareness of HIV/AIDS at all levels of education. • Sustain physical and communication infrastructure for education and training. • Implement education sector HIV/AIDS Policy and Strategy. • Strengthen Knowledge Creation (Research) Capacity. Where we want to be (2030) • Education system is unified and adequate education infrastructure provided in all regions. • Access to lifelong learning exists for all when and where they require it. • Access to senior secondary education exists for at least 80% of learners. • Access to tertiary and career-oriented education exists for at least 75% of school leavers. • Large number of multi-purpose learning centres are providing access to the Internet as well as education and training. • Well-qualified teaching staff available for all levels. • A national curriculum focusing on science and technology, which equips the learners with competencies to continue their education after school, exists. • Basic education concentrates on literacy and numeracy. • A national education system allows learners to accumulate learning achievements as and when they need them. • There exists a modularised curriculum that allows for small units of learning to be assessed and certified. • A well-functioning research and development system is in place. • Early childhood education and development provided. • Schools and Tertiary institutions are enhancing skills and other competencies. Current situation • Provision for teacher training, but only 50% of teachers adequately qualified. • Inadequacy of qualified personnel at all levels. • Curricula revision is on-going. • National qualifications framework being formulated. • Equal representation of male and female learners, except in some subject areas. • Internal efficiency at the primary level, but less than 20% reach senior secondary. • Out of the estimated total population aged 15 and above who left school, 33.5% did not complete primary school. This was made up of 32.4% females and 34.7% males. • Many providers of lifelong learning through various modes, but lack of framework to enable learners to pass from one level to another. • Many schools in the six northern regions lack proper classrooms and other facilities. • A number of learning centres already available. Things to avoid • Maintain separate structures with overlapping functions. • No effective coordination of policies at all levels. • Unhealthy competition between government funded institutions. • New learning centres established in urban areas at the expense of rural areas. • Ignoring HIV/AIDS and its impact. • Limiting the number of learners who gain access to senior secondary education. • Failing to expand the provision of tertiary education • Failing to place emphasis on mathematics, science, technology and English language proficiency Worst-case scenario • Fragmented education system managed and controlled by different structures • Uncoordinated policy for the use of ICT for learning • Little improvement in enrolment in Science and Technology fields • Automatic promotion being practised. • Majority of learners do not complete senior secondary education • Insufficient number of qualified teachers for science, technology, ICT and vocational training • Curricula development not fully localised • Curricula not relevant to the needs of the community and country. • No system of quality control Education and Training ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 91 Targets for Education and Training • Expand access to secondary schools for the target age group by 2006. • Provide all schools with drinking water and electricity where the necessary infrastructure will be constructed by 2006. • Equip all schools with school furniture by 2006. • By 2015, there should be at least one teacher for every 35 learners in primary and 30 learners in secondary schools. Government is working towards having 90% of the structures permanent by 2015 opposed to the current 84% permanent and 16% non-permanent. • By 2010 no more unqualified or under-qualified teachers in Namibia. • Minimum qualification required to be appointed as a teacher in Basic Education would be a Teacher’s Diploma (for Primary Schools) and a Bachelor of Education Degree for Secondary Schools. • By 2005 a coherent Vocational Education and Training Policy Framework will be in place. • By 2005 the National Examination, Assessment and Certification Board is established and has localised the IGSCE and HIGSE Examination System. • By 2030 Vocational Training Centres are established in all regions. • The literacy education rate for adults was 80% in 2001, expected to increase to 90% in 2015 and ultimately 100% by the year 2030. • Achieving a 50% improvement in levels of adult literacy by 2015, especially for women, and equitable access to basic and continuing education for all adults. • Eliminating gender disparities in primary and secondary education by 2005, and achieving gender equality in education by 2015, emphasising girls’ full and equal access to and achievement in Basic education of good quality. • Provide those who live with disabilities, access to lifelong learning by 2030. • Encourage the development of lifelong learning in Namibia through institutional and staff development by 2006. Building and Restructuring National Institutions for Posterity As of end of 2002, the regulations, policies, directives and guidelines, provided for in the recently (2001) promulgated Education Act, are in place therefore. The National Education Advisory Council, which would be a statutory mechanism for education stakeholders at large to discuss basic education policy development with government authorities in a formalised and authorised manner, is established in terms of the Act. By 2005, the National Examination, Assessment and Certification Board (NEACB), established by the Education Act and which broadly confirmed the role and mandates of the pre-Independence ‘Examination Board,’ has localised the IGSCE and HIGSCE examination system. The NQA, being responsible for overall quality assurance for education and training, is assuring the moderation of the primary, secondary and vocational education and training national examinations. The NIED is transformed into an autonomous institution, in order to serve the two ministries’ portfolio objectively in terms of teacher education, development and support at colleges of education under the Ministry of Higher Education, and curriculum development for basic education which resort under the Ministry of Basic Education. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 92 The VET system is reformed and transformed and administered by an autonomous NTA, providing for a greater involvement of the commercial and industrial sectors in the development of the VET system, which is being financed through a Training Levy. VTC’s and other training providers have been transformed into autonomous institutions. The Higher Education Act is passed by parliament, providing an umbrella to the existing UNAM and PON Acts, and has defined the role of the Ministry of Higher Education, and other stakeholders, in higher education. The Act also established the National Advisory Council for Higher Education (NACHE), to advise the Ministry of Higher Education on the strategic requirements of the higher education system. It would also budgetary procedures for the higher education system as a whole and recommend priorities on completing claims for resources, the development, coordination, productivity, efficiency and accountability of higher educations institutions. Furthermore, the NACHE will aculeate the monitoring and evaluation of staff development and management policies of higher education institutions; the administration of subsidies to higher education institutions, in accordance with the proposed funding formula. Supply of Human Resources In drawing up human resource supply projections by professional category for the period 2001-2030, the year 2000 is taken as the base year. It is then assumed that the growth rates derived will remain the same over the entire projection period, except for: (a) Medical Doctors, who are envisaged to increase at the rate of 2.0 percent per year; (b) Engineers, who are also envisaged to increase at 2.0 percent per year; (c) Non-technical secondary personnel, who are expected to decline at 0.4 percent per year; and (d) Unskilled and semi-skilled primary workers, who are expected to decline at 1.4 percent per year. The results of these projections are illustrated in Fig. 4.11 below. Financial, Real Estate and Business According to all the three economic growth scenarios, demand for the professional category of labour used in the delivery of financial, real estate and business services, will exceed supply throughout the period 2001-2030. The pace of production of this professional category of labour should be stepped up both at UNAM and at the PON. Scholarships should also be sought to facilitate the training of people in this professional category at the Master’s and Ph.D levels in the SADC Region and further a field, to produce highly specialised people who can handle more complex situations relating to the delivery of these services. Natural Science According to the three economic growth scenarios, demand for this professional category of labour will be more than ten times greater than supply over the entire period 2001-2030. There will be need for very rapid increases in numbers of students pursuing natural science courses at UNAM and at the Polytechnic of Namibia. Social Science According to the three economic growth scenarios, demand for this professional category of labour will be at least four times higher than supply. Institutions which produce this category of labour need to increase their intakes very significantly, for supply to catch up with demand. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 93 Engineers Demand for engineers already exceeds supply, and will continue to be increasingly greater than supply unless immediate measures are taken to step up the pace of production of engineers. Plans to establish the PON as a University of Applied Sciences and Technology are steps in the right direction, and which should be given support. Technicians The high demand for technicians calls for the expansion of the Diploma programmes of the PON and those of the other vocational institutions in the country. Well-defined systems of accreditation should be designed to enable Diploma graduates to move on to Degree programmes in technology. Medical Doctors Demand for medical doctors will be significantly higher than supply over the entire period 2001-2030. It is high time Namibia started producing medical doctors trained in various specializations. The pre-medicine programme already started at UNAM is, therefore, a step in the right direction, towards the establishment of a school of medicine. Agro and Natural Resources With diversification of agriculture and further development of the tourism industry, demand for this professional category will be far in excess of supply. Figure 4.11: Human Resource Supply by Profession ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 94 Health Nurses At the current population: nurse ratio, demand for nurses will exceed supply throughout the entire period, 2001 – 2030. Institutions producing nurses should step up their rates of production so as to reconcile supply with demand, and possibly, to reduce the population: nurse ratio. Teachers At the current rate of production of teachers, supply already exceeds demand. However, full employment will still be achievable by reducing students / teacher ratio, although this would call for more financial resources to the education sector. Technicallly Skilled Workers This professional category will absorb most of those who will be moving out of the categories of non-technical secondary and unskilled and semi-skilled primary careers. Vocational training centres and community skills development centres need to be expanded, to absorb those who will be graduating at the primary and secondary school levels. Also, vocational education should be incorporated into the school system, so that some students who leave school would already have technical skills which could make them competitive in the labour market. Non-Technical Secondary Workers Full employment for this category of labour will be attained by around the year 2010, after which demand will exceed supply. It should be a deliberate strategy to reduce the number of people who enter the labour market in this category. Unskilled and Semi-Skilled Primary Workers This is another category of labour whose size in the labour force should be reduced. Full employment will be achieved around the year 2015, after which demand will exceed supply. Figure 4.12: Percentage Shares of Professionals in Employment P e r c e n ta g e S h a r e s ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 95 Objectives • To ensure an integrated, unified and flexible education and training system which is accessible to all Namibians from early childhood. • To achieve an affordable and pragmatic education and training system, capable of producing a balanced supply of human resources, in response to demands in the labour market. • To ensure that the society is comprised of people who are literate, skilled, articulate, innovative, informed and proactive. Strategies • Unifying the management and regulation of public education and training under one policy-making and implementing structure, at national level. • Modularising the curricula and revision of delivery methods to take advantage of the newest technologies. • Strengthening the ICT, science and technology components of the curricula at all levels of the education and training system, including adult education. • Inegrating ICT in education and training. • Establishing multi-purpose learning centres throughout the country so that all learners will have access to ICT and other learning resources. • Strengthening the initiative to provide wider access to education and training through open and distance learning methods. • Promoting open and distance learning. • Strenghtening and sustaining physical infrastructure. • Establishing a university of applied science and technology. • Developing and implementing a national knowledge management and knowledge creation (research) strategy, with particular emphasis on science, engineering, technology and innovation. • Providing access to early childhood education for pre-school children. • Increasing the number of learners specialising in science, technology and ICT. • Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS in the education and training system. • Implementing the education and training sector HIV/AIDS Policy and Strategy. • Implementing an assessment-based national accreditation system under an integrated National Qualifications Framework. • Establishing a national quality assurance system led by a strong national inspectorate. • Upgrading the academic and professional qualifications of all educators, including English language proficiency • Strengthening the Human Resource Development Fund of the Republic of Namibia and ensuring that all human resource development activities of the Namibian government should be conducted under the auspices of the Fund. • Establishing a data base on the available human resources, as well as their specialisations, under the auspices of the National Human Resource Advisory Committee of the NPC. • Developing a programme to educate the public on Namibia’s population policy. • Providing in-service training programmes for unqualified and under-qualified teachers, and utilising advisory teachers and inspectors as mentors in student support programmes • Educating all Namibians on the importance of good governance, social ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 96 democracy, participatory decision-making and sustainable development • Integrating moral education that encourages a culture of respect and honesty into the school curriculum at all levels. • Utilising the National Qualifications Framework of the NQA to provide for better articulation between formal and non-formal skills acquisition, and between VTCs and the PON. • Establishing effective linkages of VTCs with in-company training programmes of private sector organizations, through the introduction of institutional training components in the VTCs curriculum. • Utilizing the training potential of private sector companies to their fullest, through tax incentives, by enticing them to (i) increase the nett number of apprentices in apprenticable trades and (ii) improve the supply of trained instructors to the VTB for curriculum design and development. • Strengthening co-operation between government, employers, employer organisations, employees and trade unions, on all matters relating to human resources development through the National Human Resource Advisory Committee of the NPC. • Improving the quality of police training and establishing police training centres in all regions. 4.3.4 Early Childhood Development Early Childhood Development (ECD) occurs during the first years of the longer period of childhood, which extends to age 18. Many of the principles of development that apply to early childhood will pertain to the later years as well. “Early childhood,” as is commonly known, spans the period from birth to the first year or two of primary school. But programs of early childhood-care cannot ignore the period before birth, since the health and well-being of the expectant mother contribute greatly to the healthy development of the embryo - and the latter to the health of the newborn. By providing children a fairer and better start in life, ECD programs have positive long-term benefits, including gains on future learning potential, educational attainment and adult productivity. Improving early child development also helps to promote social and gender equity. It helps to break the vicious cycles of poverty in two ways - by giving support to women and older girls, allowing them to earn and learn, and by providing children with a better base to draw upon in later years. Comprehensive child development programs help to counter discrimination and, if done right, programs can bring men into the child-rearing process. Efforts to break negative models of gender socialisation that marginalise and devalue girls and affirm boys, need to start with the earliest socialisation of the child, well before the age of six years. Early childhood programming can also serve as an important entry-point for community and social mobilisation, promoting participation, organisation and a better quality of life for older as well as younger members of the community. In view of this, Government promotes ECD through the Directorate of Community and Early Childhood Development in the Ministry of Women Affairs and Child Welfare (MWACW). The number of ECD centres has substantially increased over the last years. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 97 According to the 2001 Population Census, around 31 percent of children of 3 - 6 years are attending ECD centres. The census report indicates that there are no significant differences between female and male children participation in ECD programmes in 2001. However, participation in ECD programmes varies significantly in terms of region: less than 20 percent of children in the Caprivi, Kunene and Otjozondjupa regions are involved in ECD programmes, while over 40 percent of children are involved in the Khomas, Omusati and Oshana regions. There is as yet no concrete information regarding the enrolment of children aged 0 - 3 years in ECD programme. Sub-Vision All children aged 0 to 6 years have opportunities for early childhood development, in addition to the care of individuals and communities. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 98 Early Childhood Development (ECD) Things to do • Develop universal curriculum for ECD care-givers/workers and children aged 0 - 6 years. • Review and amend ECD Policy and ensure that it becomes an Act. • Strengthen parental education programs on ECD to target the children aged 0 - 3 years at home, and reach the enrolment of 90% of children aged 3 - 6 years into ECD Centres. • Develop the capacity of ECD care givers/ workers to ensure quality care-giving. Where we want to be (2030) • ECD policy becomes an Act. • Universal curriculum is developed and is in use by training institutions. • Integrated ECD programs are extended and 90% of children of 3-6 years are • enrolled in ECD Centres. • Capacity of 80% of ECD caregivers is reinforced and children receive quality • care. • Clear standards are set and implemented for ECD Centres. Current Situation. • Sustainability of ECD Centres is endangered due to the absence of incentives for ECD care-givers. • ECD is not recognised as a profession in Namibia, and as a result ECD care givers/workers are not motivated. • A significant number of parents do not feel that ECD is important and, as a result, they are reluctant to send children to ECD Centres. • Lack of universal curriculum for ECD care-givers and children, which leads to inadequate care. Things to avoid • No effective co-ordination with partners, and lack of integration of services among relevant stakeholders, leading to overlapping and duplication of activities. • ECD care-givers are trained, but there is not always appropriate follow-up (i.e. absence of monitoring and evaluation). • Quality care in some ECD Centres is lacking, especially in those located in rural and settlement areas. • No incentives are provided to ECD care givers, threatening the sustainability of ECD Centres, particularly in poor communities. Worst-case scenario • No substantial improvement takes place in terms of enrolment of children aged 3 - 6 years into ECD Centres. • Access to ECD services by children aged 0 - 3 years, orphans and vulnerable children, and HIV/AIDS infected and affected children, continues to be limited. • Inadequate care is provided at ECD Centres due to limited capacity of ECD care-givers/workers. Objectives • To promote and support quality, sustainable and holistic Integrated Early Childhood Development for children aged 0 - 6 years. • To develop the capacity of ECD care-givers/workers through skills development and the provision of quality training, and to promote the recognition of ECD as a profession, as a means to ensure quality care. Strategies • Implementing the approved ECD Policy through the integration of services ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 99 for children, among relevant stakeholders. • Supporting communities to establish ECD facilities with the aim to increase the attendance of children at ECD centres, including HIV/AIDS affected and infected children. • Initiating parental education programs in communities on the importance of ECD and developing programs to increase access to ECD services, including programmes for orphans and vulnerable children, children with special needs and children aged 0 - 3 years. • Developing innovative ECD programs for children in rural, isolated and marginalised communities, such as San and Ovahimba children. • Developing universal curricula for ECD care-givers and establishing an appropriate accreditation system for training institutions and agencies, to ensure adequate training standards. • Strengthening the existing National, Regional and Constituency ECD Committees, and promoting linkages among them in order to improve the delivery of services and expansion of the ECD program. • Developing communication materials and strategies on improved child and maternal care practices. • Establishing a comprehensive database on ECD and development, and appropriate mechanisms for documentation, collection, review and exchange. 4.3.5 Aspects of the Legislative/Regulatory Framework Namibia’s Constitution guarantees the fundamental rights and responsibilities of individuals and society, and is relevant to the advances made in science and technology. It guarantees “justice for all” in Article 1, and in chapter 3 elaborates on human rights and freedoms. Article 20 states that all persons have a right to education and that primary education shall be compulsory. Academic freedom and the freedom to carry on a trade are protected by Article 21, while the maintenance of the ecosystem, essential ecological processes and biological diversity are covered in Article 95. Article 95 also deals with property rights and Article 13 protects the fundamental privacy of the individual. The rights of people to education and the government’s responsibility are covered by the Education Act together with its statutes and regulations. Biotechnology is currently being addressed in draft national legislation. The legislation will cover areas such as agriculture, the environment and health. Bio technological research or the commercial use of genetically modified organisms, are dealt with by various existing Acts, but they do not take into account the latest advances in science and technology. However, a national policy, ‘Enabling the safe use of bio-technology’, has been published. Work has yet to be finalised on the legal and commercial frameworks, financial issues or intellectual property rights which are affected by advanced communication technology. The Copyright and Neighbouring Rights Protection Act of 1994 deals with copyright protection, but needs to be amended to accommodate the implications of e-commerce. Two old Acts which deal with trade marks and merchandise marks, are not well suited to deal with domain names and protect the rights of domain name holders. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 100 Objective To ensure the safe use of science and technology systems, including indigenous knowledge, while upholding the constitutional provisions for education and training. Strategies • Conducting a thorough analysis of existing legislation affecting ICT. • Developing legislation to cover contracts concluded by e-mail or on the WWW. • Amending the Copyright Act to accommodate ICT. • Developing appropriate national science and technology legislation. Establishing common measures for the evaluation of risk from the use of genetically modified organisms, and monitoring their use. Sub-Vision Cross-sectoral internal and external developments in the field of knowledge, information and technology are constantly monitored to assess their impact on the rights of the individual and the functioning of society and the national economy, and appropriate legislation and regulations are promulgated. Things to do • Conduct a thorough analysis of existing legislation affecting science and technology. • Develop legislation to cover contracts concluded by e-mail or on the WWW. • Amend the Copyright Act to accommodate ICT. Where we want to be (2030) • Legislation in place to protect the rights of the individual, while at the same time providing an enabling environment for knowledge, information and technology. • National Policy on ICT consultatively developed and disseminated, and backed up by enabling legislation. • National Commission on Research, Science and Technology constantly monitoring legislation in the light of new advances in science, technology and ICT. Current situation • Namibian Constitution contains clauses dealing with fundamental rights of the individual to education, to privacy and concerning property. • Article 95 of Constitution deals with ecosystem and biological diversity. • Education Act covers individuals’ rights to education. • Biotechnology has not yet been addressed in national legislation. • There is a policy document ‘Enabling the safe use of bio-technology’. • There is no legislation to cover the use of ICT. • National Policy on Research, Science and Technology published but has no legal back-up. Things to avoid • No policy formulated. • No back-up legislation is passed. Worst-case scenario • No policies implemented • No legislation passed • No body responsible for monitoring developments Legislative/Regulatory Framework ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 101 4.4 EQUITY: INDIVIDUALS, COMMUNITY AND THE STATE Since economic growth does not necessarily guarantee equitable development, the nation must ensure that social and economic development programmes reach the poor and vulnerable. This can be achieved by • implementing effective poverty reduction measures • creating equitable access to opportunities in all 13 regions of the country • mainstreaming gender • building sustainable futures for young people • recognising and promoting the role of senior citizens • providing care and support in cases of dire need • This section addresses the plight of vulnerable and marginalised individuals and groups and those who live in situations of poverty or face a situation of falling into poverty. The following three interlinked challenges are addressed: • Poverty-reduction – creating opportunities to utilise economic and social capabilities • Gender and age – recognising and supporting the strength of women, young people and senor citizens • Social security and safety-nets – caring for those in need 4.4.1 Poverty Reduction At first glance, Namibia appears to be doing relatively well when compared with other sub-Saharan African countries. Since Independence there has been political stability brought about mainly by the policy of national reconciliation, and a firm commitment to constitutional, democratic governance. Namibia inherited a well functioning physical infrastructure, which has since been maintained and expanded, strong underpinnings for market development, sound economic policy, and a reasonably well-organised public administration, albeit segregated along apartheid structures. In addition, Namibia is endowed with rich natural resources, such as diamonds and other mining products, fish, agriculture and outstanding tourist attractions. This has lead to a relatively high per-capita income that classifies Namibia as a low middle-income country. However, these initial impressions are misleading. Namibia is among the most dualistic countries in the world – both economically and geographically. The statistical average figure covers contrasting wealth and poverty, which is highlighted by the Gini-coefficient. The UNDP Human Development Report 1998 indicated a Gini-coefficient of 0.67 for Namibia, which is the highest value recorded worldwide. As of 1996, the per capita income of its 1.7 million people amounted to about US$ 2,080 and real growth rate has averaged around 4% annually since Independence. It is for this reason that Government remains committed to broad-based and equitable development policies and strategies, allocating well over 40% of its annual budget to social services (education and health-care – including social safety-nets). Ten percent of households (5.3% of the population) having the highest economic standard i.e. the highest per-capita income, are consuming about 44% of the total private consumption. On the other hand, 90% of households (94.7% of the population) are consuming about 56% of the total private consumption. Furthermore, the richest 10% of the society receive 65% of income. Poverty is also concentrated among groups which have historically been disadvantaged. Huge ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 102 income disparities exist between language groups, ranging from N$27,878 to N$1,416 female-headed households are more prone to poverty than male-headed households. Cultural and social conditions in Namibian society perpetuate women’s unequal status, especially in terms of their entitlements to resources and access to decision-making. Poverty exists, inter alia, amongst subsistence farmers, farm and domestic workers as well as the unemployed. Elderly people and people with disabilities, young women and men, and recent migrants into marginalised urban areas are disproportionately affected by poverty. Finally, many poor households rely on the social pension as an important source of income. The causes of poverty are complex, but some major factors can be identified. Economic growth averaged some 3.8% since Independence, which is substantially higher than over the pre-Independence decade. However, population growth estimated to be between 2.2% and 3.1% has levelled out the growth of the economy resulting in almost stagnant per-capita growth and rising unemployment. Access to productive assets also determines the vulnerability of households. Whilst there are 4,076 farmers owning 6,403 commercial farms, with an average farm size of more than 5,884 hectares occupying 44% of Namibia’s total surface, communal land constitutes 41%. Communal land is often of a lesser quality or poorly developed, but supports about 1 million people, or 95% of the nation’s farming population. Located predominantly in the north and the north-eastern part of the country, the core of poverty exists in this sub-sector. Moreover, the lack of access to credit, technical and managerial services, have constrained the expansion of self-employment. Inequity affects all 13 regions of the country differently in terms of income distribution, access to resources, social services and opportunities as well the regional ability to cope with the impact of trends, shocks and seasonality factors differs. There are sharp regional variations in terms of both the HDI (Life expectancy is 42 for Caprivi and 57.5 for Erongo; Adult literacy is 94% for Khomas and 57% for Kunene; School enrolment is 74% for Omaheke, 64% for Otjozondjupa and 50% for Oshana; Income disparity is N$ 11,359 for Khomas and N$ 1,070 for Ohangwena. A similar pattern emerges for the regions in terms non-survival, illiteracy, underweight children, poor water supply, limited health services, poor living standards and number of poor households. For example, Ohangwena has the lowest living standard due to fact that more than 60% of the people do not have access to health services and adequate water supply. The HIV/AIDS prevalence has shortened the average lifespan of Namibians especially in the Caprivi. Khomas seem to progress well but has a high incidence of underweight children probably as a result of the large influx of migrants to the peri-urban squatter settlements. There are marked differences between rural and urban areas thus the current pattern of rural-urban migration. The rural populations are more disadvantaged in terms of income, education, health-care and employment opportunities, outside the subsistence sector. Eighty five percent of consumption-poor households are located ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 103 in rural areas, making their living from subsistence farming primarily in the northern and north-eastern communal areas. However, pockets of poverty are also found in the southern regions, where income inequality is higher than other regions. The gap in average rural and urban income and living standard gives a strong incentive for rural-urban migration, as evidenced by the growth of informal settlements in peri-urban areas of almost all urban centres in the country. This is exacerbated by limited private sector investment programmes, which lead to low income and standard of living. About 51% of the rural people are engaged in subsistence agriculture with limited opportunities and support services, whereas 4/5 of urban citizens depend on wage employment with an expanding employment base. This situation therefore necessitates a comprehensive rural development strategy towards increased rural employment opportunities, and development of small-medium enterprises. There are also differences in main sources of income between rural and urban areas. In rural areas subsistence farming constitutes 51%, wages in cash only 27% and business account for only 5%. In urban areas, subsistence farming account for only 2%, whereas wages in cash and business account for 77% and 8%, respectively. Access to services also shows gross inequality. The combination of Namibia’s geographic vastness and its good quality physical and institutional infrastructure creates an opportunity for it to become an increasingly important land transport bridge in Southern and Central Africa. This transport role creates new manufacturing, construction and trading opportunities – initially, primarily within the region, and complemented increasingly by manufacturing production for world markets more broadly. Namibia’s long-run future depends on its being able to make the transition from a resource-dependent economy, to one which thrives as a producer of manufactures and services. This is achieved through investments in people - in education and health - of a quantity and quality sufficient to reverse the devastating legacy of apartheid and colonialism. For the short- and medium-term, Namibia relies on a multitude of income generation and safety-net initiatives from a diverse variety of segments of the economy, both private and public. These include smallholder crop cultivation, tourism and promotion of small-and medium enterprises. Even with success in agriculture, tourism and SME development, many people will remain economically marginalised - pointing to the need for a safety-net adequate to protect the vulnerable. Labour-intensive public works is a vehicle for expanding employment, stabilizing incomes during periods of drought, and building infrastructure (especially gravel-based rural roads) in the countryside. It is envisaged that inland fisheries will increase, providing significant opportunity for poverty alleviation, employment and food security in rural areas. Also, community-based management structures will facilitate the sustainable exploitation of inland aquatic resources in the communities that traditionally utilise such resources. Financial assistance, in the form of grant transfers, is an important component to Namibia’s national safety-net that prevents the most needy from falling further ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 104 into poverty and deprivation. It is a direct support measure that Government deals with in a sympathetic and judicious manner. The level of economic development has been encouraging enough to continue with social pension payouts. However, the issue of the level of coverage and entitlement remains as well as the level of social protection resources available to finance it. Social pension schemes in Namibia have evolved over a considerable period of time and with that, the ability to adjust the administration of this scheme, which has lent both credibility and viability to the scheme in terms of the extension of coverage and the inclusion of vulnerable groups. The National Pension scheme is based on flat rate universal, non-contributory and non-taxable grant-transfers, regardless of other income, for rich and poor alike. This scheme presently includes grants for old age, disability, child maintenance and foster parent care. Government is presently reforming its Pension Schemes. The Basic State Grant Bill (Act of 2000) is in the processes of being promulgated by Parliament. It will repeal the National Pensions Act of 1992 and will provide the legal mechanism for all grant-based transfer programmes, including non-contributory old age pensions, to be combined in one. In addition, the Basic State Grant Programme is bound to introduce a simple means tested approach, which will exclude non-poor pensioners from the purview of the scheme. In order to provide an integrated approach to poverty-reduction, Government developed a Poverty Reduction Strategy for Namibia, in December 1998, focusing on three major areas of concern: • How to foster more equitable and efficient delivery of public services; • How to accelerate equitable agricultural expansion; and • Options for non-agricultural economic empowerment such as informal and self-employment initiatives. Following the adoption of Poverty reduction strategies, the National Poverty Reduction Action Programme was approved with the objective to identify programmes, projects and services which would focus on poverty-reduction during the NDP2 cycle. Namibia’s needs are large and, as with all countries, its public resources are limited. Consequently, a vital step in achieving effective governance and poverty reduction is to focus these scarce resources on areas of highest collective priorities. Sub-Vision Poverty is reduced to the minimum, the existing pattern of income-distribution is equitable and disparity is at the minimum. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 105 Poverty reduction Things to do • Ensure there is equitable distribution of income. • Ensure all people enjoy equitable access to services and resources, with limitations and barriers removed. • Ensure regional parity. • Ensure sustained economic growth and intensification of employment creation. • Reduce HIV/AIDS infection Where we want to be (2030) • Opportunities for equitable economic growth, local economic development and employment creation available throughout Namibia. • Minimum standards ensure equitable access to services. • Income is equally redistributed. • Access to safe water by all. • Access to adequate housing. • A Gini coefficient of 0.3 achieved. Current situation • Namibia is one of the most unequal societies in the world. • Inequality and poverty endangers social harmony, peace and democracy. • Legacies of the apartheid era keep on haunting the country. • Poverty Reduction Strategy for Namibia has been developed; and its implementation is being guided by the National Poverty Reduction Action Programme. Things to avoid • Designing and implementing separate development programmes for the poor instead of mainstreaming existing and planned development. • Not implementing the Poverty Reduction Action Programme. Worst-case scenario • Poverty increases in-spite of economic growth. • The gap between the rich and the poor widens. • Majority of the population lives below the poverty line. Selected Poverty Reduction Targets Access to Water Progress regarding water supply coverage has been made since Independence, and the targets for 2007 and 2010 seem reasonable, based on current progress. If the implementation continues at the current rate with steady financial and human resources backing the programme, it is predicted that 100 percent coverage for both urban and rural areas can be reached by the year 2030. The milestones are shown below. Water • Increase water provision from 75% (2000) of the rural population to 80% by 2006; 85% by 2010; 90% by 2015; 95% by 2020; and to cover 100% of the rural population by 2030. • Maintain the current levels of access (95%) to potable water in urban areas till 2006; and achieve 100% coverage by 2010. • Ensure that 50% of all water supplied achieves full cost recovery by 2006; increasing to 60% by 2010; 70% by 2015; 80% by 2020; 90% by 2025; and to 100% by 2030. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 106 • Decentralise 95% of regional rural water supply resources to the regional councils by 2006; and 100% by 2010. • Implement gender policy with respect to the water sector by 2006. Sanitation Figure 4.13 depicts the trends in sanitation coverage for urban areas, for rural areas and nationally (e.g. total). For urban areas, during the first few years after Independence, urban sanitation services were considered “generally good with an estimated coverage ranging from 95 percent in municipalities to about 60 percent in communal towns” (DWA 1993). However, the WASP Committee was concerned about the magnitude of the backlog, especially in light of increased urbanisation and the corresponding high population density, which is conducive to the transmission of infectious diseases. Regarding rural areas, while the number of human waste disposal facilities has expanded since Independence, the majority of rural Namibians continue to rely on the bush for human waste disposal. As can be seen in Figure 4, availability and access to toilets in rural areas is far below the population coverage for urban areas. It should also be noted that, based on the trend to date, the target of 60 percent coverage in rural areas by 2006 seems to be overly optimistic. Figure 4.13: Percentage of Population with Acceptable Sanitation Facilities (Urban, Rural and Nationally) Housing Figure 4.14, using an estimate of 1,500 houses being built each year and assuming a backlog of 37,000 houses by projecting in five year intervals to the year 2030, indicates that Namibia might be able to meet its housing needs by the year 2025. This is based on the assumption that the country can keep up with any increased urbanisation and population growth rates. However, using a backlog figure of 80,000 houses, Namibia would have provided only for just over half of the population’s housing needs by the year 2030, if it builds 1,500 houses each year. If 3,000 houses are built each year, the housing needs might be met by the year 2020. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 107 Selected Housing Sector Targets: • Access to adequate shelter for 60% of the low-income population by 2006 • Build 9,590 houses until 2006 under the decentralised BTP • Put in place operational revolving credit funds with all local authorities and regional councils by 2005 • NHE to construct 7,937 houses at a value of N$419million • NHE to develop 3,371 plots at an estimated cost of N$143million • Land is secured and improved for 3000 households in urban areas • 1,000 affordable houses are constructed by 2006 Selected Targets for the Social Welfare Sector: • Achieve full social integration for 10,000 people with disabilities by 2006 • Develop a legal framework for policy monitoring and evaluation by 2006 • By 2006 establish the National Council on Disability • Develop and implement plans that meet the needs of people with disabilities in at least six of the Regional Councils by 2006 Objectives • To minimise disparity in the distribution of income. • To ensure that all Namibians earn a decent income that affords them a life well above the poverty line. Strategies • Ensuring that there is equitable distribution of income. • Ensuring that all people enjoy equitable access to services and resources with limitations and barriers removed. • Ensuring that economic opportunities match the needs, and an effective system is in place to balance off any regional disparity. • Implementing HIV/AIDS reduction strategies. • Harmonizing, internalizing and institutionalizing all Government policies and legislation, regionally, according to the needs of the region, and implemented Figure 4.14: Housing Coverage 1990 to 2030 Based on Three Projections for Construction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 108 through comprehensive and well co-ordinated sectoral, cross sectoral, regional and community level projects and programmes. • Implementing the millennium development goals in the country. • Creating public awareness about available services and ensure the broadest level of information dissemination through a range of innovative activities, including Braille media, vernacular language, sign language interpretation, and the active involvement of traditional authorities, churches and civil society. • Building capacity to deliver services and ensure networking and support from the private sector to exchange experiences at community and group levels. • Reviewing and adjusting re-distributive opportunities from central levels and ensuring prudent public targeted expenditures, particularly education and health, and retaining high levels of commitment to social services as well as ensuring quality outputs. To do this, ongoing impact analysis and outcomes measurement become crucial activities. • Creating minimum standards for service-delivery. • Making resources and opportunities available and accessible to all interested and well-intended stakeholders, to support national development programmes which seek to address regional poverty. • Ensuring sustained economic growth and intensification of employment creation opportunities. 4.4.2 Gender and Development Gender refers to all socially given attributes, roles and activities assigned to men and women because of their sex (being male or female). There are strong indications of inequality in relationships between men and women in terms of the conditions and positioning. For example, women are still underrepresented in male dominated professions such as economics and science, where they constitute only 35% to 29% respectively. The area where major differences are seen between men and women is in access to opportunities/resources and decision-making. Women’s participation in the labour force is lower than that for men, 49% to 60%. Variations also occur when a comparison is drawn between subsistence and wage employment, 44% of female headed households depend on subsistence agriculture and only 28% make a living from wage employment. More than 50% of men depend on wage labour and only 29% from subsistence farming. The colonial era strengthened women’s traditional subordination. The migrant labour structure forced women to take over the tasks of men in the subsistence agriculture areas and to raise their children alone. During drought years, the women were dependent on remittances from male family members, which deepened traditional patriarchal domination. Deteriorating conditions in rural areas forced many women to migrate to urban areas to look for work, but more than 60 percent ended up as low paid domestic servants. Before Independence, women were poorly represented in all positions of influence. Only two women occupied senior positions in the civil service. No women were school principals, inspectors or heads of departments. Girls were underrepresented in science and economic studies and were mainly being trained to be nurses or teachers. The following are still strongly present in the Namibian society:  A large percentage of Namibia’s households are female-headed. Female ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 109 households are often worse off than male-headed households. Opportunities for employment are limited and the women juggle many different burdens at the same time, and this will intensify with the spread of HIV/AIDS. • Regional disparities still exist in enrolment of girls in schools. • The high number of rapes that occur in Namibia each year reflects the past and current unbalanced situation between men and women. In addition to the direct physical and psychological damage done to the rape victims, the threat of rape makes many women live in fear and often restricts their movement and activities. • Gender-based Affirmative Action in employment has largely focused on the educated middle class. • In addition to Affirmative Action issues, women have made gains in other areas related to labour and employment. The Labour Act has for the first time included labour legislation relations in the domestic and agricultural sectors, allowing domestic workers and farm workers some access to the judicial arm of the state. “Unlike reforming labour legislation, the practical aspects of enforcing these laws will not be easy.” The domestic work sector happens to be one of the most vulnerable sectors in the Namibian labour market. • In 1996, there were an estimated 24,000 domestic workers; about 10% of all employed women work as domestic workers, and one in every 20 women over the age of 15, is a domestic worker. • In recent years the focus on empowerment of women in society has been to promote women to positions in public office. Although important, this will not resolve fundamental issues affecting women. • Legally binding quotas for women on party lists have also enhanced participation of women at local government levels, but participation of women remains weak at regional and national elections. • Many long-awaited laws that affect women have not yet been finalised, including laws on child maintenance, inheritance, the recognition of customary marriages and divorce. There is a solid network of various NGOs working on the issues, and government, with the creation of the Ministry of Women Affairs and Child Welfare, has shown how seriously it takes the strengthening of the role of women in Namibian society. Sub-Vision Namibia is a just, moral, tolerant and safe society, with legislative, economic and social structures in place that eliminate marginalisation and ensure peace and equity between women and men, the diverse ethnic groups, and people of different interests. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 110 Gender and Development Things to do • Ensure there is equitable access to social services and facilities, including education and health. • Ensure women and men enjoy equitable access to services and resources with limitations and barriers removed. • Implement Gender and related policies. • Discourage domestic violence. • Reduce HIV/AIDS infection. Where we want to be (2030) • Women occupy important roles and perform essential functions in society. • Opportunities for equitable social and economic development and employment creation available for men and women throughout Namibia. • Minimum standards ensure equitable access of men and women to services. • Women and men are well represented in the work place at all levels, and in decision making positions, including the political arena.Current situation • The Ministry of Women Affairs and Child Welfare is created to address gender imbalance in Namibian society. • Opportunities for employment opportunities are limited for women. • Regional disparities still exist in enrolment of girls in schools. • The high incidence of rapes occur in Namibia each year. • Many long-awaited laws that affect women have not yet been finalised. Things to avoid • Affirmatively addressing women involvement outside the framework of broader gender policies and strategies. • Allowing tradition to limit opportunities for women. Worst-case scenario • Domestic violence is ignored. • Policies designed to enhance the status of women are not implemented. • Discrimination based on gender is prevalent in the society. • Girls are discouraged from participating fully in the educational programme. Objective To mainstream gender in development, to ensure that women and men are equally heard, and given equal opportunities to exercise their skills and abilities in all aspects of life. Strategies • Establishing participatory and gender-responsive monitoring and evaluation mechanisms; • Involving the traditional authorities in gender sensitisation programmes with emphasis on family and inheritance. • Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS in gender development strategies. • Addressing, clarifying and harmonizing the misconceptions on gender and review and recommend language and nomenclature (terminology) adjustments to organizations responsible for ensuring that gender is properly mainstreamed. • Intensifying the implementation of the existing Gender-and related policies, programmes and legislations. • Undertaking proper gender studies to provide accurate information on men and women. • Building capacity of researchers, trainers and planners in participatory and gender responsive methods for data collection, analysis, interpretation and planning. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 111 4.4.3 Youth and Development The 2001 census report shows that children and young people aged 30 years and below constitute 70% of the total population of the country. About 51% of the youth population of about 1.3 million are females, and 71% of the total rural and 64% of the urban population are young people. Investing in people, in their education and health and in creating opportunities for them have been the main development aims of Government after Independence. More than 20% of the annual budget has been allocated for education. Enrolment rates in primary education has risen to over 95%, but the quality of education and attainment of primary education remain serious challenges. High numbers of dropouts from school, before Grade 7, may nullify the high investments and propel young people back into the situation of illiteracy. Young people in Namibia are both a major human resource for development and key agents for social change, economic development and technological innovation. Developing the capacity of the youth to participate in their own development and national development, will not only have a major positive impact on short-term social and economic conditions, but also on the well-being and livelihood of future generations. However, youth are often perceived as not yet being productive or contributing members to society, and are sometimes overlooked. Namibian youth are also growing up in a environment that includes a variety of harsh realities, such as: inequality and poverty impacting on almost half of Namibia’s households, food insecurity and poor nutrition for many households, alcoholism, drug abuse, various health and social problems associated with HIV/ AIDS and teenage pregnancies, crime and violence, physical and emotional abuse, high rates of school drop-outs, high unemployment levels, low wages, lack of or insufficient expertise and capital required to undertake entrepreneurial initiatives, lack of or inequitable access to information and recreational activities and increasingly dysfunctional family life. All of this, coupled with the detrimental impact of HIV/AIDS, contribute towards an unhealthy environment for the youth of today and poor prospects for the future. The situation for rural youth in particular is exacerbated by a harsher environment, with fewer resources and more problematic access to important development interventions, relevant training and information. Rural areas are characterised by extremely low farm productivity, limited potential for income-generating activities and self-employment, a high degree of poverty, household food insecurity and poor nutritional status. The response of many rural youth is to leave the rural area for the towns and cities with the hope of obtaining a job and a brighter future. Teenagers demonstrate a high level of negative health-related behaviours. Women are generally infected with HIV/AIDS at an earlier stage than boys. Besides the high rates of HIV transmission, teenagers will continue to be affected by other negative health behaviour patterns, including high pregnancy rates, alcohol and drug abuse. Of all the problems facing young people, unemployment is one of the most critical issues. The situation in Namibia for youth unemployment mirrors a global situation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 112 Of the total 185,258 unemployed persons in Namibia (2001 census) 59% are in the youth age group. The combined unemployment and under-employment rate amongst the youth is even higher. Similar to the total labour force, unemployment rates are higher for young women than for young men. In contrast to the general labour force population, the youth in urban areas have higher rates of unemployment than for those in rural areas. This suggests that most of the youth who are actively seeking jobs, are looking for work in urban areas. Unemployment is a significant macro-economic problem for Namibia, but unemployment amongst the youth deprives young people of the opportunity to participate fully in national development. Needless to say, such disenfranchisement of youth can have serious consequences for Namibian society. Violence, crime and substance abuse are related to youth unemployment, and this situation demands an all-out effort to create jobs through policy-making and programmes. When not in school or in employment, it is important for the youth to be engaged in useful, worthwhile activities that provide them with the opportunity to learn lifeskills and to interact in a positive manner with their age mates. The various secondary schools in urban areas are also usually better equipped to cater for the physical recreation, sport and leisure requirements of the youth through various after-school and week-end programmes. However, for the youth of a lower-income class, access to many of these recreational activities is limited because they are too costly. The Multi-Purpose Youth Resource Centres, which provide recreational, sport and cultural facilities and venues to young people at six sites around the country, target the out-of-school and unemployed youth. One of the five priority areas of action of the National Youth Policy focuses on environment and agriculture, especially environmental degradation as a result of deforestation, desertification, and soil erosion. Young people have a responsibility to be actively involved in the protection and conservation of the natural resources of Namibia. There are a number of existing programmes for youths and further opportunities that can be accessed by youths in the areas of agriculture and the environment. Some of these specific programmes, and others within government, NGOs and the private sector, have been designed to provide urban and rural youth with training to enhance their preparedness for formal employment or to generate their own income through self-employment. Others aim to provide an experimental learning environment to enhance the youth’s self-esteem, self-confidence, self discipline, sense of responsibility, ability to identify, analyse and help solve problems, and to encourage a commitment to the country’s development. The youth’s ideas on democracy and politics allows one to predict the political future of the country. The opinions they form at present will impact on this generation of opinion-makers and voters as they grow older and assume their positions in the economy and political system. The youth are often perceived as being more progressive than the rest of the society. Higher literacy rates and exposure to modern education also mean that today’s youth will be able to access and digest more information and will be better informed about public authorities and policy choices. Students, in particular, are important because they are best equipped to articulate current policy shortcomings and shape the demands of the youth. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 113 Some of the youth have special needs including those in conflict with the law and youth living out on the streets. The most common crimes committed by juveniles are shoplifting, housebreaking, theft, and assault with grievous bodily harm. About 4,500 youth between the ages of 15-30 years were in prison in 1998. An average of 375 juveniles were in prison each year during the period 1995-1997. Ninety three of all incarcerated juveniles did not have the benefit of legal representation at their hearings, juvenile prisoners had daily contact with adult prisoners, and 33 percent reported incidents of personal abuse by adult prisoners. The Juvenile Justice Programme and Forums were established to ensure juvenile offenders’ rights are not denied and to seek alternatives to incarceration. Through the Juvenile Justice Forums, the circumstance of juvenile offenders have improved. It is a harsh reality that many children may grow up marginalised economically and emotionally. The fact that more than half of all children today are disadvantaged by families that are, to one extent or an other suffering from some form of dysfunction, will have a negative impact on Namibian society by the year 2030 unless major changes are made. The hardship that many young Namibian children experience during their early years, especially in the most disadvantaged communities, will impact on their emotional, physical-and social development. This could have serious economic and psychological effects on their adult lives. Should the trend of children growing up without one or both parents continue, and with less support from their extended families, it will have a negative impact on the future generations of this country. Most grandparents are not in a position to provide the required stimulation, guidance and financial care for these children. If fathers and mothers do not contribute financially to the upbringing of their children, more children will have problems attending school and obtaining access to health care and other basic services. Sub-Vision Namibia will be a just, moral, tolerant and safe society with legislative, economic and social structures in place to eliminate marginalisation and ensure peace and equity and a conducive environment for child and youth development. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 114 Youth and Development Things to do • Provide adequate opportunities for education and training. • Encourage parents to train their children and send them to school. • Encourage the spirit of voluntarism among young people. • Create adequate opportunities for the employment of youth. • Provide recreational facilities. • Reduce HIV/AIDS infection Where we want to be (2030) • Young people play important roles and perform essential functions in society. • The spirit of voluntarism is active among young people. • Investments into education and health bear fruits by providing young people with diverse opportunities. • Young people of Namibia are educated, skilled, motivated, confident, assiduous, responsible and healthy. • The youth are empowered and given ample opportunity to play an active role in shaping a better society. Current situation • Children aged below 15 years make up close to 40% of the total population. • About 70% of the total population are aged 30 years and below, 51% are females. • Over 71% of the rural and about 64% of the urban population are young persons. • High drop-out rates among children in schools. • Young people are vulnerable and often marginalised. • High youth unemployment is a problem. • Teenagers demonstrate a high level of negative health-related behaviours Things to avoid • Neglect the education and training of children. • Marginalisation of youth. • Discourage children from participating fully in the educational programme. • Neglect the creation of employment opportunities for youth. Worst-case scenario • Child abuse is ignored. • Policies designed to promote the development of youth are not implemented. • Discrimination based on age is prevalent in the society, and the youth are marginalised. • Youth are not provided information on healthy lifestyles. Selected Youth and Sports Sector Targets • Reach 90% of youth with correct sexual and reproductive health information for protection from HIV/AIDS by 2005 • Ensure that 90% of young people have the opportunity to acquire appropriate skills for HIV prevention by 2005 ••••• Ensure that 90% of young people have free and convenient access to quality condoms ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 115 • Reduce the number of youth offenders by 10% by 2005 • Reduce the number of youth repeat-offenders by 20%, by 2005 • Reduce the number of substance use/abuse related cases by 40% by 2004 • Provide basic sport facilities in all 13 regions by 2006 • Win at least four gold medals in international competitions yearly in the sport codes boxing, cycling, swimming and marathon, and medals in other codes, from 2004 • Win at least three gold medals at the Olympic Summers Games 2004 Objectives • To ensure that all young men and women in Namibia are given opportunities for development through education and training, and motivated to take up entrepreneurial opportunities and are well equipped with skills, abilities and attitudes • To ensure that children remain disciplined and have an inalienable right to survival, development, protection and participation in the development of society. Strategies • All children under the age of six years are given opportunities for early childhood development in addition to the care of communities and individuals; • Young men and women are motivated and supported to take up entrepreneurial opportunities and are well equipped with skills, abilities and attitudes; • Ensuring provision of available, accessible, quality child-care for all families who require it and provide plenty of recreational areas and opportunities for children. • Providing level of government funding for child care similar to that for public schools; • Ensuring provision of adequate salaries for child-care workers. • Implementing appropriate HIV/AIDS reduction policies and programmes for the youth; • Ensuring provision of adequate supervision for all young children such as after school-care, tutors, summer programs, cultural, and social experiences. • Safeguarding children in early care and education programs from harm and promote their learning and development; eliminate unsafe, substandard day care. • Promoting responsible parenthood by expanding proven approaches (provide solid information and support to parents, as well as more intensive assistance when needed); • Enabling communities to have the flexibility and the resources (funding) they need to mobilise, on behalf of young children and their families, responsible behaviour; • Private sector engages itself more actively in youth development through apprenticeship, exposure and job attachment; and • Strengthen and expand existing youth development initiatives. • Providing opportunities for senor citizens to act as mentors and use their experiences and skills outside the family system. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 116 4.4.4 Senior Citizens Traditionally in most Namibian communities it is expected that the nuclear or extended family would take care of their elderly. In situations where the ‘middle generation’ is away earning in urban areas, or dead as a result of AIDS, this structure might collapse and the elderly would then be left with young children, particularly in rural areas. The increasing deaths owing to AIDS and changes in cultural traditions, will also increase the need for more Government expenditure on pensions and health-care. Only 120,000 out of some 500,000 economically active Namibians are covered by formal contributory pension schemes, such as the Government Institutions Pension Fund (GIPF) and about 400 existing private pension funds. Currently, only about 7% of the population is 60 years of age and over. The World Bank estimates that this ratio is expected to grow to about 21% over the next few decades. Consequently, the old age dependency ratio is expected to rise from about 11% to 36%. Existing pension arrangements are not well suited to meet the challenges of an ageing population. The non-contributory National Pensions Scheme, which is non-taxable and which was established in 1992 by the National Pensions Act, currently provides (in the old age category) N$ 250 to 96,767 pensioners, whereas the other contributory schemes provide pensions for some 15,000 retirees, generally on very generous terms, but these pensions are taxable. Presently, the SSC, which was established in 1995 under the Social Security Act of 1994, does not provide for old age pensions, but has established the goal of setting up a National Pensions Plan, as reflected in the Draft Social Security Act of 1999. Sub-Vision The elderly citizens are acknowledged and well esteemed for their past contributions to the development of our country, and in their old age they are well cared for and remain happy senior citizens in a safe and loving environment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 117 SENIOR CITIZENS Things to do • Meeting the objective of ensuring quality services is made possible by increased funding for social services and human resource development. • Enhance support for the elderly. • Increase pension payment to ensure good quality of life for the elderly. Where we want to be (2030) • The elderly are treated with dignity. • Legislative, economic and social structures are in place to eliminate marginalisation. • Peace and equity between people of different ages prevail. • The elderly are given their due honour and respect. Current situation • The elderly (60 years of age and above) make up 7% of the total population, and their share is not likely to increase sig nificantly during the Vision period, ow ing to the impact of AIDS. • Old people are paid a monthly pension, for their sustenance. • The elderly are vulnerable and often marginalised. Things to avoid • Treating the elderly as welfare cases. Worst-case scenario • Marginalisation of the elderly. • Families remove social support for the their elderly. • Society has no place for old people. • Old people are left to take care of themselves. Objectives • Ensuring that all people in Namibia enjoy a safe environment (to a great extent free from violence and crime), share and care for those in need, and are prepared to face and respond to any man-made and or natural calamities. • Ensuring that Namibia is a country where all citizens, policy makers and planners are aware of and sympathetic towards the vulnerability of everybody, and that is able to make a valuable contribution. • Ensuring that the social security system in Namibia provides the greatest coverage of integrated contributory and non-contributory schemes. Strategies • Caring for the elderly. • Providing adequately for the various needs of our senior citizens. 4.4.5 People With Disabilities The 2001 population census report shows that the number of people with disabilities in Namibia is around 85,567 or 4.7% of the total population, almost equally distributed between males and females, but higher in the rural than urban areas (see Figure 4.15). People with disabilities are found in the following categories: 37.6% have hand or leg impairment; 35% are blind; 21.4% are deaf; 11.4% have speech impairment; 5.6% who have mental disability. While categories of disability do not appear to vary significantly across males and females, 51.3% of all people living with disability are females. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 118 Poverty and disabilities often go hand in hand, and high health costs compound the problems of the disabled. The people with disability are disproportionately represented amongst the poor. They are more highly represented amongst unpaid family workers and the self-employed, with most having low incomes, and are under-represented amongst the private and public sectors. Almost 70% of this population group earn their living from agriculture. It is assumed that those with disabilities have higher levels of unemployment. As shown in Figure 4.16, Omusati, Kavango and Ohangwena have the largest concentration of people with disabilities, representing 6.4%, 5.5% and 5.5% of their population respectively. Figure 4.15: Disabled Population by Area and Sex (2001) Figure 4.16: Population with Disability by Region and Sex (2001) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 119 People with disability are often prevented from using public services and attending public functions, because the design of and facilities in buildings prevent disabled people from participating e.g. no wheel chair access. A lack of awareness among the public about disability results in discrimination and isolation of people with mental and physical limitations. Children who are deaf, blind or have other physical and mental handicaps are often not sent to school, because people incorrectly think they cannot learn. Many teachers are not trained to assist these children. State social pensions are available to disabled persons aged 16 and older who have been medically certified as unable to work. In 1990, 5,500 disabled persons aged 16 years and older received such pensions. By 1997, this figure nearly doubled with 11,114 people receiving this grant. The Labour Act prohibits discrimination, harassment or dismissal on the basis of disability. In addition, the Affirmative Action Act includes disabled persons as one of the three categories for affirmative action. Sub-Vision Namibia is a caring state and society, which pays particular attention to vulnerable people and groups, who are unable to utilise capabilities, care for themselves or get assistance from family networks. People with Disabilities Things to do • Meeting the objective of ensuring quality services is made possible by increased funding for social services and human resource development. • Enhance support for those living with disability. • Improve social security payment to ensure good quality of life for those living with disability. Where we want to be (2030) • People living with disability are treated with dignity and given their due honour and respect. • Legislative, economic and social structures are in place, to eliminate marginalisation. • People living with disability are given the necessary assistance to enable them to participate effectively in education and employment opportunities. Current situation: • Disability conditions seem to be positively correlated with age, more and more people get afflicted as they grow older. • The prortion of people with disability in the population has grown. • Majority of people with disability live in rural areas. • The five major disability conditions with the population are: blindness, deafness, impairment of speech, limb impairment, and mental disability. • State social pensions are available to certified persons with disability, aged 16 years and over. • More men than women suffer from speech and limp impairment and mental disability; but more women than men are deaf and blind. Things to avoid • Treating those living with disability as welfare cases. Worst-case scenario • Marginalisation of those living with disability. • Families withdraw social support for their disabled relatives. • Society has no place for people with disability. • No special provision for those liv ing with disability. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 120 Objective To ensure that people living with disabilities are well integrated into the mainstream of the Namibian society. Strategies • Review the policy and ministerial framework concerning people living with disabilities, and ensure that budgetary allocations are responsive to the special needs of people living with disabilities. • Reforming and improving the social security system to ensure adequate coverage. • Enhancing the recognition of the rights of people living with disabilities through improved and expanded training and support programmes. • Using Affirmative Action initiatives to lead people living with disabilities to being fairly represented in the work place at all levels. • Providing funding and resources for training and support programmes for those living with disabilities. 4.4.6 Fostering and Orphanage The 2001 census figures show that 87,587 children aged 0-14 years have one one surviving parent, or 12% of all children in this age group. Slightly over 1% of all children in this age category are orphaned. The growing number of orphans due to AIDS, is a real problem. The number of AIDS orphans in Namibia has grown astronomically since 1995, when a few thousand children were orphaned, to about 35,000 in 2001. This figure will go as high as 190,000 by the year 2021. More than 20% of Namibia’s children live in poverty. Looking after children of relatives was common in earlier years. There was usually an ‘ebb and flow’ of children and resources, with child caregivers relying on the family members who were engaged in wage employment. Important family relations and co-dependencies have been disrupted because of HIV/AIDS, and the resulting orphans. Support networks within the community and extended family are still relatively intact with traditional life style and values so that extended families are able to absorb orphans. However, with the number of adult deaths escalating, the care of orphans will soon require additional family capacity. Children who have lost parents qualify for maintenance and foster parent grants. The coverage in this grant (in contrast to the old age category) is very low. Sub-Vision Families are available and willing to accommodate orphans and are being assisted, when necessary, by the government/community through a well managed public orphanage programme, in which such disadvantaged children are supported to live a meaningful life that prepares them adequately for the future. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 121 Fostering and Orphanage Things to do • Meeting the objective of ensuring quality services is made possible by increased funding for social services and human resource development. • Enhance support for disadvantaged children and orphans. • Improve social security payment to families of orphans to ensure quality of life for orphans. Where we want to be (2030) • Individuals, the community and civic organisations share in the provision of social services and safety-nets. • Contributory and non-contributory social security systems combined to achieve the highest possible coverage. • Care for orphans is well coordinated as a social support programme throughout the country. Current situation • The number of AIDS orphans in Namibia has grown astronomically since 1995. • Recent figures show that 87,587 children aged 0-14 years who have one surviving parent, or 12% of all children in this age group. Slightly over 1% of all children in this age category are orphans. • The growing number of orphans due to AIDS is a real problem. • The number has grown from 35,000 in 2001 to 190,000 by the year 2021. • Support networks within the community and extended family are able to absorb orphans. • With the number of adult deaths escalating, the care of orphans will soon surpass family capacity. • Children who have lost parents qualify for maintenance and foster-parent grants, but coverage is very low. • More than 20% of Namibia’s children live in poverty. Worst-case scenario • Disadvantaged children are not given special assistance. • The growing challenge of HIV/ AIDS inhibits the grant-based transfer programmes. • Orphans are left on their own. Things to avoid • The state is not able to afford grant based transfer programmes. Objective To provide opportunities to disadvantaged children, including orphans, which will prepare them for, and make them live, a meaningful and happy life. Strategies • Ensuring that the needs of vulnerable groups are built into development planning at all levels. • Establishing and funding centres for orphans and vulnerable children. • Applying means tested approaches to all social grants. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 122 • Reviewing, adjusting and providing social safety-nets. • Informing families and the community about the requirements for getting financial assistance as provided for under the Child Protection Act. • Building and supporting an adequate number of orphanage rehabilitation centres in the communities. • Designing and implementing a national orphanage policy and programme. • Providing necessary support to orphans and other disadvantaged children. • Ensuring that all necessary documents for processing of social grants are made available to guardians. • Facilitating the process of adoption and fostering. • Formulating and implementing appropriate policies and legislation in favour of orphans and children from outside marriage. 4.4.7 Culture and Tradition Culture is defined as the shared products of human group or society. These shared products include values, language, knowledge and material objects. Culture is not static and thus changes are both necessary and inevitable. The natural and social environments constantly change, and so must the relationship of any human society to them. Cultural change can be set in motion by developments within a culture or by the influence of foreign cultures. The colonial and apartheid systems were based on racial discrimination. After Independence, most Namibians have embraced the policy of reconciliation and for many, attitudes are changing. There is a trend towards recognising the strength of diversity, the chance to identify and apply indigenous approaches to challenges facing the nation. In the last decade there has been a re-awakening of cultures and traditions, strongly supported by government policy. Generally, the various mix of cultures in Namibia is now considered as an asset to the country and should no longer be the cause of discrimination or harassment. Before Independence, language was another aspect of Namibia’s culture that was used as a basis for people to be marginalised. By then, African mother-tongue languages were the most widely spoken, but Afrikaans was the official language of the colonial administration. Afrikaans was also the language of instruction in most schools. After Independence the new Constitution adopted English as the official language of Namibia, without trying to diminish in status other Namibian languages. The 2001 population census included a question on language usually spoken or most often spoken at home (as opposed to languages in which people are literate). The results show that Oshiwambo is the most frequently spoken language at home in the country, with 49% of the households communicating in it. As illustrated in Figure 4.17, this is followed by Nama/Damara 11.5%; Afrikaans 11.4%; Kavango 9.7%; Otjiherero 7.9%; Caprivi 5>0%; English 1.9%; San 1.2%; German 1.1%; Tswana 0.3%; other European 0.5%; other African 0.4%. Outside of the formal education system, other language problems persist which create marginalisation. Access to information can be greatly reduced if one does not speak one of the major languages of this country. Problems based on language ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 123 differences will gradually be solved as more people receive language and literacy training, and as more people gain experience in using English in every day life. There is freedom of religious association and everyone, irrespective of religious inclination, subscribes to the moral principles of self respect, respect for others, honour to whom honour is due, and the importance of human dignity. Although Namibia remains a secular society, in accordance with the Constitution, Christianity is the most popular religion, and it holds promise for the moral upbringing of our children, and shapes the moral basis of our interpersonal dynamics, harmony and peaceful co-existence. Above all, the fear of God guides decision-making in Namibia, and provides the driving force for the maintenance of a just and morally upright society. Sub-Vision People and society are tolerant and supportive of a diversity of religious beliefs, cultures and ethnicity, and work to optimise the strengths of diversity. Figure 4.17: Households by Main Language Spoken (2001) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 124 Culture and Tradition Things to do • Promote racial and ethnic harmony. • We must be tolerant of other people’s culture. • Implement Affirmative Action. • The Church and other civil society institutions must actively contribute to the upholding of morality in our society. Where we want to be (2030) • A shared vision amongst all communities and the ability to live in harmony. • High moral values shared and upheld by all. • Ability to learn from each other and embrace solutions of vernacular societies. • All forms of marginalisation removed. • All spoken Namibian languages are written. Current situation • Varied understanding of the concept of ‘national reconciliation’. • Low confidence in the strength of diversity, resourcefulness and resilience of vernacular societies. • Freedom of expression of beliefs, including religion, and cultural practices. • Oshiwambo is the most frequently spoken language at home, in the country, with 49% of the households communicating in it. This is followed by Nama/Damara 11.5%; Afrikaans 11.4%; Kavango 9.7%; Otjiherero 7.9%; Caprivi 5>0%; English 1.9%; San 1.2%; German 1.1%; Tswana 0.3%; other European 0.5%; other African 0.4%. • English is the official language. Things to avoid • Treat marginalised communities and individuals as welfare cases and finance their situations of deprivation and poverty, instead of listening to them and using their strength and ingenuity as a solution to the various challenges. Worst-case scenario • The perpetuation of a situation, where norms are forced onto people in a top-down approach. • Ethnic strife and tribalism occurs. • Further marginalisation of vernacular communities. Objective To achieve a multi-racial community of people living and working together in harmony, and sharing common values and aspirations as a nation, while enjoying the fruits of unity in diversity. Strategies • Building on ethics and moral values that are rooted in the traditional and cultural society; • Building on rich cultural and traditional practices; • Considering effective future roles of traditional authorities; • Promoting, recognizing and celebrating active citizenry and identifying and promoting role models. • Resolving the issues of marginalisation based on racial lines. • Using cultural practices to discourage the spread of HIV/AIDS. • Ensuring that society respects and upholds the rights of every person to enjoy, practice, profess, maintain and promote any culture, language, tradition or religion, in accordance with the Constitution. • Using the Church and other civic organizations to uphold and promote high moral values in the Namibian society. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 125 • Ensuring that the country’s multi-ethnic/multi-racial character is well appreciated by all, and there is a pervasive atmosphere of mutual respect for each other. 4.4.8 Civic Affairs Internal security and stability in the country are ensured by the combined efforts of the Police, the Justice system and Civic Affairs, among others. Civic responsibilities include the management of the national population registers (which entails, among others, registration of births, deaths and marriages, issuing national identification cards, passports and the granting of citizenship); the regulation and control immigration and emigration and; the recognition and control of refugees in Namibia. In addition, civic duties include the provision of professional forensic services with the view to aid the criminal justice system in the country. Registration of vital events Vital registration (the continuous and timely registration of vital events, i.e. births, deaths and marriages), if complete and reliable, offers the best source of data for issuing identity documents and the computation of fertility, mortality and marriage rates in a country or region. The current system of vital registration by the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) is based on the Marriage Act of 1961, as well as the Births, Marriages and Deaths Registration Act of 1963, both as amended by the Marriages, Births and Deaths Amendment Act of 1987. According to a provision of this Act regarding the registration of births, every birth must be registered within fourteen (14) days; however, the practice has been that a birth must be registered within a year of the actual date of birth. Apart from the problem of delayed registration, the process of registration of vital events in general is affected by some administrative and logistical problems, which set a limit on the extent of coverage of all events. Given the vast extent of the country and its dispersed rural population, immense difficulties in registering births, deaths and marriages are encountered, especially among the rural population. The result is that coverage is far from universal; however, better coverage is reported in urban areas. Each of the 13 regions of the country has one civil registration office. Also a problem is the failure to collect identity documents timeously. In 2001, the Regional Offices of MHA was confronted with up to 70,000 uncollected identity documents. The Ministry continues to remind the public about this and related civic responsibilities. International Migration Each person departing form or entering the territory of Namibia is required by law, to complete the Departure Form or the Arrival Form at the port. It is the duty of the officials at the post to return such completed forms to the Ministry of Home Affairs for registration. In spite of the fairly long history of compilation of arrival and departure forms in Namibia, the records have not been used to analyse the volume of immigration ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 126 into and emigration out of Namibia. However, the Central Statistics Office publishes data on arrivals and arriving tourists by purpose and nationality, in its Annual Abstract of Statistics. In addition, questions on ethnic nationality in the censuses provide a basis for estimating the number and characteristics of foreigners in Namibia. The 2001 population census identified 56,923 persons in the country as Non Namibians and, of this number, 43 percent are from Angola, while 39 percent are from other SADC countries, while 12 percent are from European countries. What is not known is how many Namibians are residing permanently in other parts of the world. Between Angola and Namibia there is also a continuing current and counter current of human movements, legal and illegal. This pattern can also be observed to some extent at the borders of all the six neighbouring countries, and need to be closely studied. Refugees Regarding refugee administration, the UNHCR in Namibia is working closely with the Government to monitor the treatment of refugees, and to assist in looking after their welfare. Government established a Camp that can accommodate up to 13,000 refugees at Osire. The Namibian Refugee (Recognition and Control) Act, 1999, Act 2 of 1999 that was enacted by Parliament in 1999, will soon be in force. Sub-Vision All Namibians have national documents, and there is a smooth and efficient regulative and controlling mechanism for refugees and immigrants into Namibia as well as their residence in the country, supported by a well developed criminal justice system. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 127 Civic Affairs Things to do • Create a professionally run police organisation with all the necessary skills in the areas of forensic examination, fingerprint and document examination (fraud). • Strengthen the human and institutional capacity of the agencies managing Civic Affairs, commensurate with the mission. • Intensify efforts to complete the registration of births, deaths and marriages throughout the country. • Remove all obstacles to the issuance of national documents to all citizens. • Enforce legislation to minimise, if not eradicate, illegal immigration into the country. • Computerise all the registration systems, including border posts. • Continue to support and protect refugees/asylum seekers in accordance with the international conventions. Current Situation • Internal security and stability in the country are being ensured by the combined efforts of the Police, the Justice system and Civic Affairs. • Civic duties are being carried out by the MHA, and these include the management of the national population registers (which entails, among others, registration of births, deaths and marriages, issuing national identification cards, passports and the granting of citizenship); the regulation and control persons into Namibia and their residence in the country and their removal as well as the recognition and control of refugees in Namibia. • The provision of professional forensic services is also done by the MHA with a view to aid the criminal justice system in Namibia. • Current level of vital registration is low due to logistical and other problems, and up to 70,000 identity documents are uncollected. • Records of arrivals in and departures from Namibia are also being kept by the MHA and these are analysed by the Central Statistics Office in its Annual Abstract of Statistics. • The 2001 population census identified 56,923 persons in the country as Non-Namibians and, of this number, 43 percent are from Angola, while 39 percent are from other SADC countries • Refugees are being catered for by Government in Osire Camp with the assistance of UNHCR in the country, in accordance with international conventions. Things to avoid • Discourage continuous registration of births, deaths and marriages. • Limit issuance of national documents for certain groups or elements in the population. • Impose barriers on immigration. • Refusal to accommodate refugees/asylum seekers. Where we want to be (2030) • Registration of vital events (births, deaths, marriages) is universal, complete and reliable. • All Namibians have national documents. • The national criminal justice system is well developed. • Regional Registration and Immigration offices have adequate human and institutional capacity and appropriate infrastructure. • Comprehensive national database on civic matters exists and is accessible nationally and regionally within SADC. • Forensic services are available and efficient, aiding the criminal justice system. • Appropriate support is available for all refugees and asylum seekers in the country. • Illegal immigration is reduced to the minimum. Worst-case scenario • Poor coverage of vital registration. • Most nationals have no documents. • Illegal immigration is uncontrolled. • Refugees/asylum seekers are not recognised. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 128 4.4.9 Public Safety Independent Namibia has emerged from a society in which authority and law enforcement agencies were not respected, but rather seen as the enemy. After Independence, Namibia had to instill a new sense of trust in the law maintaining agencies and achieve a degree of co-operation between the community and uniformed members of society. Namibia, today is faced with three serious problems, which endanger peace and harmony in society – that of rape, domestic violence and child abuse. Each year about 600 cases of rape and 150 cases of attempted rape are reported to the Namibian police. Because it is believed that only about one in every 20 rapes that take place are actually reported to the authorities, as many as 15,000 people a year could be victims of rape or attempted rape. Other violence against women and children, such as domestic violence and child Objectives • To provide all Namibians with national documents; • To maintain a well developed criminal justice system in Namibia. • To achieve efficient management of international migration issues; and • To support and protect refugees/asylum seekers, in accordance with the relevant international conventions. Strategies • Improving statistical data for planning and development purposes; • Ensuring full computerisation of civil registration (birth, marriages and death), and the issuance of passports, permits and visas. • Ensuring speedy and efficient provision of national documents; • Ensuring the reduction or cessation of all chances of forgery of national documents; • Completing the late registration of birth process. • Introducing appropriate policies and legislative framework, and ensure the required amendment of legislations. • Improving the institutional framework and harmonise it with the regional and international institutional standards. • Ensuring a well trained and professional personnel with skills to fully render quality services; • Having a central database that is accessible to all Government institutions and other stakeholders, including SADC member countries; • Having all border posts computerised; • Ensuring reasonable and affordable infrastructures (sufficient regional and sub- regional registration and immigration offices, recreational facilities and staff accommodation in regions and especially at border posts, as well as the provision of water); • Determining the need for and establishment of more border posts; • Eradicating the trend of illegal immigrants; • Providing support and protection for refuges/asylum seekers, in accordance with the relevant international conventions; and • Providing professional forensic services to aid the criminal justice system. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 129 abuse, occurs throughout urban and rural areas in Namibia, and cuts across class, race, gender and age. More than 20 percent of all violent crime in Namibia occurs in the form of domestic violence. At least 2,000 cases of domestic violence are reported to the police annually. On average, about 300 cases of child abuse are reported each year. Rape, indecent assault, general assault make up some two thirds of all reported child abuse cases, with rape alone accounting for over half. In response to this situation, the Namibian Police has opened Women and Child Protection Units throughout the country to encourage community members to come forth and report violence, and provide assistance to the victims. Violent crimes such as armed robberies murders, house-breaking and assaults are also prevalent in the country, and these could endanger the current peace and harmony enjoyed today. Similarly, Namibia is faced with the possibility of illegal trafficking and smuggling of small firearms, which require our collective response with regional partners. In dealing with violent crimes, the Namibian Police have established several specialised units, such as the Commercial Crime Unit, Motor Vehicle Theft Unit and Drug Law Enforcement Unit, in order to ensure the prevention and combating of various crimes. The causes of crime are also closely linked with high unemployment rates, particularly amongst young people. Such causes include disrespect for family authority, drug-and alcohol abuse and in general the perception of a bleak future for a high percentage of the Namibian population. The rapid urbanisation witnessed in recent years has led to the wild-fire-effect multiplication of squatter settlements, which has resulted in breeding grounds and hideouts for criminals, thus contributing significantly to the causes of crime. A change in the situation will occur if the current unbalanced situation between men and women in Namibian society, improves. It is also assumed that the current state of violence will soon reach a peak, since more cases are reported and greater publicity is given to what used to be ‘hidden’ forms of violence. The Namibian public should soon become less tolerant, knowing that this type of violence is not part of a ‘normal’ society, and intensify efforts to stop the violence. Sufficient human and financial resources will be committed to counseling and rehabilitation services. Human and financial resources will be committed to a sustained campaign aimed at preventing anomalies and in so doing avert crime. Sub-Vision Namibia provides a socio-cultural environment which marginalises social evils and creates a societ, in which the rule of law and order is respected, and which, to a large extent, is free from violence. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 130 Public Safety Things to do • Build the community to combat crime, in close co-operation with law-enforcement agencies. • Effective enforcement of existing legislation. • Establish effective measures and strategies to meaningfully re-integrate people responsible for and affected by crime, domestic violence, drug-and substance abuse etc. • Introduce tighter legislation to control the abuse of alcohol and drugs, • Promote respect for common public spaces (decency and morality) and discourage littering and urinating in public • Curb the rapid urbanisation being observed – decentralise services and employment opportunities. • Establish effective measures and strategies aimed at the prevention of disorderly and criminal behaviour. • Create and establish a well-coordinated criminal justice and welfare administration cluster . • Form a well-managed criminal justice and welfare administration cluster comprising of MOHSS, MHA, MBESC, MOJ, MOP, MHE, MWACW. Where we want to be (2030) • Citizens’ trust in the ability of uniformed services to provide protection. • High levels of vigilance in the community and co-operation with law-enforcement agencies. • Low levels of crime, violence and abuse. Worst-case scenario • People and communities take the law into their own hands. • An escalation in crime and violence. • Unhindered and accelerated urbanisation. • Little respect for public or common spaces (abuses include littering and indecency. Objective To ensure that people in Namibia enjoy peace and harmony in their relationships, and violence (including homicide, rape, human abuse of all descriptions) is completely eliminated in relationships at home as well as outside, within the community and in the country. Strategies • Institutionalizing local structures to ensure ownership such as traditional courts. • Reviewing implications of all current interventions on violence and how they could be strengthened (e.g. legislative implications on violence and property regime including inheritance). Current situation • Tacit tolerance in the community for what is viewed as ‘petty crimes’. • Cultural norms that may tolerate violent behaviour against women and children. • Little respect for the rule of law and order. Things to avoid • Continue tolerating violence and treat it as part of a normal society. • Heavy-handed practices of law enforcement agencies. • Inconsistency in the enforcement of laws • Corruption among officials ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 131 4.4.10 Civil Society and its Organisations Prior to Independence in 1990 there was little opportunity for civic involvement in Namibia. However, a number of civic organisations, such as churches, trade unions, student movements and women’s organisations were active in promoting development in the country. There are two fundamental features of civil society – that of the family and community system and that of organisations of civil society, in which members of society can become civic actors. Such civic organisations, non-governmental organisations, community-based organisations and civil society organisations have emerged in Namibia in their hundreds during the past decade. They perform functions and roles between the family and the state. There are past and present factors that have shaped the situation of civil society in Namibia. Whilst strong emphasis should be placed on developing forms of civil society that are uniquely Namibian by the way they respond to the social, cultural, and historical systems of Namibia and its many local, ethnic and national characters, there is also much that can be learnt from other countries. This will include the contribution that civic participation makes to certain national goals such as democracy and development. It is believed that this can be achieved through improved and sustained partnership with Government at all levels – local, regional and national. Partnership is poised to create synergy in development efforts, with both partners – Government and civil society playing their distinctive roles. Such a partnership will avoid overlap and duplication, and ensure that scarce resources are spent to achieve the maximum benefit for the beneficiaries. The laws and institutions that promote democracy in any country are only as strong as the way they are used by the citizens. Democracy implies some degree of activity - of participation: in the electoral process, by casting one’s vote, by serving on community development committees, by attending public meetings, or joining a small business organisation, or women’s group, or trade union. It may mean proposing development plans to the local authority, or meeting with teachers at a local school meeting. In most cases, it requires personal or collective initiative. Citizen involvement in community or social organisations increases their potential for political involvement since organisational involvement means social interaction, and social interaction can lead to political activity. Civic culture is, therefore, conducive to a stable democracy because it creates a balance between the power of government elites and the responsiveness of government to the demands of its citizens. There are special benefits that come from involving people in development efforts. It can build community pride, promote ownership and responsibility, teach skills and create learning experiences. It can also mobilise resources that are within communities and promote a stronger social cohesion. Government, immediately after Independence has, through the recognition of the important role that civil society plays in development, included civic organization-involvement in policy development and implementation. There is hardly a policy of Government in which the role of civil society is not mentioned. Government recognises that development has to be bottom-up and include active participation of citizens and their organisation, thus ‘democratising development’. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 132 Things to do • Civic organisations continue to be part and parcel of policy and decision-making and implementation, on issues affecting the nation through the implementation of a Government-Civic Organisations Partnership Policy and Strategy. As part of this strategy, issues of capacity and sustainability of civic organisations need to be addressed. • Identify stakeholder interest and resource commitments to support national development interventions without any discrimination based on gender, race, class, ethnicity and religious affiliation. • Active involvement in the campaign against HIV/AIDS. • Church and other civil society institutions must actively contribute to the upholding of morality in our society. Where we want to be (2030) • Local and vernacular solutions are found to development challenges • High, self-reliant spirit of organised communities • Civic organisations and Government work in partnership. • Civil society organizations, including the Church, are active in promoting a high sense of morality in the society. Current situation • Numerous civil society organizations, but they are poorly coordinated and funded. • Weak civic organizations, and low delivery capacity. • Insufficient involvement of active citizenry Worst-case scenario • Civil society acts in opposition to Government. • Widespread moral decadence. • Intolerance among different groups. Things to avoid • Making communities wait for solutions from outside, and treating them as recipients of development. • Prescribing development solutions in a top down approach. • Discouraging the effective operation of civil society organizations. The Civil Society and Organizations Objective To ensure that Civil Society Organisations are well guided by a comprehensive policy framework, working in close partnership with Government, utilising their enhanced capacities and comparative advantage fully in their advocacy for the people and the promotion of tolerance and morality. Strategies • Networking to resolve pressing development problems in the communities. • Using Civil Society organizations, including the Church, to promote tolerance and high moral values in society. • Promoting effective participation of all key stakeholders by objectively Sub-Vision Civil society, its individuals, groups and organisations are highly resourceful and co-operate with Government and its agencies at local, regional and national level; respect each other and strive to consolidate democratic ideals, and collaborate in social and economic development for the benefit of all. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 133 identifying their institutional profiles for inclusion. • Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS in the development agenda. • Supporting an appropriate policy framework for CSOs operations. 4.4.11 The Family The family is the fundamental unit of society. It is the natural environment for the growth and well-being of all its members and particularly children, and should be afforded the necessary protection and assistance, so that it can fully assume its responsibilities within the community. The report of the 2001 population census shows that on average, women in Namibia gave birth to 4 children, a decline from 6 children in 1991. The report also shows that households were made up of an average of 5 members, mostly headed by males (55%). Families in Namibia are under stress due to several factors, including HIV/AIDS, changing patterns in marriage and divorce, widowhood, inheritance and the relationship between mothers and fathers. Moral degeneration amongst young Namibians is evident especially in towns and cities, as evidenced by high rates of teenage pregnancy, alcohol and drug abuse and indecent assaults. The majority of Namibians are married under customary law, although civil marriages are on the increase. Polygamous marriages are declining in number, while informal relationships and adultery remain common, and are thought to be rising. Given the high number of domestic violence cases in Namibia, improved access to divorce might be necessary. While there will be an increase in civil marriages, many Namibians will still choose to marry under customary law, and others will be in ‘live-in’ relationships or ‘loose partnerships’. The rights of women in these unions will remain insecure because, although customary marriages are socially recognised and informal unions will become more acceptable, neither will be recognised legally. While the ideal family in Namibia has always been that both parents should raise the child, and that the extended family and the community would support them in this regard, this ideal family has deteriorated in many cases. Almost half of all children are raised by someone other than the biological mother. Often this person is not someone who would normally have cared for a child in traditional circumstances (e.g. aunts, wives of uncles, etc.). Non-maintenance from fathers is a serious problem, contributing to poverty in female-headed households and the poor quality of life of many children. Existing methods of obtaining maintenance through the courts are not very effective, and need some changes. Maintenance and inheritance laws will be updated and promulgated to provide the maximum benefits to women and children. These laws will be enforced more diligently than at present. Sub-Vision The family is sacred and well respected, and parents fulfil their responsibilities, while children remain obedient and responsible. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 134 Things to do • Providing children with adequate living standards, including access to health care, rights to education, play and cultural activities from an early age. • Legal provision and assurance of adequate safeguard from harm, and special care for those who are disadvantaged. • Empowerment of children to play an active role in society. • Appropriate laws enforced. • Encourage communication on development issues, including HIV/AIDS. • Campaign strongly and disseminate information against the use and abuse of alcohol and drugs, and teenage pregnancy. • Introduce laws to keep under-aged children and the young persons away from consuming alcohol and drugs. • Encourage foster parenthood. • Discourage teenage pregnancy and child prostitution. Where we want to be (2030) • The family is sacred and upheld as the most fundamental social unit. • Parents (mothers, fathers, guardians) are well aware of and fulfil their parental responsibilities. • Children remain disciplined and have an inalienable right to survival, development, protection and participation in the development of society. Current situation • The family is the fundamental unit of society. The majority of Namibians are married under customary law, although civil marriages are on the increase. • Average number of children born per woman has declined from 6 in 1991 to 4 in 2001. • About 45% of the households are headed by females. • Polygamous marriages are declining in number, while informal relationships and adultery remain common, and are thought to be on the increase. • Almost half of all children are raised by someone other than their biological mother, • With AIDS there will be an increased number of widows, widowers and elderly people supporting their grandchildren. • Many young Namibians (aged 10 - 17) use and abuse alcohol and drugs. • Many young Namibian girls become mothers before their 18th birthday. Things to avoid • Planning without consideration for the family. Worst-case scenario • Parents neglect their parental responsibilities. • Continued alcohol and grug abuse, rising teenage pregnancy, delinquency. The Family ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 135 Objectives To uphold the family as sacred and most fundamental social institution. To ensure that parents (mothers, fathers, guardians) are well aware of and fulfil their parental responsibilities. Strategies • Retaining social involvement of the extended family and community networks in providing support and social safety-nets. • Strengthen and enforce the laws against child abuse. • Educating the public and families on practices that constitute child abuse. • Enforcing the law on the prohibition of child labour. • Ensuring that there are enough social workers in each region to identify cases of child abuse and take the necessary steps to correct the situation. • Discouraging the spread of HIV/AIDS. • Ensuring that children are provided with protection through the institution of marriage. • Developing and implementing programmes to attract street kids to rehabilitation centres. • Ensuring that adoption is understood by all citizens. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 136 5. SUSTAINABLE RESOURCE BASE 5.1 FRESHWATER AND ASSOCIATED RESOURCES Namibia suffers from extreme water scarcity. The only permanently flowing rivers lie near to, or form part of, the country international boundaries. The lack of readily available freshwater in the interior of the country remains the most important limiting factor for development. Broad overview of Namibia’s water resources and consumption • Water in Namibia is scarce due to low and highly variable rainfall and high rates of evaporation. • Although perennial rivers have the greatest potential as water resources, they are located far from the areas of highest demand. Sustainable management of perennial rivers in Namibia is difficult because several countries share them. • All rivers that originate within Namibia’s borders are ephemeral. The water table associated with these rivers is high and their banks characteristically support vegetation that provides important resources for people and wildlife living in the arid areas of Namibia. • Storage dams on Namibia’s ephemeral rivers are subject to high losses through evaporation. Although necessary for water supply to farms and towns, the impoundment of ephemeral river flow can have serious environmental and social implications, since it causes a lowering of the water table and reduces downstream underground aquifer recharge. • Due to shortages in surface water, Namibia relies heavily on groundwater reserves. These reserves are subject to low recharge rates from rainfall and periodic ephemeral floods. Despite this, groundwater is vital for farmers and most towns throughout western and central Namibia. • Approximately 50 % of Namibia’s total population live in the proximity of the northern perennial and seasonal rivers, and are involved with fishing activities; 90% of these people derive some income from the sale of fish. Fish numbers in the Okavango River have declined dramatically since 1984. The major cause for declining freshwater fish populations in Namibia is over fishing. • With Namibia’s limited freshwater resources, it is generally accepted that aquaculture does not have large potential as a major economic activity. Current aquaculture projects in the northern rural areas have met with many problems, most of which will be difficult to overcome without causing environmental degradation, and are similar to those experienced in other areas of sub-Saharan Africa. • Although agriculture accounts for over 70% of the water used in Namibia, it contributes little more than 10% to GDP. The value added to the water used for agricultural activities in Namibia (especially irrigation) is very low (an estimated N$7.2/m3) when compared to that used for manufacturing (N$272/ m3) or tourism and other service sectors (N$574/m3). Future water demand, freshwater depletion and degradation Over the next 30 years, water demand in Namibia will increase rapidly in some areas (in particular all expanding urban areas, many of which are located far from easily accessible sources of water) and only moderately in others. The current CH AP TE R FI VE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 137 problem of distributing the available water to where it will most be needed, will be exacerbated and, due to full exploitation of developed resources, expensive new water sources (for example, desalination plants and new dams) will need to be developed. Water demand for irrigation, currently the main water consumer, is expected to increase considerably. Namibia is extremely vulnerable to the effects of water pollution – mainly because of the country’s limited supply of surface water and high dependency on groundwater sources. Once it has been contaminated, groundwater is almost impossible to clean up. In the absence of strictly implemented local and transboundary policies, pollution from pesticides, excess fertilisers and other substances is likely to increase in the decades to come. Freshwater depletion and degradation threatens human and livestock health, and socio-economic development. It reduces livelihood options and exacerbates rural poverty. In addition, increasing costs of supply are inevitable, since expensive new infrastructure needs to be developed. As water in some areas becomes scarce and expensive, development options become increasingly limited. Cost recovery of the capital spent on developing expensive new water resource infrastructure is likely to become more and more difficult – especially as the number of teenage headed households are set to increase drastically over the next few decades, as a direct result of the growing HIV/AIDS epidemic. Efforts to reduce freshwater depletion and to enhance the value of water It is recognised that the enforcement of Integrated Water Resource Management and Water Demand Management strategies are essential if our goals regarding social well-being, economic development and environmental health are to be realised. To date, efforts to reduce the threats to water resources in Namibia have been extensive and include: • Adopting a stricter economic approach to water pricing to encourage all sectors to use water as efficiently as possible. • Water conservation initiatives including efforts to reduce evaporative losses from dams the development of water re-use and reclamation strategies and the development of alternative water sources. • Using water in the most economically viable and ecologically sound manner. Tools such as Natural Resource Accounting and Strategic Environmental Assessment are being adopted. Ultimately these tools will help guide policies regarding future water use, and will prevent impact on freshwater ecosystems and the resources and services that they provide. • Improving catchment, river and aquifer management through the establishment of several agreements between Namibia and her neighbours regarding shared river basins. In addition, rural communities are becoming increasingly responsible for their own water points through the establishment of water point committees. Sub-Vision Namibia’s freshwater resources are kept free of pollution and are used to ensure social well-being, support economic development, and to maintain natural habitats. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 138 Freshwater and Associated Resources Things to do • Adopt a new Water Act in place of the outdated Water Act of 1956. • Vigorously implement water demand management approaches and develop mechanisms to encourage more efficient water use. • Promote high value-added economic uses for water. • Improve catchment, river and aquifer management. • Implement Integrated Pest Management for disease control (malaria, sleeping sickness) and crop pest control wherever viable, to reduce contamination of Namibia’s limited water supplies. • Ensure the strict implementation of the relevant national legislation. Where we want to be (2030) • Water allocated and used efficiently. • Irrigation of only high value and strategic crops on suitable soils. • Equitable access to potable water. • Clean, unpolluted water. • Productive and healthy natural wetlands with rich biodiversity. • Appropriate tenure over wetland resources. • Optimal and strategic economic development options. Current situation • Much improved access to potable water. • Improved water demand management. • Increased demand. • Increasing costs of supply. • Increasing threats of water pollution. • Inadequate education and knowledge regarding the importance of natural wetland systems. • Insufficient focus on conserving wetlands and recognizing essential ecological services in water legislation. Things to avoid • Subsidies for water which encourage wastage and misuse. • Devegetation and overgrazing of livestock within catchment areas, along floodplains and along the banks of rivers. This increases sediment transportation in downstream areas and is directly responsible for an increase in flood severity during periods of high rainfall, dam siltation, reduced rates of aquifer recharge and reduced water quality. • Over-fishing and the use of unsustainable methods for catching fish (such as the use of mosquito nets that remove immature fish as well as adults from the population). • Inappropriate development near to natural wetlands, causing a loss of valuable resources and essential services Worst-case scenario • Water used for low value purposes. • Severe water depletion and extremely high costs of supply. • Polluted and degraded water. • Loss of natural wetlands and freshwater biodiversity. • Reduced livelihood, economic development options and poverty. • Increasing health problems. • Potential conflict with neighbours over shared resources. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 139 Targets for Freshwater and Associated Resources While high rainfall variability and the accompanying threat of drought are the most critical constraints facing Namibia’s water resources, water demand continues to rise. As a consequence, water scarcity has become a problem for all areas that are placed geographically far from the perennial water sources. The DWA has estimated that the country’s developed water sources are able to supply a total of 600mm3 per annum. Based on projections for future water demand (estimated to grow at 2.2% per annum), these developed sources are likely to be fully exploited by 2016. Even if stricter Water Demand Management practices are enforced, the central areas of Namibia (in particular the high growth points in the Khomas Region) are expected to experience full use of currently developed sources by 2012. Over the next 30 years, water demand in Namibia will increase rapidly in some areas (in particular, all expanding urban areas) and only moderately in others. The current problem of distributing the available water to where it will be most needed, will be exacerbated and, due to full exploitation of developed resources, expensive new water sources (for example desalination plants, new dams, long pipelines and water from foreign countries) will need to be developed. The proportion of water used for high value uses, e.g. tourism (N$ 574/ m3), other service sectors and high value crops (e.g. grapes and dates), should increase relative to the proportion used for low values uses, e.g. irrigation of low value crops (N$7.2/ m3), (e.g. maize). • By 2030, equitable access to water should be supported by water pricing that reflects the cost of water supply with subsidies being fully transparent and mainly restricted to lifeline amounts for low income users. • Greater dissemination and use of Namibia’s Natural Resource Accounting programme to inform policies and future development. • The proportion of water reused and recycled is increased. • The proportion of water derived from alternative water sources, e.g. desalination, has increased. • Number of basin management committees that are established and functioning, has increased. • Number of Water Point Committees that are established and functioning, has increased. Objective To achieve equitable access to potable water and freshwater resources by all. Strategies • Formulating and implementing new water policies which focus on Water Demand Management principles, appropriate pricing, and water efficient technology and which recognise the fact that the natural environment is a user of water and that natural water sources and wetlands are important providers of vital processes and services. • Promoting sustainable, equitable and efficient water use; and moving away from strategies of expanding Namibia’s water supply to meet projected water demand. • Developing appropriate technologies for the promotion of freshwater fishing. • Vigorously implementing water demand management approaches and develop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 140 mechanisms to encourage more efficient water use through: Educating people about the need to conserve water Recovering water supply costs in urban and rural areas. The adoption of stricter economic approaches to water pricing using block tariffs for all domestic, agricultural and industrial users, will help to ensure that excessive consumers subsidise lower volume (and lower income) users Improving awareness on water conservation options Promoting more efficient end-use technology (e.g. improved irrigation technology) • Discouraging domestic production of unsuitable cash crops in favour of imports by charging for “free” water • Encouraging the active participation of users and beneficiaries in regulating water access and management in rural areas through the further establishment of the rural water point committees • Making full use of tools such as Natural Resource Accounting and Strategic Environmental Assessment to ensure that water is used in the most economically viable and ecologically sound manner – particularly in the agricultural, manufacturing and tourism sectors • Promoting high value-added economic uses for water (e.g. nature centered low-impact tourism and high value crops such as dates and grapes) and the importation of water-intensive goods (e.g. maize). • Improving catchment, river and aquifer management through the strict implementation of agreements between Namibia and her neighbours, regarding shared river basins. • Implementing Integrated Pest Management for disease control (malaria, sleeping sickness) and crop pest control wherever viable, to reduce contamination of Namibia’s limited water supplies • Abolishing all economically unsound subsidies that encourage water wastage and the large-scale use of pesticides and fertilisers that can cause water pollution. • Improving water source monitoring techniques and ensure that all wastewater is disposed of safely. • Ensuring the strict implementation of the relevant national legislation. • Develop and enforce legislation to protect natural wetlands (the creation of a Wetlands Policy), and the resources and services they provide, from damaging human impacts.  Promoting the joint management of river basins, through information exchange and joint research, harmonization of policies, and coordinated policy implementation. 5.2 Production Systems and Natural Resources This section covers six interlinked and significant components of Namibia’s ecological support base and economic potential, namely: • the issue of tenure - peoples’ rights, responsibilities and authority over land and natural resources; • achieving sustainability in the land and agricultural sectors, and the need for diversified livelihoods; • promoting sustainability of the forestry sector - timber and non-timber forest products; ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 141 • sustaining the coastal and marine fisheries and ecosystems; • wildlife and tourism - optimising Namibia’s comparative advantage; and • minerals, prospecting and mining - harvesting the earth’s bounty with minimal impacts. These interlinked issues are illustrated in Figure 5.1. Whilst an appropriate and consistent policy environment is at the heart of Vision 2030, effective institutional arrangements are critical for implementation. In order to achieve a sustainable future, Namibians need to work together and government must facilitate and embrace the contributions of civil society. In summary, three elements are essential for success: a common vision, a clear and consistent strategy, and a concerted team effort. Ultimately actions that can effectively reverse unwelcome trends and reduce threats to Namibia’s natural resource capital, should be focused on the following broad areas • Filling in the gaps in our knowledge regarding natural resources • Tackling the root causes of the key issues that threaten sustainable development through the adoption of integrated political, technical and economic measures • Improving public access to environmental information • Educating all Namibians with respect to environmental and development issues, and the total economic value of Namibia’s natural resources • Capitalising on Namibia’s comparative advantages, promoting diversification, “off land” economic opportunities and value-adding to natural resources • Maintaining and promoting freedom of the press – in order to keep the public well informed regarding the facts associated with environmental and developmental issues • Making policy formulation processes accessible to all stakeholders and providing more opportunities for NGOs and community groups to participate in decision-making. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 142 Figure 5.1: Some of the interlinked issues that threaten sustainable development in Namibia 5.2.1 Land and Agricultural Production Low land capability - a severe constraint to sustainable agriculture In Namibia surface water is scarce, availability of grazing is variable and livestock carrying capacity is low. These natural environmental constraints severely limit the development of rain-fed cultivation and commodity-farming throughout most of the country. Despite these constraints, a large percentage of the land is used for agricultural purposes, and many thousands of families still “live off the land” for their livelihoods. Considering the low capability of the land for husbandry, it is not surprising that Namibia’s agricultural sector is subject to uncertain output, regular crop failure and a drain on state finances, through heavy subsidies and drought relief. Land distribution and ownership • Between 60% and 70% of Namibia’s population practice subsistence agro– pastoralism on communal land, which is state owned, and constitutes approximately 41% of the total land area. • Less than 10% of the people live in the freehold farming areas. This privately owned land constitutes approximately 44% of the total land area. 1.5 % of the total land area is comprised of exclusive diamond concession areas.13.5 % has been proclaimed as nature conservation areas. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 143 • On average freehold agriculture contributes less than 4 % to the GDP (including meat processing) and 27% of exports. Since the 1970’s, many freehold livestock farmers have moved towards mixed game/livestock farming. This diversification helps to create a valuable buffer against drought. • Agriculture in the communal areas is vital for the livelihood of most rural households. Distant markets limit the development of farming in the communal areas, and agricultural incomes are low and variable. Veterinary fences that prevent the spread of contagious livestock diseases have limited the export marketing opportunities of communal farmers. • Not all farmers in Namibia can be defined as “serious”. There are many absentee farmers who own freehold land, and illegal fencing of prime areas of supposedly communal land by wealthy individuals has become common. Land degradation – threatening future agricultural output Land degradation reduces the production potential of the land. It occurs when there is a decline in plant cover or when one type of vegetation is replaced with other, often less productive, species. Namibia’s arid savannah systems, and dry woodland areas that have reverted to savannah–type systems as a result of extensive deforestation, are the most susceptible to land degradation. The environmental manifestations of land degradation in Namibia - soil erosion, bush encroachment and soil salination - are causes of economic loss and escalating poverty, through declining agricultural production and a loss of food security. This leads to human migration, rapid urbanisation and an increased need for the government to import food. Land degradation in Namibia is usually attributed to overgrazing, land clearing for crop farming or inappropriate cultivation techniques. Ultimately, however, desertification occurs as a result of incorrect policies, incentives and regulations that encourage inappropriate land management practices. The lack of tenure, the inequitable access to land and a lack of integrated planning are all important factors contributing to land degradation in Namibia. Trends in agricultural growth, rural household food security Although Namibian producers currently supply all of the nations red meat requirements, the country has suffered a grain deficit since 1964. Through its National Agriculture Policy, government aims to expand irrigation activities up to five-fold but makes no mention of strategies needed to reduce environmental impacts associated with soil salinisation, pesticide run-off and control over the use of potentially polluting fertilisers that are likely to accompany irrigation expansion. Increasing pollution from these substances could threaten Namibia’s future meat exports to European markets. In addition this policy does not reject the use of subsidies for any products that may enhance agricultural production. While it is generally accepted that there is no potential to intensify veld grazing without increasing land degradation in the country, the National Agricultural Policy also proposes the expansion of livestock production onto under-utilised land north of the Veterinary Cordon Fence. Although 94% of rural households identify agriculture as their main activity, it has begun to make a declining contribution to communal farmers’ household income. In most years, households are unable to produce enough grain for the family’s requirements. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 144 Land and Agricultural Production Things to do • Promote the sustainable, equitable and efficient use of natural resources. • Maximise Namibia’s comparative advantages. • Reduce inappropriate resource use practices. • Create data base for information-sharing and programme management. • Develop Aquaculture. Where we want to be (2030) • Equitable access to land. • Declining rates of land degradation. • Appropriate tenure over natural resources. • Unpolluted soils and agricultural water run-off. • Optimal land-use and livelihood options. • Improved economic development options. Worst-case scenario • Land degradation, biodiversity loss and water pollution. • Reduced livelihood and economic development options. • Escalating poverty. • Unequal access to land, and high potential for civil unrest. Things to avoid • Land–use practices and inappropriate rangeland management that encourage land degradation • Subsidies that encourage over-abstraction of water. • The unsustainable use of water for irrigating low value crops, especially on poor soils • Inequitable access to land due to power and wealth (on communal land in particular), and the lack of tenure over land and resources. • Agricultural development projects and extension services that encourage exploitative investments in agriculture and land, and which benefit the wealthy. • Inappropriate and unsustainable drought relief and resettlement policies. • Inappropriate production incentives. • Production of cash crops that do not enhance food security, and force traditional farmers and herders onto marginal land which is vulnerable to degradation. Current situation • Inequitable access to land. • Insufficient tenure over natural resources. • Pressure to pursue food self-sufficiency over food security. • Increasing land degradation and insufficient understanding of the problem. • Increasing rural poverty. It is expected that national consumption of fish will increase significantly as a result of improved availability of marine fish in inland areas, increased production from freshwater aquaculture facilities and greater production of freshwater fisheries. Sub-Vision Land is used appropriately and equitably, significantly contributing towards food security at household and national levels, and supporting the sustainable and equitable growth of Namibia’s economy, whilst maintaining & improving land capability. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 145 Objective To ensure that all Namibians have equitable access to land and other natural resources, and that these resources are sustainably and efficiently used, while maximizing Namibia’s comparative advantages. Strategies • Creating economically and ecologically rational land-use plans to ensure that land is used optimally and not just for direct-use activities like agriculture. • Placing emphasis on manufacturing, service provision and other secondary or tertiary activities which hold the greatest promise for economic growth, income generation, and poverty reduction, to promote diversification away from the agricultural sector. • Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS in agricultural development programmes. • Encouraging local value-adding through domestic processing of meat products. Improve awareness of market requirements for agricultural produce and monitor market responses to Namibian products. • Implementing land redistribution policies that promote equity among the people of Namibia. • Implementing agricultural and resettlement policies aimed at “serious” farmers and the rural poor • Implementing policies that discourage the use of wood fuel and help combat climate change. • Focusing on food security and not food self-sufficiency. Although new irrigation projects, which aim for self-sufficiency, will create jobs, they require enormous subsidies and are capable of accelerating land degradation through pollution, soil salination and high water demands. Thus crops whose production is intensive in the use of scarce natural resources (in particular water), should be imported. • Improving the quality of education and environmental education. • Ensuring that all new projects programmes and policies do not proceed without • a thorough Environmental Assessment (EA). • Improving political will and good governance. • Extending the Affirmative Action programme being implemented by the Agribank (usually available to individuals who qualify because of their ownership of sufficient stock) to groups, consortiums, companies, etc. so that people can reach the target by two or more people working together. • Securing tenure over all natural resources to be assigned to communities, and a major capacity-building programme to be undertaken in order to develop community institutions capable of allocating land rights and managing natural resources sustainably. • Rehabilitating degraded land and water bodies. • Providing incentives for family planning and education services combined with appropriate and diversified land-use options. • Recognising the interdependence between agriculture and other issues, and in particular, water management and biodiversity conservation. • Providing appropriate, effective, decentralised and integrated support services (extension, research, education, credit, marketing, etc.). • Providing incentives for people to protect themselves against present and future extreme events, e.g. incentives to … • Encourage rapid destocking and marketing of livestock to reduce pressure on rangelands during times of drought. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 146 • Developing effective and sustainable uses of land and natural resources which do not threaten their future productivity, by: Adopting more adaptive and responsive agricultural methods e.g replacing a monoculture of food and cash crops with viable intercropping systems, crop rotation or agro forestry. Ensuring that irrigated land is well drained, practicing night-time irrigation and leaving land fallow for part of the year in order to reduce the chances of soil salinisation. Adopting integrated pest management (IPM) in an attempt to reverse the trend of rising pesticide use, which threatens human health and Namibia’s comparative advantages in the global fish and meat markets. Maintaining the genetic integrity of Sanga cattle and other indigenous livestock and crop gene pools. Encouraging research, development and testing of new CO 2 responsive heat and drought resistant crop cultivars (in preparation for future climates that could become hotter and drier). Identify cost-effective, flexible and adaptable management approaches and national disaster response strategies to the potential impacts of Climate Change, that could affect the livelihoods of Namibia’s rural poor. 5.2.2 Forestry Forest ecosystems play multiple roles – at global and local levels. They provide life-sustaining environmental services through the provision of oxygen, the absorption of carbon dioxide and the stabilising of climate systems, and are sources of economically valuable products. Namibia’s natural physical and climatological conditions allow for almost 80% of the land to support trees and shrubs, incorporating vegetation types that range from a variety of wooded savannahs (in the central part of the country) to dry woodlands (which predominate in the north central and north eastern regions). The savannahs are characterised by various species of thorn trees, shrubs and grasses while the woodlands are dominated by several hardwood tree species and a wide variety of fruit trees. The woodland ecosystems enhance the livelihoods of the majority of Namibians directly through the supply of fuel, construction materials, wild foods, medicines, and browse and grazing for livestock. In addition they support a wealth of biodiversity and game, which are the mainstay of the tourism sector. In addition to these direct-use values, Namibia’s woodland and savannah ecosystems play a vital role in maintaining environmental health through soil stabilisation and climate control. Namibia has limited, but valuable, hardwood timber resources. Value addition, also at community level, should be promoted as an alternative to increasing the volume of raw timber production. Manufacturing should be diversified away from curio carvings to high value items that are suitable for export. Uncontrolled and unplanned fires pose the greatest threat to forests and woodlands other than unsustainable harvesting, and also affect grazing land severely. The management of fires requires a cross-sectoral approach and community involvement. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 147 Government is responsible for developing appropriate policies, legislation and strategies aimed at sustainable forest management, data collection and analysis, resource monitoring, research, education and extension. In addition, it incorporates aspects of control over resource utilisation, the promotion of trade, and conservation of forested land for national and global benefits. Unsustainable deforestation of natural woodland has occurred in many parts of the country and is most severe in those areas that have the highest population density, including the north-central and north-eastern regions and on the outskirts of Namibia’s rapidly expanding urban areas. The consequences of unsustainable deforestation include increased rainfall run-off and soil erosion, declining soil fertility, changes in the local water cycle, a loss of biodiversity and increased rates of global warming. The results of the 2001 population census reveals that wood is the primary energy source for cooking for about 62% of households in Namibia. In Caprivi 89% of all households use wood for cooking (see Figure 5.2) and 80% of all dwellings are made from wood. However, most deforestation in the north central area and north-eastern areas of Namibia have resulted from land clearing for agriculture. Figure 5.2: Percentage of Households Relying on Wood for Cooking (2001) R e g io n Riparian (Riverine) forests along the northern perennial rivers have been particularly badly deforested owing to human and cattle population pressure. This has led to destabilisation of river banks, soil erosion, reduced water quality, threats to biodiversity (invertebrates, mammals and bird species), and a noticeable reduction in available resources. Approximately 70% of the riverine vegetation has been lost along the Kavango River. Developing woodlots and establishing forest plantations can help to alleviate some of the impacts of deforestation - but only partially. Although they reduce the rate of global warming and can provide some economic benefits, planted forests tend ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 148 to favour fast growing, exotic soft wood tree species. These are unable to support native birds, insects, mammals and other wildlife adapted to the natural vegetation of an area. In addition, exotic tree species can cause dramatic changes to the nature of the soil and can drain it of vital nutrients. Alien invasive trees (including Prosopis sp. and Nicotiana glauca) are prevalent throughout the westward flowing ephemeral river systems. These exotic trees spread rapidly, do not support as much biodiversity and compete aggressively with indigenous species for water and space. Government currently has inadequately qualified staff; community forest reserves still do not have management plans; a lack of knowledge regarding sound forest management; the destructive effects of over-harvesting; and repeated burning continue to undermine the good intentions of decentralisation. There is limited co-ordination between and support from land management ministries. Sub-Vision Namibia’s diverse natural woodlands, savannahs and the many resources they provide, are managed in a participatory and sustainable manner to help support rural livelihoods, enhance socio-economic development, and ensure environmental stability. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 149 FORESTRY Things to do • Adhere to all legally binding international conventions that provide guidelines for raising forestry management standards e.g the UNCCD and UNFCCC. • Integrate forestry management into all future land-use plans and policies • Secure tenure over all resources associated with woodland and savannah systems should be assigned to appropriate community structures. • A major capacity-building programme should be undertaken in order to develop community institutions capable of managing forest resources sustainably. • Involve communities effectively in fire-management. Where we want to be (2030) • Equitable access to land by all. • Declining rates of deforestation. • Rehabilitated woodlands and riparian forests. • High biodiversity, healthy wetlands and soils. • Appropriate tenure over all forest resources. • Optimal land-use and livelihood options. Worst-case scenario • Denuded woodlands and savannahs. • Reduced soil fertility, increased soil erosion and extensive biodiversity loss. • Reduced livelihood and economic development options. Things to avoid • Commercial forestry that is practised on an unsustainable basis. • Developing woodlots and forest plantations using fast growing, exotic soft wood tree species which negatively affect the soil and are unable to support a rich biodiversity. • Lack of synergy and co ordination between community based initiatives and the many stake-holders involved in sustainable forestry approaches. • Unsustainable land clearing and deforestation. Current situation • Inequitable access to land. • Insufficient tenure over woodlands and woodland resources. • Unsustainable use of wood and woodland products. • Pursuit of inappropriate farming methods and insufficient understanding regarding the impact of extensive land clearing and repeated burning. • Increasing deforestation. Objective To ensure equitable access to, and appropriate tenure over land, woodland and forest resources, as well as their sustainable utilisation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 150 Strategies • Encouraging co-ordination between community-based initiatives and within the GRN and NGOs involved. • Improving knowledge regarding the complex ecological processes involved in woodland ecosystems, in order to develop and implement appropriate management practices. • Establishing education programmes focused on the all-encompassing value of natural forests and the consequences of deforestation. In particular focus on public awareness regarding the damaging effects of over-harvesting and fires. • Enhancing professional competence and training within the forestry sector and develop incentives to retain qualified and motivated forestry officers. • Protecting existing natural woodlands and increase their productivity by declaring Forest Reserves or Managed Areas (especially on uninhabited land that still supports healthy natural vegetation). • Extending the Protected Areas Network to incorporate as many natural wetlands and river systems (and their accompanying vegetation) as soon as possible. • Encouraging the rehabilitation of forest and vegetation cover in the catchment areas of the Chobe, Kwando, Okavango Rivers and on the ephemeral river systems which have suffered deforestation. • Promoting appropriate land-use practices and habitat protection practices to all areas that are at risk of deforestation. • Using bush encroachment species to manufacture charcoal, wood chips and other wood-based products. These products must be made easily available for the local population, thus relieving deforestation pressure in the most population-dense areas of the country. • Supporting only those afforestation programmes that use appropriate indigenous species and/or harmless exotic species. • Combating deforestation by encouraging the development of affordable and appropriate technology e.g. wood efficient stoves. • Developing and maintain nurseries for indigenous tree species. Use these plants to rehabilitate degraded woodland and savannah ecosystems, and to encourage homeowners to plant indigenous rather than exotic species in their gardens. • Providing incentives for sustainable forest management and education services, combined with appropriate and diversified land-use options. • Promote the use of alternative fencing and construction materials, as well as sources of household energy. 5.2.3 Wildlife and Tourism Tourism is an important employment generator in Namibia, particularly in the rural areas where most tourism activities occur. In addition Tourism contributes to Namibia’s national economy through the provision of many diverse services including accommodation, restaurants, transport, entertainment and financial services. Currently there are limited data available in Namibia to analyse the ‘multiplier’ economic impact of tourism. Consequently the full contribution of this sector to the national economy is underestimated. In addition to its contributions to the national economy, Namibia’s tourism industry is capable of: • Contributing to wildlife conservation and biodiversity protection; ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 151 • Contributing to poverty alleviation, particularly in rural areas, through direct and indirect employment; and • Improving the earning ability of rural women and enhancing traditional Namibian culture by stimulating trade in basketry, pottery and other traditional crafts. Land–use for tourism in parts of Namibia, outside protected areas, has extremely high economic potential. Through the CBNRM program, communities in communal areas invest in wildlife and benefit from the resulting tourism development opportunities. Since Independence, tourism has grown rapidly from 254,978 international tourist arrivals in 1993 to 757,201 in 2002, representing a growth rate of almost 200 percent. It is also predicted that within a few years tourism will become the leading economic sector in our country. According to the World Tourism Organization (WTO2), the number of international tourist arrivals world-wide grew by 2.7% in 2002 after a decrease of 0.5% in 2001. In contrast, Namibia experienced a healthy tourist increase of 12.9% for 2002, indicating a competitive advantage. WTO 2 forecasts indicate that by 2010, Africa’s share of international tourists will have more than doubled, taking 1995 as the base year. Globally, tourism accounts for one in every 12 jobs. According to a visitor survey conducted in Namibia by the Ministry of Environment and Tourism at the end of 2002, tourist expenditure in Namibia for that year amounted to approximately N$4 billion. Almost all tourists visiting the country expect a wildlife-centred experience – either through game-viewing, bird-watching, hiking, sport fishing or trophy hunting. Namibia’s biggest attraction is undoubtedly its sparsely populated, spectacular arid scenery and wide-open spaces. In today’s over-crowded, rapidly developing world, natural environments are disappearing fast. Consequently, the solitude, silence and natural beauty that many areas in Namibia provide are becoming sought after commodities that must be regarded as valuable natural assets. Preserving these assets is fundamental to developing tourism as a sustainable economic sector and helping Namibia to maintain a comparative advantage within the global market. A total of 29 conservancies have been registered on State land by 2003, amounting to about 7, 405, 200 ha or nine percent of Namibia’s total land mass. Approximately 40,000 people, usually above the age of 18, are currently signed up as registered conservancy members. However, the number of beneficiaries triples once people below the age of 18 are added. These registered conservancies are distributed across the Caprivi, Kunene, Erongo, Otjozondjupa, Omusati, Hardap and Karas regions, while additional ones are emerging in the Kavango, Oshikoto and Omaheke regions. A systematic approach towards the registration of communal conservancies is needed to halt the uncoordinated mushrooming of these conservancies. Recovering wildlife populations on land outside State-owned parks, present economic opportunities. Conflicts between people and wildlife might increase, especially species that damage crops and predate on livestock. Innovative ways are needed to address such conflicts, principally by creating and facilitating opportunities for generating economic value out of such wildlife rather than the payment of compensation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 152 Community-based tourism (CBT) offers significant potential for economic de velopment in rural areas. The benefits of CBT result from the employment of community members and cash income from tourism enterprises (which increased from N$0.73 million in 1998 to N$12.02 million in 2003). Tourists visiting CBT enterprises increased fomm 30,000 in 1999 to over 70,000 in 2002 and are pro jected to grow to more than 90,000 by 2004. There is a growing interest among tourists not just in both marine and inland sport-fishing, but also to visit the seal colonies and to watch whales and other marine cetaceans. Like all other economic activities, tourism uses resources, produces wastes and creates environmental, social and cultural costs and benefits in the process. Rapid growth in tourism aiming at short-term economic benefits, can easily result in more negative than positive impact - including the degeneration of traditions and cultural values, and environmental damage to tourist sites and natural settings. Namibia’s tourism sector operates in extremely arid and ecologically sensitive areas. Thus, it is essential that attention is paid to all potential environmental and social impacts that can result from tourism activities. These are summarised as follows: • Scarring of landscapes and damage to wildlife habitats through off road driving and careless behaviour; • The unsustainable use of scarce resources (e.g. water and wood); • Pollutants from sewerage, domestic waste, chemical cleaners and litter; • Intrusions on local cultures and values; and • Economic distortions. In many parts of the world tourism products have been ruined in a very short period of time as a result of ad hoc planning. To avoid a similar situation, a sustainable Tourism Master Plan was developed. This Master Plan seeks to increase high quality tourism activities with low impact on the environment. It implies an increase in the volume of high spending tourists who stay longer and travel to most parts of the country. Tourism products and benefits would be spread throughout the country to relieve pressure on some of the key attractions such as Etosha National Park, the coastal regions, Namib Desert and the eco-tourism products of the Northwestern regions. Cultural tourism will become a prominent product since it does not disrupt economic activities or invade the personal space of local people. Tourism is already playing a very important role in economic development. However, its full potential has neither been explored nor exploited. Sub-Vision The integrity of Namibia’s natural habitats and wildlife populations are maintained, whilst significantly supporting national socio-economic development through sustainable, low-impact, consumptive and non consumptive tourism. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 153 Things to do • Provide tourists with information on ecological and cultural values within the country of destination. • Take effective steps to reduce the volume of waste associated with travel and tourism activities. • Design tourist enterprises using low impact designs, materials and technologies, so as not to damage the environmental or cultural assets that tourists seek to experience and that sustain the local community. In other words, to maintain a sense of place. • Distance publicly from any illegal, abusive or exploitative forms of tourism. • Meet and preferably exceeding relevant national labour standards. • Extend conservancies to new areas. • Update State-owned park management and development, and diversify tourism development while placing strong emphasis on high value-low impact tourism. • Promote the training of persons engaged in or entering the tourism industry, to ensure that they are adequately trained to provide quality services. • Improve and accelerate income generation on conservancies to lessen dependence on Government and other providers of support. Where we want to be (2030) • Well managed parks and nature reserves. • Well maintained camps in National Parks with excellent services. • Strong partnerships between government and private sector. • CBNRM extended into all viable rural areas to improve livelihoods. • Protection of Namibia’s unique tourism product-focus on low impact, high quality nature centred tourism. • Strategic approach to tourism planning. • Discerning tourists. • Equity participation and distribution of benefits to enhance socio-economic empowerment of the previously disadvantaged communities. • A multifold increase in contribution to our GDP, and will remain one of the key leading economic sectors in our country. Enterprise development on communal land (e.g. community-owned lodges, tourism information centres, tourism related infrastructure, high quality craft products, improved tour guiding systems). • An efficient system of registering, licensing tourism enterprises and maintaining high quality standards, will be in place and funded by the collection of levies. • Tourism and wildlife increasingly contributing to economic growth for sustainable development of Namibia. • Ownership and management of the tourism and wildlife industry are representative of all Namibians. • Namibia, as a tourist destination, offers a high quality experience, with high economic value to the country and low negative impacts on the environment and society. • Healthy, diverse and productive wildlife populations of economically important species on land outside State-owned parks, integrated into economic activities on farmland, and making a significant contribution to the national economy. • Modern and sustainably managed State-owned parks with diversified and regionally competitive tourism. • Conservancy system that is self-sufficient through income-generation and dependency on Government only for technical advice and assistance. Things to avoid • Poor tourism planning and a lack of a clear vision for the tourism industry. • Declining standards of park management and land management in prime tourism areas • Uncontrolled low quality mass tourism • Tourists who negatively affect the experience and enjoyment of other tourists • Anything that threatens Namibia’s unique sense of place • Uncontrolled water use and waste generation. • Political instability, crime and regional problems that might threaten the tourism industry. • Inadequately trained staff, poor service and poorly maintained facilities • “Leakage” of tourism-generated foreign exchange. WILDLIFE AND TOURISM Current situation • Excellent progress made on CBNRM initiatives and private tourism enterprises. • Sustainable Tourism Master Plan was developed and is ready for implementation. • State-owned park management systems and tourism facilities need to be upgraded to reflect the modern standards of tourism and park management. Worst-case scenario • Poor land-use planning and zoning result in prime tourism areas that have low direct-use value and/or ecologically sensitive (e.g. biodiversity hotspots) used for other activities (e.g. inappropriate agriculture). • Loss of Namibia’s unique tourist product and a “sense of place” due to mass. • Poor service and maintenance of facilities. • Over-utilization of wildlife due to uncontrolled offtake. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 154 Targets for Community Based Natural Resources Management Table 5.1 sets out the expected future growth and development of the CBNRM programme under two different scenarios. In the first, the programme remains focused largely on wildlife and tourism. In the second, the programme provides for a holistic, integrated approach to renewable natural resources, with conservancies being empowered to manage and hold group tenure over also their rangeland, woodland, water, freshwater fish and the land itself. Both scenarios show excellent results and returns, but the integrated and holistic approach offers far greater opportunities, and the basis for a truly innovative, empowering and appropriate form of sustainable rural development. The financial benefits to conservancies, from just the wildlife and tourism components of CBNRM, projected to 2030 and calculated on conservative figures, is shown in the chart below. Figure 5.3: Projected Conservancy Benefits 2030 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 155 Table 5.1 Targets for Communal Area Conservancies KEY INDICATORS 2003 Current Situation 2030 Scenario No. 1: Conservancy legislation primarily supports development of wildlife & tourism resources 2030 Scenario No. 2: Conservancy legislation expanded to allow management of other common resources (i.e. rangelands, community forests, water, etc.) Number of registered conservancies A total of 29 communal area conservancies have been registered as of December, 2001, while an additional 33 are at various stages of formation. It is estimated that approxi mately 65 communal area conservancies could be registered for the specific purposes of developing and managing wildlife and tourism resources. Should the GRN recognise conservancies as a common property management mechanism for other communal resources (i.e. rangelands, community forests, water, fresh water fisheries, etc.), then it is estimated that more than 160 conservancies could form on communal lands. Number of hectares of land & natural resources managed through communal conservancies 7,405,200 hectares It is estimated that 15,000,000 hectares of communal area would be suitable for management of wildlife & tourism resources. This is equivalent to 18.2% of Namibia’s land mass (or 44% of communal lands). It is estimated that a total of 24,000,000 hectares would be suitable for a conservancy common property management mechanism if rangelands & community forests were managed by conservancies. This is equivalent to 29.2% of Namibia’s land mass (or 71% of communal lands). Number of people benefiting from conservancies 40,000 are presently benefiting in registered conservancies, while more than 75,000 people are currently participating in the communal area conservancy movement. Given a conservative population growth rate of 2.0% per annum (taking into consideration the impact of HIV-AIDS) and expansion of the conservancy movement to other parts of the country, it is estimated that over 250,000 communal area residents would benefit from conservancies by 2030 under the current legislation. Given the same projected growth rate and, should the legislation be expanded to include other common property resources, then it is conceivable that more than 900,000 communal area residents could benefit from better managed natural resources by 2030. Expansion of conservancy programme and wildlife habitats Currently, conservancies are predominantly forming in parts of the Hardap, Karas, Kunene, Erongo, Caprivi, Omusati and Otjozondjupa regions. Given the sparse settlement patterns and potential wildlife habitat, conservancies should cover many portions of the Oshikoto, Ohangwena, Kavango, Oshana, and Omaheke regions as well. As a consequence, wildlife (as an income generator and drawcard for tourism) will be more widely dispersed and supported throughout all of these regions. Conservancies would be established in all regions under this scenario. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 156 Income & benefits generated from trophy & subsistence hunting and live game sales. Presently, hunting concessions in communal areas are generating in excess of N$3,217,000 of hunting fees. It is estimated that total revenues generated from hunting operations in these concessions generated more than N$9,000,000 of which N$1,350,362 was returned to conservancies in 2001. However, there is immense scope for increasing the number of concessions and the current off-take rate (which in nearly all instances is less than 3% of the huntable game populations. Should conservancy game populations continue to expand, then it is possible to project increases of 20% per annum in returns for trophy hunting (i.e. through increased supply and exchange rate savings) and other subsistence uses of wildlife, bring the annual projected returns by 2030 to N$844,893,255, of which conservancies and their members would directly receive N$340,212,802 in benefits. Should the veterinary red line be moved further northwards and eastwards, thereby allowing the conservancies in the Kunene and Otjozondjupa to sell live game, then estimated additional benefits of N$62,000,000 could be realised by conservancies by the sale of live game by 2030. Links and partnerships between communal conservancies and commercial game farmers. Income & benefits being generated in communal areas through tourism activities. Very limited contact, with freehold conservancies now covering some 4 million ha and expressing an interest in closer collaboration Presently, it is estimated that tourism enterprises in communal areas are generating approximately N$58,233,000 in gross revenues, of which only N$4,732,885 are documented as returning to community members. Close links and cooperation, resulting in sharing of expertise, translocation of wildlife, partnerships around trophy-hunting, capture and live sale, cropping and tourism; linked marketing, joint training, etc. Given the anticipated growth of the tourism industry (which is very conservatively calculated in the attached Annex), the anticipated increased in the number of joint ventures & community tourism enterprises, it is estimated that employment and cash benefits from tourism will exceed N$3,978,450,000 by year 2030, of which more than N$795,691,000 will be directly benefiting communities. Expansion of natural resource management and enterprises to all natural resources. Close cooperation around agriculture, marketing, tourism, wildlife and forestry management, significant sharing of skills and opportunities, etc. In addition to the massive benefits reflected in the previous column, the subsistence benefits to community members from better managed resources, will be reflected in improved livelihoods and reduced support costs to the GRN in managing its national resource base and the people dependent upon it. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 157 Objective To advance sustainable management of wildlife and tourism for the social and economic well-being of the people of Namibia. Strategies • Improving and accelerating income-generation on conservancies to lessen dependency on Government and other providers of support. • Facilitating opportunities for people to derive economic value from wildlife species that impact on farming and livelihoods. • Updating State-owned park management and tourism development, while placing strong emphasis on high-value, low-impact tourism. • Providing adequate training for persons involved in the tourism industry, to ensure quality services. • Developing and enforcing appropriate environmental and tourism legislation. 5.2.4 Fisheries and Marine Resources Namibia’s entire coastal zone falls within the Namib Desert and is characterised by low rainfall and limited freshwater resources. The inshore marine environment provides valuable migration and nursery habitats for many marine organisms. Namibia’s marine ecosystem is dominated by the Benguela Current, and supports vast populations of commercially exploitable fish species, some of which are shared with Angola and South Africa. The climatic conditions that determine prevailing winds, ocean currents, water temperature and fish stock distribution vary with temporary changes in the earth’s atmosphere. As a result, the maximum sustainable yields of fish stocks fluctuate from one season to the next. The marine fisheries sector is an important foreign exchange earner, and a significant employment generator for Namibia. Prior to Independence, the country’s fishing industry was subject to open access and, as a result of poor management, overexploitation of some of the most productive fisheries occurred. After Independence, Namibia took firm control of the country’s territorial waters and the marine fisheries sector grew rapidly - largely as a result of an increase in fish processing which adds value to landed fish. Since 1990, considerable improvements have been made regarding the monitoring and regulation of Namibia’s fish stocks and the country’s post Independence marine fisheries management policies have been commended internationally for their effectiveness and efficiency. In order to prepare a long term vision for Namibia’s natural resources, it is useful to look at the lessons learnt from global trends. At least 70% of the world’s commercially important marine stocks are reported to be either in a state of depletion, in the process of collapsing or slowly recovering. Furthermore, many marine ecosystems throughout the world have begun to display signs of irreversible damage. The causes and consequences of declining fisheries and marine environment degradation are summarised as follows: • Variable environmental conditions, which are difficult to predict and could increase in response to atmospheric changes linked to global warming. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 158 • Poor management and overexploitation of fish stocks. • Coastal degradation is currently limited in Namibia. However it is likely to increase with growing coastal development over the next 30 years. Human activities responsible for coastal degradation include: The draining and clearing of lagoons and estuaries; upstream dams, deforestation and agricultural and urban pollution, which have had a detrimental effect on water quality entering the river mouths, reducing their potential as a fish-nursery area; marine pollution, caused when seagoing vessels accidentally or purposefully deposit sewerage, oil and other wastes into the ocean. • Fishermen inadvertently kill and waste large numbers of marine species when they target one economically valuable species. An increase in exports of high value fish products to overseas markets is likely. In addition, more efficient trade and improved export markets for marine products to landlocked countries within the SADC region, are expected. Mariculture and low impact nature centred tourism are two areas where there is great potential for expansion. Currently, there is limited aquaculture in Namibia, but it is a sector with great potential. Aquaculture can contribute towards sustained food security, income and employment for many Namibians. Commercial marine aquaculture is limited to oysters, mussels and seaweed production in Lüderitz harbour and in salt-ponds around Walvis Bay and Swakopmund. Commercial freshwater aquaculture of tilapias and cat fishes is undertaken in the Hardap Dam. There are also small-scale operations raising fingerlings for sale to small scale aquaculture ventures at Ongwediva Rural Development Centre, Omahenene and Katima Mulilo. It is anticipated that culture based fisheries will develop to complement and enhance the production of freshwater fish. Sub-Vision Namibia’s marine species and habitats significantly contribute to the economy without threatening biodiversity or the functioning of natural ecosystems, in a dynamic external environment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 159 Fisheries And Marine Resources Things to do • Encourage local value-adding through domestic processing of fish products. • Create marine reserves especially in areas suspected to be important for fish breeding, • Improve access to knowledge regarding the marine environment. • Ensure that data collection is standardised, stored adequately, and made easily available to technicians, managers and the public. • Secure regional cooperation that enables access to and joint management of shared fisheries resources, including information exchange and joint research; harmonization of policies; coordinated policy implementation. • Develop human capacity for the industry. • Ensure that access to marine stocks continues to be regulated by quota allotments and strict fishing rights. • Develop marine and freshwater aquaculture. Where we want to be (2030) • Sustainable yields reached and managed effectively to prevent overexploitation. • Improved understanding of the dynamics of the Benguela system. • Strict pollution control leading to increased exportation of high value fish and increased mariculture opportunities. • Marine reserves and an increase in high earning, low-impact nature centred tourism activities. • Intensive commercial marine and freshwater aquaculture. Current situation • Good monitoring and regulation of fish stocks by Government. • Improved value-adding. • Limited but increasing marine pollution. • Limited understanding of Benguela eco system dynamics. • Limited aquaculture. Things to avoid • Subsidising the fishing industry, creating tax breaks and market interventions that could encourage unsustainable fishing practices. • The targeting of by-catch species and any activities that threaten marine biodiversity or cause pollution. • All impact resulting from increased numbers of visitors to the coast (including litter, sewerage, water demand, traffic and noise). • Avoid any new developments that do not have an acceptable Environmental Management Plan. Such developments could be harmful to human health and/or the environment, and threaten sustainable development. Worst-case scenario • Increasing pollution, coastal degradation and biodiversity loss. • Industry becomes too powerful and exerts pressure on Government to allocate TACs that are unsustainable. • Overexploited and declining fish stocks • Reduced economic development and employment options. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 160 Targets for Marine Resources One optimistic scenario for fish harvesting predicts good recovery of fish stocks to maximum sustainable yields by 2016. On the basis of this scenario, the fisheries sector could experience a growth rate of 6-9% between 1998 and 2017. Once maximum sustainable yields are reached, no further growth in harvesting can be expected, but if managed properly, and concerted efforts are made to ensure the value adding of harvested fish, this sector could remain a high earner on a sustainable basis beyond 2030. The industry foresees an increase in exports of high value fish products to overseas markets. In addition, the opening of the Trans-Caprivi and Trans-Kalahari highways are expected to result in more efficient trade and improved export markets for marine products to landlocked country’s within the SADC region. In addition, there is considerable potential for expanding mariculture and diversifying the marine resources sector. In particular, nature centred tourism activities (for example, low impact whale/seal watching and visits to the offshore islands for bird-watching) provide ideal opportunities for economic growth. Figure 5.4: Possible Growth Within the Marine Resource Sectors (2000-2030) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 161 It is important to note that Namibia’s post Independence marine fisheries management policies have been commended internationally for their effectiveness and efficiency. Objective To achieve increasing and sustainable yields of fisheries and marine resources for the development of the economy and the benefit of the people of Namibia. Strategies • Setting TACs at conservative levels in order to promote the sustainability of resources and to enhance the recovery of depleted stocks. • Adopting and implementing all the policies and programmes in support of sustainability and equity. • Utilizing the services of expert consultants to assist Government fisheries scientists in setting their estimates for TACs. • Developing new ways of adding value to Namibia’s marine products. • Improving awareness of market requirements for marine produce, and monitor market responses to Namibian products. • Adopting and implementing a well researched ICZMP in an attempt to limit unnecessary coastal degradation, without restricting coastal development. This ICZMP aims to reduce conflict of interests in resource utilisation and ensures co-ordination and co-operation between the many stakeholders involved with coastal development, including sectors involved with fishing, urban development, tourism, offshore oil and shipping. • Planning with care any future coastal developments (including those pertaining to tourism, town expansion and industry), and using of tools such as Environmental Impact Assessment, in order to avoid threats to communities and damage to natural areas and marine life. • Developing strategies that create incentives for fishing companies to adopt more sustainable fishing practices (e.g. the introduction of by-catch fees). • Enforcing regulations set by MARPOL which counteract all forms of marine pollution. • Ensuring that all port authorities provide facilities for the retrieval and correct disposal of oily ballast water and other waste matter that accumulates on board ships. • Continuing research, involving outside researchers, into the functioning of the marine environment and marine biodiversity. • Establishing and maintaining mechanisms that secure financial resources that can feed directly into the marine fisheries sector and will boost the funds available for the maintenance and improvement of Namibia’s marine capital (e.g. the Fisheries Investment Fund). • Encouraging entrepreneurial drive and redirect investment so that environmentally friendly economic and livelihood options are opened up for the poor - e.g. promote small scale mariculture enterprise development. • Identifying cost-effective, flexible and adaptable management approaches and national disaster response strategies to the potential impact of sea–level rise and other impact linked to climate change, that could affect the marine resource sector. Once identified, such impact must be incorporated into Namibia’s national development plans. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 162 5.2.5 Non-renewable Resources Namibia is endowed with a rich variety of mineral resources. Diamonds remain the country’s premier mining commodity, although uranium, gold, copper, salt, zinc, lead and fluorspar. semi-precious stones, industrial minerals and dimension stone are also produced. Mining related activities, other than formal mines include mining claims, NEPLs, EPLs, and formal mines. Currently there are only 15 active mines in Namibia. Virtually all mining output is exported. In 1998, minerals represented approximately 36% of Namibia’s merchandise exports, but contribution to GDP has fallen from approximately 28% in the 1980’s, to current levels of between 12%-14%. In addition to its national importance, mining has stimulated significant infrastructure development, and has been responsible for supporting a variety of community initiatives, conservation projects, training and skills-development programmes and various other social causes in Namibia. Despite rising costs, uncertain prices and variable labour relations, mining is likely to maintain its significant contribution towards Namibia’s socio-economic development over the next three decades. The small-scale mining sector is expected to grow in relative terms and there is the possibility for the development of “mining tourism”, where operating mines provide tourism experiences, such as going underground or searching for diamonds. In the case of the Swakopmund salt mine, the idea of mining-linked tourism can be developed further – to embrace a nature centred experience, as this mine is also a registered private nature reserve and one of the best localities in Namibia for observing shorebirds. If poorly planned or badly managed, mining can result in a great variety of impacts which threaten human health and environmental integrity. However, with modern Environmental Assessment applied during planning and the implementation of EMP during the operational phase, mines in Namibia are increasingly better planned, and negative impacts can usually be mitigated and localised. Moreover, mines are under increasing pressure to obtain ISO certificates which would enhance their chances of selling their commodities to Western markets. Despite these recent improvements, a century of mining with little or no planning to reduce environmental damage, has impacted heavily upon large areas in Namibia, especially in the Namib Desert. There are currently approximately 40 abandoned, unrehabilitated mines in Namibia, of which 40% are in nature reserves. Sub-Vision Namibia’s mineral resources are strategically exploited and optimally beneficiated, providing equitable opportunities for all Namibians to participate in the industry, while ensuring that environmental impacts are minimised, and investments resulting from mining are made to develop other, sustainable industries and human capital for long-term national development. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 163 NON-RENEWABLE RESOURCES Things to do • Develop land-use plans that identify the most economically viable land–use options for Namibia’s thirteen regions, and which set clear guidelines for zoning (i.e. setting aside specific areas where mining should be restricted). • Enact the Environmental Management Bill and ensure that all mining activities are preceded by an EA study, and that EMPs are developed and implemented. • Affected communities must be informed about the potential environmental impacts of mining activities in their area. Where we want to be (2030) • Mining well planned, resulting in minimal, if any, impacts on human health and the environment. • All mines fully rehabilitated after closure. • Investments resulting from mining are used to develop other sustainable industries and human capital for long term national development. • Strong small-scale mining sector. Current situation • Mining contributes significantly towards Namibia’s socio economic development. • Mining companies have stimulated infrastructure development and supported a variety of community initiatives, training and skills-development programmes. • Currently there are approximately 40 abandoned, unrehabilitated mines in Namibia, of which 40% are in nature reserves. • Mines are increasingly better planned and mining management shows improved awareness of environment and human health issues. Things to avoid • Inappropriate prospecting and mining activities, especially for low value minerals within protected areas and areas of high ecological sensitivity and/ or tourism potential. • Abandonment of prospecting sites and mines without appropriate rehabilitation. Worst-case scenario • Poorly managed mining activities result in a variety of hazardous impacts that threaten human health and environmental integrity. • No mine rehabilitation. • Mines established in ecologically sensitive areas in absence of zoning. • No investment made to support other sustainable economic activities. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 164 Objective To exploit Namibia’s non-renewable resources optimally and equitably for the benefit of all. Strategies • Setting targets in the EMP to be met by management, and indicators that track progress towards a more sustainable mine. It is the responsibility of the mine managers to ensure that every staff member understands the goals of the EMP • Enacting and implementing Namibia’s Pollution Control Bill. • Ensuring that hazardous waste is handled and disposed of in the safest way possible, and that • Ensuring that mines hold the ultimate responsibility for cleaning up their own polluting wastes. This will encourage a reduction in the amount of waste that is produced. • Ensuring that mines obtain ISO 14001 certificate, because this will en hance their chances of selling their commodities to Western markets in future decades. 5.2.6 Biodiversity Namibia’s biodiversity and wildlife resources Biodiversity may be defined as the variety and variability among living organisms and the natural environments in which they occur. Namibia’s biodiversity includes innumerable species of wild plants and animals, which inhabit the country’s six major biomes. Only a small number (possibly as little as 20%) of Namibia’s wildlife species have been described to date. Of the 13 637 species that have been described, almost 19 % are endemic or unique to Namibia. This high prevalence of endemic species is most pronounced in the Namib Desert and pro-Namib transition zone. The critical importance of Namibia’s wildlife resources Despite the fact that only some species are directly useful to humans as sources of food, fibre, medicine or tourism, all species, even those that are too small to see, are of ecological importance. Natural ecosystems provide vital genetic material (an invaluable resource that is regularly required to enhance domestic crop and livestock species), as well as the indirect benefits associated with certain ecosystem functions. These include the provision of life sustaining air, water and productive soils. Biodiversity loss Although it may not always be obvious, no environmental crisis will have a more lasting impact on future generations than the widespread loss of biodiversity. Each time a species is lost, our ecosystems become less complex. As ecosystems lose complexity, outbreaks of pests and disease become prevalent and essential ecological functions become disrupted. Ultimately, the loss of wild species increases vulnerability to drought, floods and other extreme events like global climate change. In turn, these impacts threaten food supplies, sources of wood and medicines, and the ability of rural communities to sustain themselves. Direct causes of biodiversity loss include: • The loss, fragmentation and conversion of natural habitats (due to deforestation, land degradation, urban development, etc). Most severely ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 165 threatened habitats are riparian forests along the banks of the perennial rivers, wetlands, woodland and savanna biomes. • The unsustainable harvesting of wild plants and animals and wildlife prod ucts • Air, soil and water pollution • The introduction of alien invasive organisms that threaten the survival of indigenous species • Water management schemes and the regulation of perennial river flow by dams. Human population pressure, poverty, the lack of secure and exclusive tenure and insufficient intersectoral policy co-ordination are the most important indirect causes of biodiversity loss in Namibia. It can be assumed that those areas in Namibia that have the highest human population and livestock densities, and which have been subjected to extensive land clearing, are those that have suffered the highest losses in biodiversity. Many wetland sites are parts of larger systems, usually with significant components in unprotected areas or in other countries. This means that transboundary and multisectoral approaches are usually needed for their effective management. Other transboundary biodiversity conservation challenges exist. For example, the extensive wildlife herds that migrate seasonally between northern Botswana, north eastern Namibia, Zimbabwe and parts of Zambia and Angola must be considered as valuable shared resources – together with certain ecosystems (particularly those associated with rivers). The successful conservation of this entire area within SADC, and the ultimate survival of its tourism industry, will depend to some extent on the establishment of a cross-boundary conservation zone, linking unspoiled habitats and some of the established parks in these five countries. The importance of wildlife harvesting to subsistence economies Currently about 67% of Namibia’s population live in rural areas. At a national level it is estimated that 33% of total household consumption in rural areas comes from wild foods. The most important wild products that are harvested include: firewood, wood for construction and woodcarvings; thatching grasses; medicinal products and veld foods (from nuts, fruits, leaves, roots and bark, meat from game animals and fish). There is no conflict between using natural resources and the notion of conservation, provided that resources are used sustainably and equitably. Contribution of protected areas to wildlife conservation and biodiversity protection Namibia’s national parks and reserves remain the principal means of maintaining essential ecological functions and conserving biodiversity and scenic areas. The wildlife resources within the parks are used for tourism, capture for resale, research and education. Despite this, Namibia’s parks and reserves face many challenges including: • Lack of linkages to local, regional, and national planning and management systems, which sometimes leads to inappropriate development within protected areas • Increasing pressure for protected areas to be used for emergency grazing or reallocation due to land reform • Communities generally see parks as land that only benefits government and foreign visitors ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 166 • Parks are extremely expensive to run and maintain. Only a small percentage of the funds generated by Namibia’s National Parks are put back into park management. It is now generally accepted that to make conservation efforts sustainable, they must contribute in some meaningful way towards rural development. Conservancies and CBNRM initiatives have had much success in this regard since 1996. Conservation outside protected area: Conservancies and CBNRM initiatives Namibia’s conservancy programme meets most of Namibia’s National Development objectives – it has created employment, provides economic and managerial empowerment, enhanced rural development, helps to alleviate poverty and, at the same time, has contributed to biodiversity conservation. Conservancies offer opportunities for communities in remote communal areas to generate cash revenues and employment. At present, conservancies have legal rights over a narrow resource base that includes wildlife and tourism. However, eventually conservancies could become common property management bodies responsible for managing all natural resources, including land, rangelands, forests, fresh water fisheries, and water. To date, 29 communal conservancies have been registered and an additional 33 are under development. The registered conservancies encompass approximately 4 million hectares of prime wildlife habitat, while the emerging conservancies cover an additional estimated 5-7 million hectares. Currently, more than 30,000 people benefit directly from improved resource management in registered conservancies, and an additional 60,000 – 80,000 will soon fall under the conservancy umbrella. Conservancies receive the majority of their income from the tourism industry. The comparative advantages of this industry over other subsistence uses of natural resources (e.g. livestock grazing) is immense. Most tourists are willing to pay for high quality, low impact nature-centred experiences with foreign exchange. In addition, anticipated growth in the world tourism industry is high. Provided it looks after its unique tourism product, Namibia is likely to be the chosen destination for many affluent tourists seeking a nature centred experience, in the decades to come. A direct result of devolving rights and responsibilities to communities over wildlife has been a dramatic increase in wildlife numbers outside of protected areas. This in turn has led to community empowerment and local management of the resource. Despite these successes, certain policy constraints threaten the conservancy programme’s long-term potential. In summary, • Wildlife tourism is not yet recognised as a valid land-use option that can replace other direct land-uses (like agriculture) in certain areas. • Supportive legislation to assist conservancies with integrated resource management plans has not yet been developed. • NGO’s and the private sector are vital partners in the CBNRM programme. Private sector investment incentives in communal conservancies must be developed. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 167 Projections to the year 2030 By 2030 approximately 65 communal area conservancies covering approximately 15,000,000 hectares (44%) of communal land, could be registered for the specific purposes of developing and managing wildlife and tourism resources. It is estimated that over 250,000 communal area residents could benefit from these conservancies. However, if group tenure within conservancies is extended to rangeland, woodland, water, freshwater fish and the land itself, many more opportunities and benefits will arise. This will, however, demand strong partnerships and significant sharing of skills and opportunities between agricultural, marketing, tourism, wildlife and forestry management personnel from the GRN, private sector and NGOs. Under this scenario, projections to 2030 may be summarised as follows: • Approximately 160 conservancies could be established on communal lands, covering an estimated 24,000,000 hectares (equivalent of 29.2% of Namibia’s land mass or 71% of communal land) • More than 900,000 communal area residents could benefit from better managed natural resources under this scenario • There will be improved livelihoods and reduced support costs to the GRN in managing its national resource base and the people dependent upon it • Should conservancy game populations continue to expand, then it is possible to project increases of 20% per annum in returns for trophy hunting (i.e. through increased supply and exchange rate savings) and other subsistence uses of wildlife, bring the annual projected returns by 2030 to N$844,893,255, of which conservancies would directly receive N$340,212,802 in benefits. Sub-Vision The integrity of vital ecological processes, natural habitats and wild species throughout Namibia is maintained whilst significantly supporting national socio-economic development through sustainable low-impact, high quality consumptive and non-consumptive uses, as well as providing diversity for rural and urban livelihoods. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 168 Biodiversity Things to do • Combat poverty and population growth. • Recognise that wildlife tourism on communal land is a valid land-use option with high potential to combat poverty, stimulate rural development and conserve biodiversity. • Create incentives for landowners and managers to diversify into wildlife and tourism in more efficient and cost effective ways. • Continue to extend conservancies into all viable areas on communal land. • Encourage and develop private sector investment incentives in communal conservancies. NGOs and the private sector are vital partners in the CBNRM programme. • Enforce legislation regarding the illegal export of indigenous species and the import and/or propagation of alien invasive species. • Ensure that all important Namibian ecological diversity are represented in State-owned parks; • Strengthen management and biodiversity conservation-value of State-owned parks by improving management planning and the financial resources for implementation; • Update the management and tourism infrastructure in parks to maintain Namibia’s competitiveness as a tourism destination Where we want to be (2030) • Diminished rates of biodiversity loss. • Rehabilitated and productive riparian forests, woodland and savannah biomes. • CBNRM extended into all viable rural areas. • Equitable access to and appropriate tenure over all natural resources through CBNRM initiatives. • Strong partnerships and significant sharing of skills and opportunities between GRN, private sector and conservancy stakeholders. • Extended and well managed protected areas network to include biodiversity “hotspots” and trans-boundary areas. • Improved land-uses and optimal livelihoods achieved. • Vibrant, productive rural areas. Things to avoid • Sectoralism, which results in limited co-ordination between the various sectors that deal with natural resources. • No land-use planning and zoning off of certain areas for different economic activities. • Deforestation, and other unsuitable land management practices that cause land degradation, to continue. • Inadequate protection of natural wetlands and riverine systems and their accompanying flora and fauna; • Over-exploitation of freshwater fish, riverine vegetation and all other natural resources. • Failure to protect Namibia’s threatened and endangered species. • Preventing NGOs and the private sector continuing their support of the CBNRM programmes. • Inadequate and/or inconsistent implementation of Namibia’s Environmental Management Bill, Waste Management and Pollution Control Bill and other legislation that aims to ensure sustainable development with minimal costs to human health and the natural environment. Worst-case scenario • Rapid rates of biodiversity loss resulting in outbreaks of pests and threats to human health. • Increased vulnerability to drought, environmental change and loss of productivity. • Threats to food supply, sources of medicines and wood. • Reduced livelihood options and increasing rural poverty. • Decline in Namibia’s tourism potential. Current situation • Habitat loss due to human population pressure, poverty, the lack of secure and exclusive tenure and insufficient inter sectoral policy co-ordination. • Insufficient understanding of the importance of Biodiversity to human and economic health. • Inadequate network of protected areas and poor management of parks. • Excellent progress made on conservation efforts outside of protected areas as a result of CBNRM initiatives. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 169 Objective To achieve diminished rates of biodiversity loss and ensure equitable access of all Namibians to and appropriate tenure over all natural resources. Strategies a) Improving the policy environment regarding land-use management by: • Developing economically and ecologically viable land-use plans that identify the most suitable land–use options for Namibia’s thirteen regions, and which set clear guidelines for zoning (i.e. setting aside specific areas for low impact, high quality tourism and others for direct use activities like agriculture and mining). • Implementing the Environmental Management Act. This will help to reduce threats to human health, ecosystems and resources from poorly planned development activities. • Developing supportive legislation to assist conservancies with integrated resource management plans. • Including representative parts of all important Namibian biodiversity in State-owned parks; • Strengthening management and biodiversity conservation value of State owned parks by improving management planning and the financial resources for implementation; • Updating the management and tourism infrastructure in parks to maintain Namibia’s competitiveness as a tourism destination. b) Introducing as many economic instruments as possible, which can be used to help finance sustainable development options and/or discourage environmentally unfriendly practices that threaten human health and limit long-term economic prosperity. These include: • Introducing tax reforms and environmental taxes by taxing environmentally unfriendly or pollution-generating imports and inappropriate land use practices; • Reducing subsidies that encourage environmentally unsound practices (for example the use of pesticides, water and coal which threaten biodiversity and environmental health in general); • Establishing and maintaining the EIF to help ensure that at least some of the revenue generated from tourism activities in state owned parks, will be used to help conserve the environmental resource base; • Providing loans, grants or subsidies that will encourage sustainable, environmentally friendly practices (for example, the use of solar and other renewable energy resources; Integrated Pest Management practices, instead of highly polluting pesticides); and • Implementing strict “polluter pays” principles through the Waste Management and Pollution Control Bill. c) Improving the knowledge base regarding natural resources and biodiversity in Namibia through: • Training and improved finances for relevant research and monitoring; and • Recognizing and utilizing local (indigenous) knowledge held by rural communities about their environment. d) Developing and implementing initiatives aimed at the transboundary management of north-eastern Namibia and the Namib Desert. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 170 e) Combating deforestation and loss of habitat through land degradation, by providing rural communities with electricity and/or renewable energy sources. 5.3 THE URBAN ENVIRONMENT Urban environments play a vital role in the provision of employment, shelter, services and as centres of education. They hold promise for sustainable development because of their ability to support a large number of people, while limiting their per capita impact on the natural environment. However, the rapid amassing of people in towns and cities can have tremendous impact and managing the urban environment sustainably has become a major global challenge. An important part of meeting this challenge is planning. The locality of a town, and the way in which it is built and managed, will ultimately affect the quality of life of its residents. In Namibia, rapidly growing informal settlements on the outskirts of towns are generally associated with localised deforestation, increasing waste management problems, increasing crime, poverty, limited access to adequate sanitation and isolated incidents associated with the spread of communicable, waterborne diseases. There is also the growing problem of unemployment. Unemployment in Namibia’s urban areas is currently estimated at 31.5 %; about 37% of women and 27% of men in the labour force are unemployed. Rapid urbanisation in Namibia has occurred largely as a result of high rates of population growth, drought, a decline in the ability of the land to support growing populations and the perception that there is an easier and better life in towns and cities. Namibia’s current rates of urbanisation are high and 75% of the country’s population could be living in towns and cities by 2030. Local Authorities in the larger towns are autonomous in most aspects of their management. However, skills and expertise are concentrated in the Windhoek and Walvis Bay municipalities, whilst smaller municipalities have to rely on external consultants and/or the Ministry of Regional, Local Government and Housing for their human resources. While Environmental Assessment has is seen as a means of reducing unnecessary impact upon human health, the land and resources, legislation has yet to be passed and this planning tool is inconsistently implemented during urban developments. Thus far, only two local authorities in Namibia (the Windhoek and Walvis Bay municipalities) have introduced Local Agenda 21 initiatives. There is insufficient public awareness of Agenda 21 and environmental issues in general. Environmental issues appear to be a relatively low priority on personal and political agendas in Namibia, in both rural and urban environments. Since Independence, the formation of parastatal organisations for electricity and water supply has provided the opportunity to improve service provision and efficiency. The establishment of Namibia’s Water and Sanitation Committee in 1990 has led to an improvement in access to potable water and sanitation facilities. At Independence less than 50% of the rural population had adequate access to a reliable source of safe water. The 2001 census report shows that about 98 % of ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 171 urban and 80% of rural households have access to safe water. The report also shows that over 70% of the households in the urban areas use flush toilets, compared to less than 10% in rural areas. Despite these notable improvements, declining water quality is a problem even in many improved water supply systems. Although the spread of waterborne diseases in Namibia’s growing squatter areas is low, problems periodically emerge even in the dry, desert towns. For example, during May 2001 an outbreak of diarrhoea in the squatter area outside Swakopmund caused 25 people to be hospitalised during the east wind period. While equitable access to health facilities and health education has improved considerably since the early 1990’s, medical services are still affected by a shortage of adequately trained medical doctors. Health services are expected to deteriorate as the health care system becomes over-burdened with HIV/AIDS patients, and there is a brain-drain of well-qualified doctors and nurses. Although local authorities in some of the major towns (in particular Walvis Bay and Windhoek) and the private sector have made efforts to improve waste management, there has been inadequate commitment to provide incentives for improved waste management and pollution control – particularly the reduction, recycling and re-use of waste materials and the adequate handling and disposal of hazardous wastes. Illegal dumping in green spaces and dry river beds has developed into an immense problem in all urban areas. Regardless of Namibia’s problems relating to waste management, some exciting zero emission (ZERI) projects have been proposed by NGOs and the private sector. The UNAM Integrated Bio-system project provides an excellent example. There has been improved access to urban land and incentives to invest in and develop land through the systematic proclamation of smaller towns and the adoption of the National Housing Policy. The self-help Build Together Programme (BTP) provides low interest rate loans to individuals. This programme has helped many families in peri-urban areas to build their own homes. Despite these efforts, the BTP has managed to redress only less than 3% of Namibia’s housing backlog per annum – a figure which, due to population growth and the increasing number of informal settlements in urban areas, has begun to decline. There has been good progress in road development. In particular, there has been a dramatic upgrading of roads and infrastructure in formerly neglected parts of Namibia. Despite Namibia’s trends regarding increasing crime and domestic violence, services to protect civilians, provide support to victims of violent crime or shelter for the growing numbers of AIDS orphans, remain inadequate Namibia’s Police Force suffers from limited resources, and the small numbers of victim shelters that exist are inadequate and mostly run by volunteers and NGOs, with a shortage of funds and little or no support from the authorities. Sub-Vision Despite high growth rates, Namibia’s urban areas will provide equitable access to safety, shelter, essential services and innovative employment opportunities within an efficiently managed, clean and aesthetically pleasing environment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 172 The Urban Environment Things to do • Maintain population growth at sustainable levels • Slow down rates of urban migration aim for economically sound and environmentally safe sustainable rural development options (e.g. CBNRM initiatives) • Practice responsible architecture – design buildings around the environment, not bulldoze through it. • Develop Youth Clubs run by trained adults, in all areas, and create recreation centres. • Make Windhoek and all of Namibia’s large towns “Cyclist friendly”. This will reduce traffic congestion and contribute to mitigating the effects of Global Warming. • Identify and implement cost-effective, flexible and adaptable management approaches and national disaster response strategies to the potential impact of sea–level rise for each coastal settlement. • Reduce the spread of HIV/AIDS. Where we want to be (2030) • Healthy, self-sufficient rural populations and reduced rates of rural-to-urban migration. • Well planned, well managed, clean, safe and aesthetically pleasing urban areas. • Recreation facilities (parks, monuments, museums, etc) available in cities. • Equitable access to land and essential services. • Opportunities for innovative and sustainable employment. • Pro-active, citizens with high levels of civic pride, involved in decision-making. Current situation • High rates of urbanisation, unemployment and increasing urban crime. • Improved provision of essential facilities and services (shelter, water, sanitation, roads and health) to all urban areas since Independence. • Poor knowledge of Local Agenda 21 initiatives. • Insufficient sharing of knowledge and experience between the larger more established local authorities and smaller ones. • High incidence of peri-urban deforestation and illegal dumping. • Poor hazardous waste-control and limited efforts at reducing and recycling wastes. • Inadequate services to protect civilians, provide support to victims of violent crime or shelter for the growing numbers of AIDS orphans. Things to avoid • No effort to enhance sustainable rural development and land–use options. • A lack of planning which paves the way for environmental degradation, overburdening of existing infrastructure, a lack of access to suitable land, adequate shelter and essential services. • Urbanisation spilling over in an ad hoc manner into: Sensitive coastal areas, causing the destruction of valuable ecosystems and their resources. Reclaimed wetlands Areas that could be used for agricultural purposes. • No effort to develop Local Agenda 21 initiatives • Discouraging decentralisation and public participation • Limited waste management and hazardous waste control especially in green spaces and informal urban areas. • Uncontrolled crime • Negligent governance, which ignores vital issues pertaining to sustainability; decentralisation; efficiency; accountability; public participation; and security. • A loss of green spaces in urban areas, noise pollution and aesthetically unpleasant sights and smells which can erode civic pride, lower morale and result in a loss of well-being amongst urban residents. Worst-case scenario • Aesthetically unpleasing, uncontrolled urban sprawl and informal areas. • Increasing poverty and uncontrolled crime. • Health hazards associated with poor waste management and limited access to adequate water supplies and sanitation services. • Citizens with low morale, limited civic pride and minimal involvement in decision-making. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 173 Objective To achieve integrated urban and rural development in which there are opportunities for innovative and sustainable employment, with well planned, well managed, clean, safe and aesthetically pleasing urban areas. Strategies a) Incorporating a clear urban development plan into the national development plans, to reduce the need for land conversion, improve infrastructure for water supply, provide opportunities for water and energy savings and to make recycling of waste and water more cost effective. b) Implementing HIV/AIDS reduction policies, plans and programmes. c) Improving urban environmental management by: • Developing more effective waste collection systems through public/ private partnerships (especially those that encourage to use of informal labour). • Implementing strict legislation for the treatment of hazardous wastes • Adopting sustainable energy policies that are cost effective and environmentally friendly. d) Harmonising objectives and policies and ensure close coordination of actions between GRN and the private sector on issues to do with pollution control, child welfare and crime prevention. e) Improving urban governance through: • Drafting Local Agenda 21 Action Plans for each Urban Settlement – thus aiming for social, economic and environmental sustainability. • Decentralising responsibilities and resources to the lowest appropriate level; • Developing effective partnerships with and among all actors of civil society (particularly the private and community sectors); • Making local authorities accountable to their citizens, improving access to Government information; • Encouraging public participation in all decisions regarding urban development; • Striving to create and maintain safe public spaces (e.g. involve citizens in crime prevention or developing a public awareness campaign to encourage gender awareness and tolerance of diversity). f) Developing suitable and caring shelters for victims of violent crime, domestic violence, street children and the growing number of AIDS orphans. g) Encouraging town-to-town co-operation and exchange of experiences, and lessons learnt. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 174 6. CREATING THE ENABLING ENVIRONMENT Creation of an enabling environment is essential for the attainment of sustainable development. Such an environment is complex, and embraces broad issues such as democratic governance; peace and political stability; national, global and regional security; regional integration; international relations; development cooperation; and globalisation. These various tenets are internal and external factors that constitute the enabling environment, and are regarded as necessary conditions for the realization of sustainable development. It is, therefore, imperative for Namibia to work towards the creation and maintenance of an enabling environment, which ensures peace and political stability, for development to be realised. Peace has been conceived as the absence of war in the western political discourse. This ‘negative’ definition (negative, because it defines by negation) has since been questioned by many authors who prefer a ‘positive’ approach in which peace is viewed as the attainment of security, justice, welfare, freedom, and self fulfilment. This Vision takes the positive approach to the meaning of peace. Peace cannot exist outside political stability and acceptance by the citizens of the existing institutions and economic structures and their products. It is a compromise among citizens susceptible to agitation by any situation that provokes social, political and economic woes. Therefore, it exists in a society with stratified obligations and responsibilities, and with a power structure supported by a collective desire to respond to both internal and external aggression. There is a direct relationship between peace and development; while war does not necessarily prevent economic growth, it is inimical to development. Political stability presupposes the absence of conflicts of whatever nature within the broad civil society. It is a product of broad consensus on national policies and principles, and is an embodiment of tolerance. Both the leaders and those who are led must internalise and practice democracy in order for it to be sustained, and the national Constitution must provide clear guidelines that purposively articulate how government intends to achieve specific levels of desired life quality. Most importantly, the national leadership must be genuinely committed to it, and the government administration must adhere to the principles of justice. In addition, for political stability to be sustained the environment in and surrounding the country must be devoid of destabilising activities, for these could undermine the prevailing peace. Therefore, political stability manifests only in a society where the individual’s interests succumb to those of the majority, and fundamental rights and freedoms are given their cardinal role as pillars of democracy and development. The goals of the Namibian struggle for Independence were framed in terms of social justice, popular rule and socio-economic transformation, thus the legitimacy of the post apartheid system of governance rests on its ability to deliver transformation or, at any rate, to redirect resources to address the socio-economic causes of poverty and potential conflict. And since attaining independence, CH AP TE R SI X ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 175 Namibia has enjoyed peace and political stability over the last decade. This is owed mainly to the democratic governance framework that accommodates civil and political rights of citizens. However, the sustenance of this atmosphere of peace to the year 2030 requires concerted efforts for the expansion of democracy beyond the confines of the formal procedures of political practices, so that it is also felt in the socio-economic arena. Continued prevalence of widespread poverty would, in the eyes of those affected, imply government’s unwillingness to change the status quo, or its inability to improve their economic conditions. Therefore, the challenge calls for a functioning social-democratic framework, underpinned by a robust and sustainable system of equitable social provisioning for the basic human needs of all citizens, in terms of, among others, education, health, housing, water, sanitation, land, etc. 6.1 Sustainable Development Sustainable development is the type of development that meets the needs of the present, without limiting the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. It encourages people to take responsibility for their own development and promotes development activities that address the actual needs of the people, and require increasing community contributions to development services and infrastructure. Sustainable development calls for the following: • Partnership (between government, business, communities, NGOs and CBOs, academic institutions, international community and donors, rural and urban communities, etc.); • Capacity enhancement (human and institutional); • Good governance, accountability and transparency; • Democracy and human rights; • Environmental protection; • Peace and political stability. • Gender equality. The concept of sustainable development arises, in part, from the realization that it is impossible to separate economic and social issues from environmental issues. In order to pursue sustainable development, strategies that result in a minimum amount of damaging impact but which promote social and economic development must be adopted. Namibia’s Ideal Vision for 2030 is one that fully embraces the idea of sustainable development. The key threats to sustainable development in Namibia i) Population growth and settlement patterns: Population growth directly affects future demand for natural resources, rates of urbanisation and poverty. ii) Increasing water stress. Namibia’s limited freshwater resources are being placed under increasing stress due to population growth, rapid urbanisation and economic growth. iii) Poorly planned development and inappropriate industrialisation: A lack of strategic planning can lead to inappropriate developments that do not make optimal use of Namibia’s comparative advantages, and place unnecessary pressure on limited resources such as water. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 176 iv) The loss of biodiversity: The loss of biodiversity impacts on our development options. It disrupts ecosystem stability and the functions that underpin our very survival (e.g. the provision of clean air and water, the control of soil erosion and floods, and the assimilation of wastes). v) Unresolved land issues: Low land capability means that Namibia’s soils are easily degraded. In addition, the unequal distribution of land, if not resolved in the near future, will lead to conflict that could destabilise our entire society and economy. The lack of secure group tenure does not provide incentives for people to care for the land and invest in its improvement. The “open access” problem in Namibia is economically and environmentally unsound as it leads to environmental degradation, dissipation of net benefits and reduced production. vi) Widespread poverty and inequality: Namibia has one of the most highly skewed income distributions in the world. This means that there is significant poverty and inequality in the country. Poor people have few options but to depend on primary production for food and energy and, therefore, can result in tremendous strain on natural resources. vii) Wasteful consumption patterns: Wealth can also threaten sustainable development. Wealthy people and communities often choose to have resource intensive lifestyles. If they do, they become responsible for high rates of energy and raw material consumption, and for producing large amounts of polluting waste. Policy incentives are vitally important to dissuade the wealthy members of society to reduce their excessively consumptive lifestyles. viii) Poor governance: Governance affects efficiency within the civil service, equity, political stability and democracy. Equity and transparency have been highlighted as the most important aspects of governance which need to be addressed in Namibia. In addition, the slow adoption of decentralisation, the lack of intersectoral planning and co-ordination between ministries and stakeholders, and low levels of public participation in decision-making, on some key issues, threaten good governance in Namibia. ix) Unhealthy competition with neighbouring countries for shared natural resources: Improved and sustained co-operation and co-ordination regarding policies and policy-implementation is essential to avoid future inequitable use, pollution and conflict over shared water, marine fisheries and wildlife resources. x) Underdevelopment of human resources: Inequalities (particulary by race and gender) in education levels, skills training and capacity-building still exist in Namibia, despite efforts to redress past injustices. The resulting lack of skilled labour and limited human resources restricts private sector development and public sector functioning. Current trends of a declining skills-base (e.g. parks and wildlife management) are of great concern, and Namibia needs to decide on the road ahead in terms of management systems and partnership arrangements. While the creation of parastatals and agencies is based on sound principles and should continue, in some cases they have not performed well ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 177 and have resulted in negative perceptions. xi) The HIV/AIDS epidemic: The prevalence of the HIV/AIDS epidemic undermines human well-being and economic prosperity by reducing the quantity and quality of the labour force. In addition, it wipes out past investments in education and training and places a strain on communities and households that need to care for orphaned children, the sick and dying. xii) Limited research for development: Rapid modernisation threatens the survival of valuable traditional knowledge and practices in Namibia. Traditional knowledge is seldom acknowledged as providing any contribution to development - despite the fact that it is often better suited, than Eurocentric technology, to conditions in Namibia. Even though a lot of useful information currently exists, there are significant gaps in our knowledge regarding many issues relating to sustainable development and environmental issues. xiii)Unstable macroeconomic environment: A stable macroeconomic environment is vital for economic growth and poverty reduction. Despite some positive macroeconomic trends since the early 1990’s (for example, a steady reduction in the inflation rate, Namibia’s macroeconomic environment is not considered stable as yet. xiv)The adverse impacts of global atmospheric change: Under climate-change conditions there is the possibility that Namibia’s climate will become hotter and drier, with increased variability and more frequent and prolonged periods of drought. These conditions will exacerbate current problems regarding water management, food production and human health. Superimposed over the major issues that threaten sustainable development in Namibia are the country’s harsh climatic conditions, which increase vulnerability to land degradation, water resource depletion and restrict development activities. Sub-Vision Namibia develops a significantly more equitable distribution of social well being, through the sustainable utilization of natural resources in a mixed economy, characteristic of higher income countries, primarily through stronger growth and poverty-reduction. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 178 Sustainable Development Things to do • Establish domestically determined procedures that integrate environment and development issues into decision-making at all levels. • Develop or improve mechanisms that facilitate the involvement of all concerned individuals, groups and organisations in decision-making. • Namibians must work together and government should facilitate and embrace the contributions of civil society. • Promote actions that can effectively reverse unwelcome trends, and reduce threats to Namibia’s natural resource capital. • Allocate more resources to the previously neglected areas (regions). • Support household level income generating self-help projects (e.g., brick-making, sewing, etc.). • Support and encourage diversification of agricultural projects in communal areas • Encourage the establishment and provide support to agricultural cooperatives. • Create more credit opportunities for low income borrowers. • Accelerate the smooth redistribution of land. • Accelerate the process of removing the ‘Red Line’. • Develop aquaculture. Where we want to be (2030) • Partnership is maintained between government, private sector and civil society. • Partnership is upheld between urban and rural societies and, ultimately, between all members of Namibian society, males and females. • All Namibians are unified around their long-term development needs and initiatives, and promote and nurture partnerships. • Poverty and income disparities are significantly reduced. • All Namibians have access to economic opportunities. • Land is fairly distributed. • Economic development is sustainable. • Government continues to assist the poor with a spending emphasis on the provision of public goods. • Healthy, productive land with effective water and mineral cycling, leading to infrequent, low-level drought and flooding. • Farms and natural ecosystems are productive, diverse, stable and sustainable – socially, economically and ecologically. • Forests, savannas, deserts, wetlands, coastal and marine ecosystems are open, diverse, stable and productive. Current situation • Low land capability means that Namibia’s soils are easily degraded. • Issues of equity and transparency, the slow adoption of decentralization, are outstanding. • Inequalities in education levels, skills training and capacity-building still exist in Namibia, despite efforts to redress past injustices. • Namibia’s macroeconomic environment is not yet considered stable. • Namibia has a harsh climatic conditions, which increase vulnerability to land degradation • The threat of HIV/AIDS remains. • Gender inequality in access to productive resources Things to avoid • Ignore the effect of population dynamics • Unhealthy competition with neighbouring countries for shared natural resources. • Underdevelopment of human capital • Poor governance • Wasteful consumption patterns • Leave land issues unresolved over a long period of time Worst-case scenario • Government acts alone without much input from private sector and non-Governmental organisations; • Neglect of the land issues, leading to widespread public discontent and agitation; • Widespread environmental deterioration; • Highly unstable macroeconomic climate; • Underdeveloped human resources; • Increasing poverty and inequality. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 179 Objective To achieve the development of Namibia’s ‘Natural Capital’ for the benefit of the country’s social, economic and ecological well-being. Strategies • Harmonizing population dynamics and the impact of rapid urbanisation with social and economic development factors; • Reducing poverty and inequality, particularly gender-based inequality. • Solving Namibia’s land issues by choosing the most viable land–use options, implementing appropriate land distribution and resettlement policies, developing and maintaining economically and ecologically sound systems of tenure over all natural resources and, combating land degradation; • Reducing water stress, through management of human, agricultural and industrial water demand; and by improving access to potable water for the rural poor; • Improving development planning and reducing the negative impact of industrialization, by preparing economically and ecologically rational development plans; • Ensuring progress on the Environmental Management Act (EMA) to prevent the erosion of Namibia’s renewable natural resource capital, and to optimise the benefits from Namibia’s non-renewable natural resources (i.e minerals); • Enhancing biodiversity conservation through improvements in the policy environment, extension of the protected areas network, and improvement of biodiversity information; • Improving governance by speeding up the devolution process, improving service provision and resource management efficiency, upholding principles of human rights, civil liberties and multi-party democracy, and by maintaining and improving peace, stability and political commitment; • Improving co-ordination and planning with neighbouring countries for shared natural resources • Building up Namibia’s human capital through education, training and capacity building, including meeting Namibia’s HIV/AIDS epidemic and other health challenges; • Improving access to existing knowledge and filling in knowledge gaps through improving access to knowledge, research and development; • Creating a more stable macro-economic environment and stimulating private entrepreneurship; and • Preparing for the adverse impacts of climate change. 6.2 International Relations Since Independence in 1990, Namibia has occupied a high international profile. This high profile has contributed towards countering the widely perceived marginalisation of the African continent. Namibia exemplified to the international community a model African country with democratic governance, peace, political and civil stability, the rule of law and low level of corruption. Namibia hosted the SADC Summit that transformed SADCC into SADC. It was also in Windhoek in August 2000 that SADC was restructured in order to reflect an organisation that responds best to the needs of the new millennium. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 180 In 1991, the task of co-odination of the sector for Marine Fisheries and Resources within the SADC region was given to Namibia. Through its efforts Namibia developed the SADC Fisheries Protocol which was signed by the Heads of State and Government of all the SADC member states, in 2001. The Protocol has the objective to promote responsible and sustainable use of the living aquatic resources and aquatic ecosystems within the SADC region. Namibia agreed to a proposal to peacefully resolve the potentially explosive issue of the Kasikili Island with Botswana. Both countries agreed to refer the matter to the ICJ in The Hague, with the express undertaking to accept whatever verdict was reached. As a mid-wife for Namibia’s birth (Independence), the UN became a forum where Namibia played some significant roles. Namibia was elected as Africa’s Non Permanent member of the Security Council for the period 1999 to 2000; Namibia held a rotating Presidency of the Security Council in August 2000 and led the Security Council’s fact-finding mission to East Timor, which paved the way for an independence referendum and UN peacekeeping intervention; an assumption by Namibia of the Presidency of the 54th Session General Assembly in 1999, for 12 months. African Heads of State and Governments, in June 2001, launched the successor of the OAU, the A.U. This step represents, historically, the closer political, economic and institutional integration of the African continent. NEPAD has also been formulated to be implemented within the AU framework. It is an African Recovery blueprint for development strategies for the entire continent. Africa stands a better chance with NEPAD in realising its ideals, because NEPAD serves as a pillar of the African Union. NEPAD would contain projects and programmes, well formulated and properly costed, that would be marketed to donor countries for financial support. In the long run, the AU will more or less resemble the EU. While espousing the Pan-Africanist ideal of a united Africa, the building blocks of the AU should be the existing regional organisations, such as SADC, COMESA, ECOWAS, East African Community, etc. It is easier to unite a number of large regional blocks that have achieved important internal integration milestones, than to unite 51 disparate countries. Namibia’s primary political, diplomatic and security arena is the African continent. What happens in Africa would affect Namibia’s vital interest to varying degrees. Namibia operates a coherent national policy response to counteract any negative external factors and accentuate the positive factors. The ‘Foreign Policy Response Model’ presented in Fig 6.1, is used to illustrate how Namibia could deal with the external challenges which will impact on the country in the years up to 2030, and which will impact, to a greater or lesser degree, on the attainment of the objectives set by Vision 2030. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 181 Figure 6.1: Foreign Policy Response Model ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 182 The point of departure of the model is the assumption that Namibia’s primary political, diplomatic and security arena is the African continent. What happens in Africa affects Namibia’s vital interest to varying degrees, and there is a need for a coherent national policy response to counteract the negatives and accentuate the positives. The intellectual point of departure of the model is a so-called “concentric circle of interests”. Fig. 6.1 illustrates the policy inter-relationships between Namibia (represented by the rectangle on the left of the model) and the rest of Africa. The smallest circle represents the four bordering states with which Namibia has developed bilateral security management systems in the form of Joint Commissions on Defence and Security. The middle circle represents the rest of the SADC nations not bordering Namibia. The outer concentric circle in the model represents the rest of the African continent beyond the SADC region. Outside of the concentric circles is the rest of the world, where Namibia’s interaction would be conducted within the context of the UN and its institutions and resolutions. Namibia will continue to play an active role in international relations. The Namibian Government will campaign for an increased role of a multilateral approach towards international relations. For this reason, Namibia will continue to pursue the reform and democratisation process of the UN system. At a continental level, Government will support the full functioning of the AU so that the Union can play a pivotal role in ensuring sustainable development. NEPAD will serve as a recovery development plan and an economic engine. Sub-Vision A new international order, has been established based on sovereign equality of nations, where sustainable development, peace and human progress is ensured ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 183 International Relations Things to do • Implement international conventions and protocols • Pursue multilateral approach towards international relations; • Collaborate with AU to play a pivotal role in ensuring sustainable development, with NEPAD as a recovery development plan and an economic engine; • Pursue the reform and democratisation of the UN system; • Play an active role in international relations. Where we want to be (2030) • Existence of peace and international order among all nations achieved; • Strengthened regional organisations and democratised international institutions; • Strengthened democracy and good governance, regionally and internationally; • Concrete strides towards African unification. • Namibia continues to play an active role in regional and international relations; • Namibia becomes a key player in defining democracy in the African context; • Namibia continues to mirror good governance and democracy regionally and internationally. • Bilateral relations with the international community established and maintained Current situation • Since Independence, the country has occupied a high international profile. • The UN became a forum where Namibia played some significant roles. • Namibia exemplified to the international community a model African country with democratic governance, peace, political and civil stability, the rule of law and low level of corruption. • Namibia was also active in the formulation of the New Partnership for African Development (NEPAD), to be implemented within the AU framework. • Namibia has been active within the region; it hosted the SADC Summit that transformed SADCC into SADC. Things to avoid • Reduce interest in international forums inolving trade, diplomacy, and investment. • Fail to honour bilateral and multilateral agreements. • Neglect capacity-building • Disrespect international borders should be respected. • Reduce diplomatic missions in as many countries. • Pay lip service towards the practical realization of the African Union Worst-case scenario • Namibia becomes inactive and ineffective in regional and international relations; • Namibia becomes a poor example of defining democracy in the African context; • Namibia mirrors a bad image in good governance and democracy regionally and internationally. • Limited bilateral relations with the international community. Objective To strive towards a new international order based on sovereign equality of nations where sustainable development, peace and human progress is ensured. Strategies • Focusing Namibia’s primary political, diplomatic and security efforts on the African continent. • Ensuring harmony between Namibia and the four bordering countries that share bilateral security management systems of Joint Commissions on Defence and Security. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 184 • Seeking international cooperation to reduce the spread of HIV/AIDS. • Upholding, with the SADC nations, the regional approach as mandated by the Protocol on Politics, Defence and Security (Namibia would act in concert with other SADC member states). • Following the UN and AU mandates in Namibia’s relationships with the rest of Africa beyond the SADC region, with emphasis on conflict prevention/resolution and peacekeeping. • Upholding international conventions in relationships with the rest of the world, where Namibia’s interaction is within the context of the UN and its institutions. 6.3 Development Co-operation Development Co-operation is the process through which aid is provided by External Funding Agencies (EFAs) to recipient countries in order to achieve a mutually agreed goal. Each sovereign and equal partner realises the objectives that it has intended to achieve. The development partners’ relationship should be co-ordinated and managed very carefully. Aid should be supplementary to the recipient country’s own domestic resources and should not supplant them. Between 1990 and 1998, grants to Namibia doubled (from N$ 283 million to N$ 780 million). During the same period, grants and soft loans represented, on average, about 12.5% of the revenues of the Government of Namibia. It can, therefore, be stated that Namibia is not aid-dependent as is the case with a number of African countries where aid constitutes more that 50% of the government budget. Bilateral donors have provided the bulk of development assistance. Since 1991, bilateral donors have contributed about 75% of the total aid while multilateral donors have provided about 25%. Assistance from the UN Agencies has dramatically decreased since Namibia’s independence (UNDP is a case in point). In 1990, UN Agencies contributed some N$ 12.5 million that accounted for 20% of multilateral development assistance, while in 1998, that figure dropped to N$ 9.3 million, representing 5.1% of multilateral development assistance. The assistance from the bilateral donors has steadily increased. About 50% of the development assistance has gone to finance human resources development and social sectors (potable water, housing and sanitation). Some 17% of the aid resources were invested in natural resources sectors (agriculture, forestry and fisheries), while 16% went to transport and communication sectors. The rest were invested in administration (development) and regional development. External development assistance should be guided by the national development priorities and geared towards institutional and human resources and capacity building, poverty reduction, employment creation and income-generating projects. External assistance should also improve the status of marginalised groups, promote environmental sustainability, revive and sustain the economic growth and development of rural areas and the provision of essential services. It should also promote democracy, human rights, good governance, participatory development, transparency and accountability. However, external assistance should not perpetuate dependency or undermine national priorities, development efforts and policies. The main priority of ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 185 development cooperation remains poverty reduction through economic growth. This can only be achieved in the long run through sustainable development that is socially balanced and where local/grassroots people participate. Environmental preservation is a new interest of the 1990’s. It is now integrated with development issues for commitment to sustainable development. Emphasis is now put on rural and urban development as an integrated approach. Incorporation of the rural-urban link in development assistance is a long process. Another trend is the move towards decentralised cooperation, a political instrument that also creates a new financial approach. Government spending for development cooperation is then organised on a local rather than a central lever. There is increased cooperation between government and NGOs whereby the role that NGOs play in the development process is recognised by the government. To this end, the Partnership Policy between Government and Civil Society is to be finalised in 2004. Sub-Vision Namibia has achieved a level of transformation in the flow of development co operation resources, and has advanced from a recipient of grant assistance to a provider of assistance to countries in need. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 186 Development Co-operation Things to do • Develop medium term plan for development programs to develop guidelines for the acceptance of donor support. • Strengthen relations/cooporation between Namibia and its development cooporating partners. • Assign diplomatic representatives in as many countries as possible • Increase industrial and trading base; • Balance the utilisation of Namibia’s natural resources between Namibia and investors who exploit our natural resources; • Have a conscious policy that ensures that foreign experts impart skills and knowledge to Namibians so that local people replace the foreign experts when they leave the country; • Maintain harmonious relations with development partners. Current situation • Between 1990 and 1998, grants to Namibia doubled (from N$ 283 million to N$ 780 million); but grants and soft loans represented, on average, about 12.5% of the revenues of the Government. • Namibia is not aid-dependent as is the case with a number of African countries. • The main priority of development cooperation remains poverty reduction through economic growth. • About 50% of the development assistance has gone to finance human resources development and social sectors (potable water, housing and sanitation). • Some 17% of the aid resources were invested in the natural resources sectors (agriculture, forestry and fisheries) while 16% went to transport and communication sectors. • The rest were invested in administration (development) and regional development. Things to avoid • Dependence on donor support. • Conflict of interest on the part of the external organization such as donors. • Initiate unsustainable small and medium income generating projects. • Overexploitation of natural resources. • Replace internal resources with external resources. Where we want to be (2030) • Development cooperation with all friendly nations is strong and is based largely on trade and mutual exchange of opportunities; • Dependency on foreign develop ment aid is eliminated; • Protocol signed with donors in ac cordance with the aims and objec tives of Vision 2030. • Namibia continues to be a mem ber of the global village. • Namibia is playing an effective role in regional and international organi zations. • Peaceful negotiation with other countries achieved. Worst-case scenario • Over-dependence on foreign aid. • Weak natural resource base. • Unsustainable development programmes in place. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 187 Objectives • To ensure that Namibia becomes a donor country and does not receive foreign aid any longer; • To achieve qualitative change in relations between Namibia and industrialised countries, which transforms Namibia from an aid-recipient country to a trading state and business partner. Strategies • Sensitising Namibian business people and utility companies to exploit the opportunities that exist in the African market; • Through regional and international fora, Namibia vigorously promotes free trade and investment flows and the transfers of appropriate technology; • Encouraging more foreign direct investment (FDI); • Strengthening and diversifying relations between Namibia and its development partners; • Gradually replacing external resources with internal resources. • Maintaining peaceful coexistence with neighbouring countries. • Formulating and implementing policies on Development Cooperation 6.4 Peace and Security The 1990’s was a decade that witnessed great events taking place around the world, and have had a direct influence on Namibia and other African countries. The decade marked the end of the Cold War with the breaking up of the Soviet Union into independent states. In the midst of all these, Namibia became an independent, sovereign and democratic state. Many African countries also started to embrace democratic rule and free-market economic policies, thereby paving a genuine way for the fight against poverty and under-development. Apart from internal socio-economic factors that usually influence Namibia’s development, other external factors that influence the course of our socio-economic development would have to be highlighted. Among such factors are those of peace and security. On the African continent, armed conflicts and civil unrests are the main threats to peace and security. Armed conflicts have occurred in many ways. They either come in a form of civil wars or territorial disputes between two countries. The African continent has also witnessed a number civil unrests, normally characterised by student and labour unrests; ethnically motivated violence or coup d’etat. All these actions may lead to devastating effect on the local population and the most vulnerable being women and children. Armed conflicts and civil unrests lead to the displacement of populations, destruction of property, the breakdown of civil authority and, ultimately, impedes socio-economic development. Since Independence, Namibia has enjoyed peace and political stability. The security of the country had so far not been under any serious threat. Prior to the cessation of civil conflict in Angola, Namibia had to deal with some cross border hostilities on the part of Unita. The secessionist attempts in the Caprivi Region in August 1999 provided an impetus for vigilance against possible civil strife. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 188 The security of Namibia also impinges upon its active involvement in regional and international peace initiatives. Since Independence, Namibia has been involved in a number of peace-keeping efforts. International Syndicates are posing serious and credible threats to Namibia through organised crime. Money laundering, drug trafficking, human trafficking, arms smuggling and natural resource exploitation are the focus of international crime syndicates. Namibia’s rich diamond resources and well-established financial services industry could entice the syndicates to set up their operations in Namibia. This would create a serious political and socio-economic destabilising situation in Namibia. Sub- Vision Collective regional and international peace and security have been accomplished. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 189 Peace and Security Things to do • Formulate and implement a coherent modernisation plan for the procurement of modern military hardware. • Maintain a credible defence posture that is qualitatively on par with the best defence force in the region. • Improve Namibia’s capacity for gathering intelligence information to avoid the repeat of the Caprivi Secessionist movement anywhere else and the Kasikili Island surprise. • Employ Regional Security Arrangements to create collective security framework based on the SADC Protocol on Politics, Defence and Security. Where we want to be (2030) • Regional peace and security guaranteed. • Namibia’s capacity for gathering intelligence information is strong and effective. • Namibia has a well-trained and well-equipped army, and adequate infrastructure for the entire Defence Force. • Namibia operates a modernised Defence Force. Current situation • Namibia is partially a product of international solidarity that forced the defeat of the Apartheid system. • Namibia was quick to claim its rightful place in the international arena by partaking in the UN Peacekeeping missions in Cambodia and Angola. • Namibia participated in initiatives that were aimed at strengthening SADC regional security. • Namibia also played a significant role in the peaceful transition of South Africa to a democratic dispensation, a process which influenced positively the return of Walvis Bay to Namibia. • Namibia enjoys internal peace and stability, but a number of external threats come from non traditional forms of conflicts. • Caprivi Secessionists attempted to cause political confusion in 1999, but were quickly contained. • International Syndicates are posing serious and credible threat to Namibia through organised crime. Things to avoid • Incoherent defence plan • Poor training and equipment for the Defence Force • De-emphasise intelligence-gathering • Limited cooperation in regional peace Protocols Worst-case scenario • Regional instability and disunity • Armed conflicts/insurrection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 190 Objective To achieve peace and security within the nation and the international community. Strategies • Using collective security as an instrument of national security. • Employing Regional security to thwart destabilising elements by denying them succour and sanctuary in SADC member states. • Operationalizing Protocols in terms of military doctrine, sharing of intelligence information, regional security institutions and joint intervention procedures. • Providing military training for all youth, with emphasis on military discipline. • Ensuring professionalism in the defence mechanism by having a well-trained and well-equipped army, and adequate infrastructure for the entire Defence Force. • Reducing HIV/AIDS infection. • Modernizing the Namibian Defence Force to ensure the effective participation of Namibia in regional, continental and international conflict resolution and peacekeeping missions. 6.5 Regional Integration Regional integration refers to agreements between groups of countries in a geographic, regional attempt/effort to reduce and remove tariff and non-tariff barriers to the free flow of goods, services and factors of production between each other. It has been perceived as a vehicle for overcoming the constraints of small economically size of nations. The ability to industrialise has been hampered by the small economic size, especially in the area of import substitution, a concept that many African countries adopted soon after their Independence. Regional integration was, therefore, perceived as a means to facilitate the structural transformation of African economies. Trade creation and trade diversions are two concepts of regional integration. Regional integration should foster trade creation and avoid trade diversion. Trade creation occurs when an economic union leads to the growth of intra-union trade (when union members experiencing expanded trade have lower costs than the rest of the world suppliers). Trade diversion occurs when an economic union leads to an expansion in intra-union trade in which the costs are higher than those in competitor countries in the rest of the world. Currently, Namibia belongs to about four regional blocks, namely SADC, SACU, CMA and ACP. i) Southern African Development Community (SADC): SADC has a membership of 14 Southern and Eastern African countries. The Windhoek Treaty of 1992 changed the Southern Africa Development Co-ordinating Conference to the Southern Africa Development Community. In August 2000, the Windhoek Summit approved the restructuring of SADC in order to make its structures and institutions appropriate to carry out its mandate successfully. ii) Southern African Customs Union (SACU): The Southern African Customs Union (SACU) Agreement was concluded in 1969 between South Africa, Botswana, Lesotho and Swaziland, replacing the Customs Union Agreement of 1910. Namibia became part of the Agreement formally in 1990, after her independence. Under the 1969 Agreement, the Union aims to maintain free exchange of goods and services between member countries. It provides for a Common Excise Tariff (CET), which is set unilaterally by South Africa. Under ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 191 the old Agreement (1969), South Africa is the custodian of the SACU revenue pool, therefore, all customs and excise duties collected are paid into South Africa’s national Revenue Fund. The revenue is shared among the members states, according to the formula as stipulated in the 1969 Agreement. Each member state’s share is therefore calculated accordingly, except for South Africa, which receives the residual. For the BLNS countries, SACU revenue constitutes a greater share of their revenue. For Namibia, the SACU Revenue accounts for about 30 per cent of its total revenue. With the CET being set unilaterally by South Africa, this arrangement is viewed to be undemocratic and non-transparent. Amongst others this called for the re negotiation of the 1969 SACU Agreement. The re-negotiation process started off in 1994 with the objectives of democratising the governance of SACU, setting of new institutional arrangements, and deciding on a new revenue formula, amongst others. After a lengthy and protracted re-negotiation process, the new Agreement was finally signed in October 2002. iii) Common Monetary Area (CMA): In 1986, the CMA agreement between South Africa, Lesotho, and Swaziland replaced the Rand Monetary Area Agreement. The currency of South Africa circulates in these countries. The CMA is divided into 3 categories: definitional; operational; and economic. The definitional category provides legal interpretation of the agreement. The operational category outlines the operational procedures, such as the collection and exchange of monetary statistics. It deals with the provision of consultation on matters of common interest, procedures for settling disputes and procedures for terminating/amending the agreement. The economic category deals with issues such as legal tender, intra-CMA transfer of funds, access to capital markets, foreign exchange transactions and compensatory agreements and payments to LNS countries for using the Rand (on par with their own currencies. Monetary policy in CMA implies that the convertibility requirement means that foreign exchange assets back the domestic currency issued. Membership of the CMA also implies that Namibia, Lesotho and Swaziland lose control over the nominal exchange rate as an instrument of economic policy. iv) African Caribbean and Pacific (ACP): In 1975, nine members of the EU and 45 African, Caribbean and Pacific countries signed the Lome Convention I in Togo. The EU was interested in securing the supply of raw materials and export markets for their products. ACP countries were interested in aid in order to boost their economic development. This included Stabex and Sysmin facilities to soften the impacts arising from uncertainty in weather conditions; fluctuations in prices of minerals; and dependency on a single or few export commodities. Currently, the Cotonou Agreement is being implemented. It was signed in Benin in June 2000. It provides for Euro 24.7 billion for a period of 20 years (2000 – 2020). Namibia, which is dependent on export earnings of mining products, received assistance of about Euro 40 million through Sysmin since 1994. The following entities benefited the Namibia Institute of Mining and Technology: the Okorusu Fluorspar Mine; and the Small Miners Assistance Fund. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 192 Sub-Vision Namibia enjoys full regional integration in terms of socio-economic and political structures through effective supra-national organisations. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 193 Regional Integration Things to do • Strike a balance between regionalization and globalization. • Deliberately help to initiate strategies for strengthening the capacity of regional structures. • Namibia to continue playing an important role in the region and Africa as a whole. • Continue to apply the principles of democracy and human rights. Where we want to be (2030) • Complete regional integration with full functioning institutions; • Concrete strides toward African unification through SADC. • Namibia is part and parcel of organised regional structures and contributes to the political, economic, social well-being of the people. Worst-case scenario • Poor information on foreign affairs. • Breakdown of communication among regional partners. • Border restrictions hampering trade and political communication. Current situation • Currently, Namibia belongs to about 5 regional blocks, namely; SADC; SACU; COMESA; CMA and; ACP. • The Cotonou Agreement, signed in 2000, is being implemented. It provides for Euro 24.7 billion for a period of 20 years (2000 – 2020). Namibia, which is dependent on export earnings of mining products, received assistance of about Euro 40 million through SYSMIN since 1994. The following entities benefited: NIMT; the Okorusu Fluorspar Mine and the Small Miners Assistance Fund. Things to avoid • Regional Organizations, such as SADC, SACU, COMESA, CMA, etc., continue to operate with overlapping functions and objectives. • Uncoordinated foreign policy • Poor response to regional initiatives • Foreign trade barriers Objective To ensure that Namibia is part and parcel of organised regional structures in which it can contribute effectively to the political, economic, social well being of the people. Strategies • Playing a leading role in ensuring the establishment of effective and operational supra-national regional institutions; • Implementing and observing all the SADC Protocols in order to benefit maximally. • Strengthening the effective functioning of the AU. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 194 Targets for the External Environment The approach to forecasting the future external environment is to sub-divide the 29-year timeframe of Vision 2030 into 5-yearly intervals. The assumption is that the present events in the external environment shall play out mutatis mutandis from their present forms till approximately 2005, hence the selection of the 2006 2010, as the point of departure of the model. Within these 5-yearly periods, the external environment has been forecasted, using scenario techniques based on best case, and worst case. The best case scenario is chosen for Vision 2030 as follows: 2006 – 2010 • UNITA has laid down arms and is now part of the political landscape of Angola. The Angolan government continues with the implementation of a multi-billion dollar reconstruction and development plan, with support from the international community. An important component is a national re-integration scheme and small-arms buy-back programme supported by the UN, AU and SADC. • The Inter-Congolese Dialogue has culminated in a new democratic constitution and free and fair elections. The new democratically elected president is committed to national reconciliation, unity and economic reconstruction. The international community, in exchange for wide-ranging economic reforms, cancels Mobuto-era debts. • Zimbabwe is on a steady course of economic development. The land reform exercise is completed to the satisfaction of all stakeholders, and significant foreign investment is flowing into the country. • South Africa’s third democratically elected president has been sworn in, and the results of the GEAR policy are being manifested through higher GDP growth rates, increased foreign direct investment and significant job creation in the economy. • Stronger regional institutions have been created that are better able to help member states resolve internal conflicts, and plans are under consideration for supra-national institutions like the SADC Court of Appeal, SADC Court of Arbitration, SADC Monetary Policy Commission, etc. • SACU Secretariat is established, with a Council of Ministers, a Commission composed of senior officials as an advisory body to the Council, Technical Committees, and as a sanctioning authority. • Namibia has implemented the visa requirements for AGOA and enjoys the benefit of access to the United States of America market. Namibia reaps the benefits of AGOA by exporting its goods (textiles) to the United States free of duties. This will contribute to the diversification of the Namibian exports away from the traditional mineral exports. • More countries implement the SADC Trade Protocol. Member countries start reducing tariffs among each other. Category A product tariffs are immediately phased out, while those on products in category B, are gradually removed. • Namibia continues to enjoy non-reciprocal access to the EU markets, thus increasing its beef and grape exports to the Union. • Debt-relief has been affected in a significant number of AU member states, including Nigeria, Algeria and Kenya, allowing previously highly indebted ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 195 poor countries, to undertake comprehensive economic reforms with a “clean slate”. • A joint AU-UN-EU-World Bank conflict-resolution framework is created to provide an effective African conflict early-warning system, conflict resolution framework and intervention procedures/mechanisms/ capabilities. • Namibia and its relevant neighbouring SADC states have reached a binding agreement on their mutual borders, both on land and maritime. • Namibia has become actively involved in the implementation of NEPAD and has been invited to become part of its steering mechanism. 2010 – 2015 • Regional institutions are being strengthened. A common regional currency and central bank is in the process of being created. Several accruements of national sovereignty and state power are transferred to SADC, and a SADC Constitution- that overrides or supersedes national constitutions is agreed upon. More SADC countries begin to converge their macro economic indicators. • Angola proceeds on a path of democratic governance, reconstruction and development. New oil discoveries are made in deep-water areas, providing an impetus to further economic recovery. Anti-bandit operations are finally concluded with the surrender of the last armed bandit gangs. • The UN Security Council is reformed with the status of permanent member state being enlarged to include one regional power from each of the continents. This provides for a more democratic form of regional representation. The powers of the reformed Security Council in terms of international peace and security are increased. • Two major transmission systems from Grand Inga in the Democratic Republic of the Congo are to deliver cheap power to Southern Africa and Europe, one line down through Angola and Namibia to South Africa and another north through the Sahara to Western Europe. • Conflict resolution mechanisms are firmly in place at the regional and continental levels, allowing for effective rapid response to emerging conflicts in or between member states of the AU. • SADC Trade Protocol ratified and implemented by all member states, which leads to the expansion of intra-SADC trade. • SACU renegotiations complete, and relevant institutions solving disputes and determining common external tariffs, have been set up. The BLNS countries reviewed their taxation base in order to forestall themselves from the effect of the EU-South African Free Trade Agreement. • SADC establishes a common external tariff, a move that will lead to the formation of the customs union. 2015 – 2020 • A regional central bank is fully established and a core group of states, including Namibia, introduce the new regional currency. The SADC central bank is responsible for the monetary policy in the SADC monetary area, covering the initial core states. • A directly elected SADC regional parliament is established with powers to review, harmonise and veto national legislation. • The AU continues with efforts at continental unity through the creation of ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 196 various supra-national political, economic, judicial and legislative bodies. • SADC member states implement policies that will lead to convergence in macro-economic indicators as an important criterion for monetary integration. • SACU renegotiations completed and relevant institutions established. These are Boards of Trade and Tariffs to set up the common external tariffs for SACU. South Africa Board of Trade and Tariffs is no longer the sole institution to set up the common external tariff. The revenue sharing formula of SACU revisited to give fair share of revenue to the BLNS. 2020 – 2025 • SADC Protocol on Politics, Defence and Security is upgraded to the SADC Mutual Defence Treaty. • All SADC member states adopt a common regional constitution with key provisions such as abolishing the death penalty, protection of human rights and democratic governance. • A common regional foreign policy framework and institutions are created, allowing the member states to better meet the challenges and uncertainties of an evolving world order. • More states adopt the common currency after meeting macro-economic eligibility criteria. 2025 - 2030 • Concrete steps are taken by the regional bodies (SADC, ECOWAS, Maghreb Union, and East-African Community) to harmonise political, economic and institutional arrangements as the precursor to continental unity. • The AU establishes the African Monetary Stabilisation Fund with the assistance of the Bretton Woods institutions to provide balance of payments and macro-economic stabilisation support to AU member states in need. • More legislative powers are devolved by member states to the SADC regional parliament. • Namibia’s development co-operation relationship with its international collaboration partners shifts from the weighted association of donor/ recipient towards the balanced connection between sovereign trading partners. • Achievement of regional peace and stability in region. • Regular democratic, free and fair elections are held throughout the Southern African Region. • Land in the Southern African Region is equitably redistributed. • Absence of crime in Namibia and armed conflicts in the region. • The Southern African Region has established a collective response towards bringing to an end the illegal trafficking of small arms. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 197 • Namibia contributes actively towards the attainment of strengthened regional organisations and democratised international institutions; • Namibia continues to serve, both regionally and internationally, as an example of a strong democracy and a model of good governance. • Namibia continues to further the strides towards African unification. • Namibia benefits significantly from investments in economic and infrastructural development in order to compete globally. • Namibia is fully integrated into the global trading and financial system. • The Namibian economy becomes lucrative, to such an extent that there is net inflow of capital from other countries into Namibia’s economy. 6.6 Globalisation Globalisation is the integration of national economics throughout the world through trade, capital flows, the exchange of technology and information and movement of people. Since the 1990’s, globalisation has become a major topic of discussion and concern in economic circles. The move towards a more integrated world has opened up a wide potential for greater growth, and it presents opportunity for developing countries to raise their living standards. However, concerns about the risks of marginalisation of developing countries have given rise to a sense of misgiving among developing countries. Globalisation benefits consumers and producers in the form of increasing trade, which will give them wider choice of low cost goods, often incorporating more advanced technologies. Access to world markets allows countries to exploit their comparative advantages more intensively, while being exposed to the benefits of increased international competition. The rapid increase in capital and private ventures/opportunities available to Namibia, has accelerated the pace of its development beyond what it could otherwise have achieved. The benefits of globalisation outweigh the costs of that free trade results in countries that specialise in the production of those goods efficiently, while importing goods that they cannot produce efficiently, from other countries. However, the risks of globalisation include the following: the investment capital seeks out the most efficient markets, while producers and consumer seek the most competitive suppliers. This would expose and intensify existing structural weaknesses in individual economies. The economic globalisation and restructuring through new technologies has created many options for capital flight, for instance, relocation of production and outsourcing. Critics of globalisation assert that global economic power is shifting away from national governments towards supra-national institutions (WTO, WB/ IMF). Globalisation is characterised by the fact that decisions that affect a lot of people are no longer made by national governments, but instead by a group of unelected bureaucrats in the supra-national institutions. Globalisation would not bring Namibia to the level of the USA and Japan overnight. As globalisation progresses, we should focus on the development of our own ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 198 resources, otherwise globalisation in some sense could be suicidal. We need to identify a competitive edge upon which Namibia’s position in the world economy will be based. We should strengthen our industrial capacity in order to pursue realistic goals dependent on our natural endowment. There has been an enormous increase in global trade and in private capital flows to developing countries. However, Africa has not kept pace with this growth. Foreign direct investment, for instance, has increased to all developing countries, but Africa’s share is below 5%. Such development points to a trend towards Africa’s marginalisation in world trade and FDI. The challenge facing Vision 2030 for Namibia is to design public policies that maximise the downside risks of destabilisation and marginalisation. With regard to investment promotion, we should also encourage investors who are already in Namibia. By the year 2030, local human resources should be adequate for development promotion. Tourism offers Namibia a huge opportunity for development of our economy. To enjoy this opportunity in the long run, peace and stability should be our partner. Consequently, tourism should be promoted in order to contribute to our economy. Less privileged people should also be involved in this sector. For Namibia to succeed in the tourism industry, the country should be marketed extensively abroad. Globalisation on its own would not bring us to the level of the developed countries. We should simultaneously focus on the development of our own resources. Namibia should identify a competitive edge upon which her position in the world economy will be based. Sub-Vision The benefits of technology, trade, investment and capital flows have contributed to a significant reduction in poverty in most regions of the world, and Namibia enjoys optimal participation and integration in the global village. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 199 Globalisation Things to do • Establish and maintain structures (roads, telecommunications media and health services) that can compete with the rest of the world. • Create positive atmosphere and incentives for foreign direct investments. • Create awareness of Namibia’s potentialy. • Promote human and institutional capacity-building. • Assess and capitalise on the country’s comparative advantage in the sectors such as, Agriculture,Tourism, Fishing and Mining. • Train Namibians to acquire skills and knowledge to be able to compete in the context of globalisation. Design public policies that maximise the downside risks of destabilisation and marginalisation. • Encourage investors who are already in Namibia. • Develop local human resources for development promotion. • Promote tourism in order to contribute to our economy. • Focus on the development of our own resources. • Identify a competitive edge upon which Namibia’s position in world economy will be based. Where we want to be (2030) • Namibia has achieved significant investments in economic and infrastructural development, and is competing globally; • Namibia is fully integrated into the global trading and financial system; • The Namibian economy is very lucrative so that there is net inflow of capital from other countries into the country’s economy. • Access to world markets allows Namibia to exploit their comparative advantages more intensively, while being exposed to the benefits of increased international competition. • The rapid increase in capital and private ventures/opportunities available to Namibia, has accelerated the pace of its development beyond what it could otherwise have achieved. Current situation • Globalisation is the integration of national economics throughout the world through trade, capital flows, the exchange of technology and information and movement of people. • Globalisation would not bring Namibia to the level of the USA and Japan overnight. • There has been an enormous increase in global trade and in private capital flows to developing countries. However, Africa has not kept pace with this growth. • Foreign direct investment, for instance, has increased for all developing countries, but Africa’s share is below 5%. • Such development points to a trend towards Africa’s marginalisation in world trade and FDI. The challenge facing Vision 2030 for Namibia is to design public policies that maximise the downside risks of destabilisation and marginalisation. Things to avoid • Namibia’s potential is unknown to the global village • Underdevelopment of human capacity. • Creating barriers against international transfer of technology. • Trade barriers. • Policy lapses. Worst-case scenario • Namibia’s share in the global economy remains small; • Namibia experiences large–scale movement of capital across national boundaries. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 200 Objective To ensure that Namibia enjoys optimal participation and integration in the global village. Strategies Namibia’s strategic response to globalisation include the following: • Ensuring good governance; • Maintaining quality and efficiency of infrastructure, industrial production and services; • Improving productivity of labour and promoting harmonious labour relations. • Remaining competitive in the international market. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 201 6.7 Democratic Governance The Republic of Namibia was established as a sovereign, secular, democratic and unitary State based on the principles of democracy, the rule of law and justice for all. Therefore the Constitution is the basic law which contains, inter alia, all the ingredients of a democratic state including peace, security and political stability. In creating a democratic state, the Constitution provides and protects fundamental rights and freedoms of all Namibians. The freedom of speech and press is well established in our society. In order to strengthen these freedoms Namibia has more than three active and very critical newspapers, which contain all kinds of news and information, including comments from individual persons. None of these newspapers have been subjected to harassment of any kind during the past ten years. In addition, the Namibian Broadcasting Corporation transmits live talk-shows on both radio and television where people call-in to express their views without any form of punishment or persecution. In maintaining peace and political stability, freedom of expression is important in order for people to express their views on issues that may disturb peace and political stability. The freedom of the press also contributes to peace and stability in that the people should be informed of the policies of the government by independent monitors. This, in turn develops the nation to make informed choices when electing representatives to government. The Constitution is the supreme law of Namibia. It is designed to guide the nation in the development of it’s policies. The rights that are entrenched cannot be taken away from the citizens; it signifies importance to the person and also to the development of the human race. Although Namibia did not choose to deal with its past injustices in the form of a Truth Commission, the government has supported and adopted policies aimed at reconciliation. None of the previously disadvantaged persons were expelled from the country due to their involvement with the previous colonial government. Instead, the government, in particular the Ministry of Basic Education and Culture has endorsed policies aimed at integrating all races in all schools in Namibia. This was necessary since, at Independence, there were different schools for different races. The National Assembly enacted the Racial Discrimination Act, to punish discrimination based on race, and to prohibit the dissemination of ideas promoting one race or tribe as superior to the others. Namibians of all races currently live together in the country. This, in many ways, is an indicator that there is peace in the country. The weakness of peace and political stability in Namibia lies in the economic disparities between the poor and the rich. The reduction of poverty is difficult to address constitutionally since it depends upon the availability of resources. The main threat to peace and political stability is violations of human rights. Without good governance and accountability it would be difficult to achieve and maintain peace, political stability and sustainable development. As was witnessed in the 1990’s in Africa, the masses rose against regimes that were perceived to be corrupt, unaccountable and not pursuing a people-oriented development agenda. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 202 Namibia was fortunate that it gained its independence in the early 1990’s, a period that marked a trend towards democratisation in most of Sub-Saharan Africa. It has been observed that gaining independence at that particular point in time ensured a significant inclusion of democratic principles in the Namibian Constitution. The Namibian Constitution has in place various safeguards that ensure accountability in government. It clearly provides for the separation of powers between the Executive, the Legislature and the Judiciary (see Articles 40, 63 and 78 of the Namibian Constitution). It further provides, among others, for the establishment of the Public Service Commission (article 112), and the Office of the Ombudsman (article 89). These are all important administrative and democratic safeguards. If effectively implemented, they will enhance openness in government. It should also be noted that the Public Service Commission’s procedures for appointing personnel at different levels of the Public Service, strengthen accountability and transparency. In addition, the Ombudsman’s Office was created to promote administrative accountability in the public service. Sub-Vision Namibia maintains, consolidates and extends the good governance practices of a multi-party democracy with high levels of participation, rights, freedoms and legitimacy (under the Constitution), which continue to serve as a model for other countries. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 203 Democratic Governance Things to do • Consolidate and realise the existing constitutional principles. • Continue to hold regular democratic elections • Ensure the autonomy and effectiveness of the Electoral Commission. • Strengthen popular support for electoral mechanisms • Sustain and improve voter education programs • Continue to allocate funds to election commission for civic education. • Encourage other participants (parties, NGO’s, and others) to contribute to these efforts. • Strengthen contributions of electronic media to these efforts • Continue to use local language where necessary • Establish an information system that enables the broad spectrum of citizens to understand all issues affecting them. • Ensure freedom of expression and other fundamental human rights. Where we want to be (2030) • The Namibian people continue to actively participate in decision making through free, fair and frequent elections, as well as through other consultative processes. • The government operates in an effective, efficient, transparent, and accountable manner at all levels, under acceptable constitutional principles. • The Namibian people and government continue to support and actively exercise their constitutionally guaranteed political rights. • The respect for these rights is extended to all individuals and groups in a spirit of tolerance, fairness and responsibility to the whole society. • A Namibia that enjoys a tolerant and free political environment. • Allows and encourages people to participate through political parties of their own choice in free, fair and regular elections • The Namibian people are continuously and effectively informed of their democratic rights. Current situation • The Constitution is the supreme law of Namibia • The Namibian Constitution has in place various safeguards that ensure accountability in government. • The freedom of speech and press is well established in our society. • Although Namibia did not choose to deal with its past injustices in the form of a Truth Commission, the government has supported and adopted policies aimed at reconciliation. None of the previously disadvantaged persons were expelled from the country due to their involvement with the previous colonial government. • The weakness of peace and political stability in Namibia lies in the economic disparities between the poor and the rich. Things to avoid • The independence of judiciary is not respected • Legal system functions undermined • Disregard for the laws by all citizens. Worst-case scenario • Ineffective and inefficient enforcement of law at all levels of government. • State policies do not reflect the wishes and aspirations of the people. • The best interests of the people are disregarded. • Namibia’s Independence and sovereignty are not protected. • Abuse of human rights. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 204 Objectives • To ensure that the Constitution of Namibia is upheld by all as the fundamental law of our sovereign and independent republic, set to protect and guarantee the rights and freedoms of everyone. • To have a truly democratic government, and a government which operates in an effective, efficient, transparent, and accountable manner at all levels, under acceptable constitutional principles. Strategies • Creating an enabling environment against social/political conflict and corruption, and for democratic participation. • Undertaking free, fair and frequent elections. • Creating effective partnerships among the different levels of government and the public. • Encouraging popular participation. • Strengthening human and institutional capacities. • Strengthening the checks and balances in the governmental system (e.g. watch-dogs and parliament). • Developing appropriate policies and legislation to realize good governance (e.g. freedom of information). • Increasing democratic participation through decentralization. • Educating all people on the constitutional and human rights adhered to by Namibia. • Creating an environment of tolerance. • Encouraging people to respect the rights of others while exercising their rights. • Enforcing and pro-actively extending the realisation of human rights. 6.8 Decentralisation The challenges facing national development, such as economic disparity, poverty, disease, limited skills base and many others, are primarily about making decisions on social, economic and environmental priorities, and on forms of investment, production and consumption. These decisions must be made and dealt with by governance systems at local, regional, national and global levels. Governance is simply the process or method by which society is governed. Two major trends, which can be either complementary or contradictory, are increasingly relevant for governance: decentralisation and devolution on the one hand, and globalisation on the other. It is recognised that many social and environmental issues are better managed at the local level, where authority, proprietorship/tenure, rights and responsibilities are devolved to appropriate local institutions and organisations, such as aspects of education (school boards), running of towns and villages, water-point and rangeland management, wildlife and forest management, etc. On the other hand, issues arising from globalisation processes, such as trade liberalisation, global communications, foreign investment through multinational corporations and global environmental impact such as climate change and ozone depletion, require global rules and governance systems. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 205 The challenge for effective governance in support of sustainable long-term development is to (a) determine which issues are best addressed at which level; a good general principle is to decentralise and devolve to the lowest effective level; (b) ensure coherence between policy options pursued at different levels; and (c) find ways to ensure that local people can properly exercise their option to be involved, even where it appears that the policy agenda is best focused at national or global levels. This call for capacity-building, both human and institutional, is aimed at all levels of governance. The conception and introduction of the Policy of Decentralisation in Namibia has its origins in the South West Africa People’s Organization’s (SWAPO) Political Manifesto of 1989, on Local Government and Housing. The manifesto provided that ‘under the SWAPO government there would be democratically elected authorities in rural and urban areas, in order to give power to the people at grass roots level, to make decisions on matters affecting their lives’. That vision on local governance was later enshrined in the Constitution of independent Namibia as Chapter 12. It provides for a system of regional and local government in the country. Article 102(1) specifically provides for structures of regional and local governments. It states that, “for purposes of regional and local government, Namibia shall be divided into regional and local units which shall consist of such regional and local authorities as may be determined and defined by an Act of Parliament”. In 1992 Parliament put into effect the constitutional provision under Chapter 12 by enacting the Regional Councils Act, 1992 (No. 22 of 1992) and Local Authorities Act, 1992 (No. 23 of 1992). The two pieces of legislation instituted the introduction and implementation of Decentralisation in the country. Both Acts provided for the determination and establishment of councils; qualifications and elections of councillors; management committees of councils; chief executive officers and other officers/employees of the councils; powers, duties, functions, rights and obligations of councils and financial matters in respect of both regional and local authorities councils. In 1996, more than three years after the enactment of the Regional Councils and Local Authorities Acts of 1992, the Ministry of Regional, Local Government and Housing (MRLGH) decided to consult various stakeholders to determine whether decentralisation was on course. The consultations revealed that decentralisation was not proceeding as expected. Consequently, a policy dialogue ensued on what was realistically possible to decentralise further, in what time frame decentralisation should take place, and with what resources it should be effected. The policy dialogue culminated in the preparation of the Decentralisation Policy document, which was approved by Cabinet on 11 December 1996, and by the National Assembly in September 1997. The policy was officially launched on 30 March 1998. The document identifies functions to be decentralised, and lays down implementation guidelines, resource strategies and the choice of the form of decentralisation the country is going to take. In the document it is proposed that decentralisation go through various stages with the ultimate aim being devolution. The exercise (decentralisation) portrays to the regional councils and local authorities as independent entities. It is designed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 206 to be phased-in by region or local authority, by functions and within functions. It is also proposed that some functions be decentralised immediately, and others in the intermediate term and in the long-term. The implementation of the policy was kick-started through delegation, as an interim measure. Under delegation, regional councils and local authorities are to act as principal agents under the direction of the central government. Central government remains responsible for financing the cost of programmes of delegated functions. To that end, line ministries have been requested to indicate the amount of funds budgeted and approved for the delegated functions and services by programme and per region. At the same time the Ministry of Finance and MRLGH are expected to work out technical details regarding the modality of financial transfers under delegation. There is to be a contractual relationship between the centre and councils for which the terms and conditions will be determined by the central government. For all delegated functions, matters of operation become the responsibility of the regional councils and local authorities. Line ministries are required to list all matters of operations in respect of the delegated functions, and to provide guidelines on them (including the professional technical standards to be attained) to regional councils and local authorities. The regional officer, as chief executive of the regional council, is to assume the overall charge and supervision of all the line ministries’ delegated officials in the region. To facilitate implementation of the decentralisation policy, the government in 2000 passed the following legislation: The Local Authorities’ Amendment Act, 2000; The Regional Councils’ Amendment Act, 2000; The Decentralisation Enabling Act, 2000; and The Trust Fund for Regional Development and Equity Provisions Act, 2000. Although Government is fully committed to the process of decentralisation, it has not as yet been able to carry all the central government ministries with it. For decentralisation to be successful, there needs to be commitment on the part of all the relevant stakeholders. Despite line ministries having been asked by the Secretary to the Cabinet, way back in 1998, to identify the precise operations to be decentralised, and the staff and resources to accompany delegation, only very few ministries have prepared themselves for the implementation process, to date and only two ministries have indicated a possible, gradual transfer of functions, staff and funds for the financial year 2001. In the light of this state of affairs, and acknowledging the fact that the line ministries in all probability will not be capable of working out action plans without external assistance, the MRLGH has resolved to create cross-ministerial taskforces, assigned the responsibility of transforming the DIP into concrete action-oriented work plans. The DIP, which was prepared by MRLGH, aims at providing all stakeholders involved in the decentralisation implementation process with an instrument to guide them (Ministries, Regional Councils and Local Authorities) through the various phases of the implementation process. Presently, the DIP is in its final draft form. Upon finalisation of the DIP, the next step would be to work out terms of reference for the various taskforces to be established; to appoint the members of the taskforces and to start preparing ministerial action plans. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 207 The Ministries of Finance and RLGH have provided adequate technical details regarding the modality of financial transfers to the regional administration. There is to be a contractual relationship between the centre and councils for which the terms and conditions will be determined by the central government. For all functions, matters of operation become the responsibility of the regional councils and local authorities. Line ministries are required to list all matters of operations in respect of the delegated functions, and to provide guidelines on them (including the professional technical standards to be attained) to regional councils and local authorities. The regional officer, as chief executive of the regional council, is to assume the overall charge and supervision of all the line ministries’ delegated officials in the region. Sub-Vision Local communities and regional bodies are empowered, and are fully involved in the development process; they actually formulate and implement their respective development plans, while the national government - working hand in-hand with civil society organizations - provides the enabling environment (laws, policies, finance, security, etc.) for the effective management of national, regional and local development efforts. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 208 Decentralisation Things to do • Determine which issues are best addressed at which level; • Decentralise and devolve to the lowest effective level; • Ensure coherence between policy options pursued at different levels; • Find ways to ensure that local people can properly exercise their option to be involved, even where it appears that the policy agenda is best focused at national or global levels; • Embark upon capacity-building, both human and institutional, at all levels of governance. Where we want to be (2030) • Namibia is a country with streamlined governance systems in place, that truly support the needs of the people by creating efficient enabling conditions, and that are accountable and effective in promoting policy implementation. • Appropriate and thorough devolution and decentralisation processes have occurred in accordance with the Decentralisation Policy. • The principles of human rights are upheld, civil liberties and multi party democracy are firmly entrenched and defended, and comprehensive approaches to reduce crime and domestic violence, to promote peace, stability and social integration have been implemented. • All the necessary institutional and organisational change effected at national, regional and local levels in support of decentralisation. • Decentralisation proves to be cost effective. • Adequate capacity and financial resources are available for the smooth and effective operation of government at Regional and Local Authority levels. • Regional governments design and implement their respective development plans within the context of NDPs. • Decentralisation accepted as the most effective means of service delivery. Current situation • Decentralisation Policy was launched on 30 March 1998. • To facilitate implementation of the decentralisation policy, the government in 2000 passed the necessary enabling legislation in 2000: The Local Authorities Amendment Act, 2000; The Regional Councils Amendment Act, 2000; The Decentralisation Enabling Act, 2000; and The Trust Fund for Regional Development and Equity Provisions Act, 2000. • Although Government is fully committed to the process of decentralisation, it has not as yet been able to carry all the central government ministries with it. • The MRLGH has resolved to create cross-ministerial taskforces assigned the responsibility of transforming the DIP into concrete action-oriented work plans. • The Ministry of Finance and MRLGH have provided adequate technical details regarding the modality of financial transfers to the regional administration. Things to avoid • Neglect human and institutional capacity building. • Piecemeal implementation of the Decentralisation Policy. • Decentralisation and devolution of authority without financial and related resources. • Limiting political participation at local level. Worst-casescenario • Decentralisation process uncoordinated. • Development planning and plan implementation become increasingly centralised. • Regional and Local Authorities are controlled and governed directly from the centre. • Local participation in governance is limited. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 209 Objective To achieve effective governance in support of sustainable long-term development through decentralisation and devolution of authority to the lowest effective level so that local people can properly exercise their option to be involved in decision making and management of resources. Strategies • Implementing all aspects of the Decentralization Policy; • Empowering local authorities to improve their revenue generating capacities and exercise control over the management of their affairs; • Encouraging the people of Namibia to make their own decisions and to do so at their own level regarding political, cultural, economic and social development matters; • Empowering the regions to reduce HIV/AIDS. • Providing adequate financial and other resources for government operations at Regional and Local Authority level; • Building human and institutional capacity in support of local governance; • Enhancing the capacity of the people at local level to set their own priorities, plan, implement and monitor their development programmes; • Providing central Government support to local government development initiatives. 6.9 Responsible Decision-making Namibia has a long list of global advantages, some of which it shares with other southern African countries. However some are unique to Namibia, either as stand alone advantages, or when seen in, the context of other factors, such as Namibia’s peace and stability, its good infrastructure and communications network and its highly developed and convivial capital city. Such comparative advantages include its cultural and biological diversity, its clean and uncontaminated fish and meat, its scenic diversity, tourism potential and wilderness, its position to facilitate regional transport, communications, services such as banking, insurance and other forms of skilled commerce, and many others. Where one has a comparative advantage, globalisation becomes an opportunity, not a threat. The best means of harnessing the potential of our comparative advantages are through partnerships. This is the key to economic progress, to social harmony and to sustainable development. It involves partnerships between and within different sectors and levels of government, communities and civil society, the private sector, non-governmental organisations, research and training institutions, rural and urban societies, and with the international community – essentially, individuals in their institutional and private capacities working together for the greater good. Government has an important role to fulfil – to create the enabling environment through policy and, if necessary, legislation, to create incentives and, where necessary, to develop a regulatory framework. The better the policy, the less effort government should need to expend on its implementation and regulation; the rest of society will implement. The creation of good policies that optimise our comparative and competitive advantages through smart partnerships, requires a sound knowledge base, which ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 210 in turn is acquired from good information. Information is obtained from science and research, and institutions that are able to nurture and share information and knowledge. Industrialised countries spend up to 60% of their GDP, in one form or another, on science and technology. Least developed countries typically spend less than 1% of their GDP on these sectors. The generation of information and knowledge, except in a few cases of protection from competition, must be placed in the public domain so that it is used by the greatest number for the greater good of all. Sub-Vision Namibia’s goal is to promote and strengthen “smart partnerships” for sustainable development, to optimise her comparative and competitive advantages, and to generate and manage good quality information and knowledge by supporting and fostering active and critical science and research through well-structured national institutions, as well as in partnership with institutions abroad. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 211 Responsible Decision-Making Things to do • Harness the potential of our comparative advantages through partnerships. • Establish partnership between and within different sectors and levels of government, communities and civil society, the private sector, non governmental organisations, research and training institutions, rural and urban societies, and with the international community. • Encourage individuals in their institutional and private capacities to work together for the greater good. • Government should create the enabling environment through policy and, if necessary, legislation, to create incentives and, where necessary, to develop a regulatory framework. • Invest in science and technology research for the generation of information. Where we want to be (2030) • Namibia’s comparative and competitive advantages optimally and sustainably developed, in an increasingly global environment; • There exists a conducive and dynamic enabling environment for the evolution of “smart partnerships” to effectively exploit Namibia’s comparative advantages, as well as other development opportunities; • There is vibrant science and technology research, with particular attention to areas related to Namibia’s comparative advantages and development needs; • Namibia is in a position where relevant, high quality information and knowledge are readily accessible within the public domain. Current situation • Namibia has a long list of global advantages, such as Namibia’s peace and stability, its good infrastructure and communications network and its highly developed and convivial capital city. • Comparative advantages include its cultural and biological diversity, its clean and uncontaminated fish and meat, its scenic diversity, tourism potential and wilderness, its position to facilitate regional transport, communications, services such as banking, insurance and other forms of skilled commerce, and many others. Things to avoid • Discourage science and technology research. • Protect the generation of information and knowledge such that it is used by a limited number of people only. • Operate without the benefit of the partnership strategy. Worst-case scenario • Inadequate enabling environment for the operation of the partnership strategy. • Not utilising our comparative advantage in regional and global competition. • Treat globalisation as a threat. • Policies that require more government effort and less society involvement in implementation and regulation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 212 Objectives • To optimally and sustainably develop and exploit Namibia’s comparative and competitive advantages, in an increasingly global environment; • To establish a conducive and dynamic enabling environment for the evolution of “smart partnerships”, to effectively exploit Namibia’s comparative advantages, as well as other development opportunities; • To strengthen science and research, with particular attention to areas related to Namibia’s comparative advantages and development needs, and to be in a position where relevant, high quality information and knowledge are readily accessible within the public domain. Strategies Continually exploring ways in which Namibia can identify and sustainably exploit its comparative and competitive advantages by: • Developing conducive policy environments for different sectors to optimise the transition from local to global exploitation of these advantages, with strong incentives and, where necessary, a regulatory framework that ensures equity, fair practice and sustainability • Creating and nurturing a positive and supportive environment for the development and growth of “smart partnerships”, to best promote Namibia’s comparative advantages and development needs • Creating a national commitment to sustainable development: o as a process and not a fixed plan o as the responsibility of society as a whole, not just the state or government o as sharing information, knowledge and opportunities, and not under centralised command and control structures o as having a focus on outcomes (i.e. impact), not outputs (e.g. laws, project activities such as meetings, etc.) o as an integrated initiative – within and between sectors and institutions – and not as a set of sectoral activities o as a locally and domestically-driven and financed process, with resources tricked in over the necessary period of time, and not as costly short-term “projects”. • Creating a conducive and supportive environment for public-interest scientific and research organizations, to build their capacity to generate and share information, to build knowledge and to disseminate this as widely as possible. • Developing strong incentives for information to be shared widely in the public domain, with all government institutions leading by example. 6.10 Institutional Capacity For Development Namibia’s national capacity is the combination of human resources, institutions, and practices that enable it to achieve its development goals. Capacity building is both the vehicle for, and the object of, national development. The process requires a suitable enabling environment in terms of political stability and freedom, a sound legal system, economic resources and opportunities, social norms which are conducive to sustained development and which are well understood by most of the population. Capacity-building includes, but extends far beyond, the traditional approaches of human resource planning, education and training, and employment generation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 213 The apartheid system created a most negative and unconducive environment for development of skills required for effective consummation of the benefits of Independence. As a consequence, capacity to implement post Independence programmes has generally fallen short of optimum requirements. Namibia’s capacity building challenge is, however, far from daunting, because the political and economic foundation for development is relatively strong. Namibia’s unique colonial legacy has created capacity gaps in terms of the general level of education of the majority of the population, and a relative shortage of indigenous professional and technical personnel. The Government has initiated a study funded by the WB on the subject of Human Capital Development and Knowledge Management. This initiative aims at identifying gaps in Namibia’s Human Capital Investment and Development Strategies, and proposed strategies to fill these gaps. Key areas of capacity-building being pursued by Government as part and parcel of the overall strategy for sustained political, social, and economic development are the following: the Enabling Environment, the Public Sector, the Private Sector, Civil Society, and Education, Training and Learning. A sound macro-economic environment is required for the achievement of the desired human and institutional capacity-building. In this regard, Government is responding to the challenges of : (i) Capacity to maintain the status quo; (ii) Capacity to realistically adjust the macro-economic environment and bring it in line with the aspirations of independent Namibia (i.e. issues of equity); (iii) Capacity of the public sector to implement and sustain development programmes; (iv) Capacity of the public sector to manage the regulatory framework within which the private sector operates; and (v) Capacity to manage the utilisation of environmental resources sustainably. The human aspects of capacity building have already been addressed in Chapter 4, under “Education and Training”. The focus in this section is on institutional capacity-building for development. Sub-Vision Namibia has well-established democratic institutions that provide the enabling environment for effective participation of all citizens in modern social and economic development. In support of the process of capacity-building, the nation’s education system consists of public and private initiatives that, together, respond adequately to the challenges of modern technologically developed and industrial society by producing all the required managerial, technical and professional personnel. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 214 Institutional Capacity for Development What to do • Adopt and implement appropriate national capacity building strategy for sustained political, social, and economic development. • The public sector, private sector and Civil Society must work together to implement the national capacity building strategy. • Government should continue to create the enabling environment for all actors in development to operate effectively. • Undertake comprehensive institutional restructuring. • Reduce the spread of Where we want to be (2030) • Well established democratic institutions that provide the enabling environment for effective participation of all citizens in social and economic development. • Education and training institutions that respond effectively to the challenge of modern industrial society by producing all the required managerial, technical and professional personnel. Current situation • Namibia has established a multi party democratic system, and there is a good measure of racial and political tolerance. • Namibia is yet to achieve the objective of equipping and empowering all her citizens to contribute effectively to the modern economic sector and challenge of nation building. • The education system is battling with capacity gaps in the general level of education of the black majority population created by colonial legacy, and a relative shortage of indigenous professional and technical personnel. • The infrastructure is well developed to attract private Investment but there is need to create conditions more favourable to efficiency, profitability, and value What not to do • Approach capacity building as a government initiative, with or without private and Civil Society participation. • Allow training and educational institutions to pursue their programmes independently without reference to national development priorities. • Pursue institution and human capacity building without a comprehensive national policy and programme. Worst-case scenario • Poor management and debasement of democratic institutions lead to decay of institutions and underutilised capacities. • Uncoordinated educational policies cause over-production of graduates in disciplines that do not reflect the labour market signals for capacity ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 215 Objectives • The overall objective is to ensure that Namibia’s human and institutional capacities are well developed and adequate to meet the challenges of a highly developed society. • To ensure that Namibia has efficient and well-structured national institutions fully utilising human potential and delivering an effective, client-centred service to produce well-qualified and trained human resources, with qualifications which are nationally, regionally and internationally recognised. • Public and Private Institutions offer services appropriate to customer needs giving value for money through competitive process • To ensure that Namibia has a diversified, competent and highly productive labour force, with only low levels of unemployment, which meets the requirements of an equally diversified economy. Strategies • Providing a sound regulatory framework not only to define the role of political leadership and the civil services, but also to guide the operations of the private sector – including laws and regulations relating to property, commerce, civil disputes, monopolies, banks and capital markets, environmental protection, etc. • Intensifying all the efforts by Government in providing an enabling environment for the establishment, growth and sustained functioning of public, private, foreign, local, cooperative, individual and family enterprises. • Ensuring that Government succeeds in rationalising the Public Service, as well as in reducing the size of the public sector. • Supporting the training of the staff of weak NGO’s to build up skills for organisation and management, project identification and preparation, for research, monitoring and evaluation, and for networking, lobbying and advocacy. • Supporting human capacity-building to enable the regions plan and implement development programmes to promote popular participation and regional development; • Facilitating the implementation of the National Strategic Plan on HIV/ AIDS (1998-2004), the Poverty Reduction Action Programme and National Population Policy for Sustainable Human Development. • Factoring HIV/AIDS into capacity-building at the operational level; • Developing and implementing appropriate framework for the application of Affirmative Action in all areas defining access to social and economic opportunities for correcting the imbalances in access to opportunities inherited from the colonial period; • Improving the economic capacity through: i) reviewing Namibia’s investment promotion strategy with a view to attracting export-oriented investments from Europe, Asia, and America; ii) reducing the high cost of labour, in relation to output, by improving the general level of basic education and by greater flexibility in the labour market; iii) extending the incentives given to manufacturing firms to promote training to investors in other sectors as well; iv) taking a stronger position with South Africa regarding high import tariffs in the SACU regions, which raise the costs of doing business, and undermine Namibian’s export competitiveness. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 216 • Putting in place a transparent process of performance measurement, evaluation and related rewards for members of senior management, by the corporate governing bodies of institutions • Adopting social and environmental management practices, by both public and private institutions in Namibia, that allow them to measure their impact by means of accepted performance indicators, on the communities within which they operate • Adopting and communicating (public and private institutions in Namibia) to external stakeholders, clear guidelines and standards for organisational integrity, against which organisational and individual activities are measured. • Ensuring, by institutions in Namibia, regular disclosure on all financial and non-financial issues of relevance and interest to stakeholders and the public at large. • Providing short and long-term training in project planning and sustainable management of resources to all regional council managers. • Improving service provision and resource management efficiency through public/private partnerships (including joint ventures, the outsourcing of management tasks to parastatals, the private sector and civil society groups and organisations) which hold great promise for improved efficiency regarding service provision and resource management.